Network OS Administrator`s Guide, v6.0.0

53-1003656-01
27 February 2015
Network OS
Administrator’s Guide
Supporting Network OS v6.0.0
© 2015, Brocade Communications Systems, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
ADX, Brocade, Brocade Assurance, the B-wing symbol, DCX, Fabric OS, HyperEdge, ICX, MLX, MyBrocade, OpenScript, The Effortless
Network, VCS, VDX, Vplane, and Vyatta are registered trademarks, and Fabric Vision and vADX are trademarks of Brocade
Communications Systems, Inc., in the United States and/or in other countries. Other brands, products, or service names mentioned may be
trademarks of others.
Notice: This document is for informational purposes only and does not set forth any warranty, expressed or implied, concerning any
equipment, equipment feature, or service offered or to be offered by Brocade. Brocade reserves the right to make changes to this document
at any time, without notice, and assumes no responsibility for its use. This informational document describes features that may not be
currently available. Contact a Brocade sales office for information on feature and product availability. Export of technical data contained in
this document may require an export license from the United States government.
The authors and Brocade Communications Systems, Inc. assume no liability or responsibility to any person or entity with respect to the
accuracy of this document or any loss, cost, liability, or damages arising from the information contained herein or the computer programs that
accompany it.
The product described by this document may contain open source software covered by the GNU General Public License or other open
source license agreements. To find out which open source software is included in Brocade products, view the licensing terms applicable to
the open source software, and obtain a copy of the programming source code, please visit http://www.brocade.com/support/oscd.
Contents
Preface..................................................................................................................................... 9
Document conventions......................................................................................9
Text formatting conventions.................................................................. 9
Command syntax conventions.............................................................. 9
Notes, cautions, and warnings............................................................ 10
Brocade resources.......................................................................................... 11
Contacting Brocade Technical Support...........................................................11
Document feedback........................................................................................ 12
About This Document.............................................................................................................. 13
Supported hardware and software.................................................................. 13
Using the Network OS CLI ............................................................................. 14
What’s new in this document.......................................................................... 14
Introduction to Network OS and Brocade VCS Fabric Technology..............................................15
Introduction to Brocade Network OS...............................................................15
Brocade VCS Fabric terminology........................................................16
Introduction to Brocade VCS Fabric technology............................................. 16
Automation.......................................................................................... 17
Distributed intelligence........................................................................ 18
Logical chassis....................................................................................19
Ethernet fabric formation.....................................................................20
Brocade VCS Fabric technology use cases....................................................21
Classic Ethernet access and aggregation use case........................... 21
Large-scale server virtualization use case.......................................... 23
Brocade VCS Fabric connectivity with Fibre Channel SAN................ 24
Topology and scaling...................................................................................... 24
Core-edge topology.............................................................................25
Ring topology...................................................................................... 25
Full mesh topology.............................................................................. 26
Basic Switch Management......................................................................................................29
Switch management overview........................................................................ 29
Connecting to a switch........................................................................ 29
Telnet and SSH overview....................................................................30
SSH server key exchange and authentication.................................... 30
Feature support for Telnet...................................................................31
Feature support for SSH..................................................................... 31
Firmware upgrade and downgrade considerations with Telnet or
SSH............................................................................................... 31
Using DHCP Automatic Deployment...................................................31
Telnet and SSH considerations and limitations...................................34
Ethernet management interfaces.................................................................... 34
Brocade VDX Ethernet interfaces....................................................... 34
Lights-out management...................................................................... 35
Stateless IPv6 autoconfiguration.....................................................................35
Switch attributes..............................................................................................35
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
3
Switch types..................................................................................................36
Operational modes........................................................................................36
Logical chassis cluster mode............................................................ 37
Fabric cluster mode...........................................................................39
Modular platform basics................................................................................40
Management modules.......................................................................40
Switch fabric modules....................................................................... 41
Line cards..........................................................................................41
Supported interface modes...........................................................................42
Slot numbering and configuration................................................................. 42
Slot numbering..................................................................................42
Slot configuration.............................................................................. 42
Connecting to a switch..................................................................................43
Establishing a physical connection for a Telnet or SSH session...... 43
Telnet services.................................................................................. 43
Connecting with SSH........................................................................ 45
Using the management VRF.........................................................................47
Configuring and managing switches............................................................. 47
Configuring Ethernet management interfaces.................................. 47
Configuring a switch in logical chassis cluster mode........................ 53
Configuring a switch in fabric cluster mode.......................................63
Displaying switch interfaces.............................................................. 63
Displaying slots and module status information................................ 64
Replacing a line card ........................................................................65
Configuring High Availability............................................................. 65
Disabling and enabling a chassis......................................................67
Rebooting a switch............................................................................67
Troubleshooting switches..................................................................68
Configuring policy-based resource management......................................... 70
Configuring hardware profiles........................................................... 71
Guidelines for changing hardware profiles........................................72
Using hardware profile show commands.......................................... 73
Brocade support for OpenStack....................................................................73
Configuring OpenStack to access Network OS................................ 74
Auto Fabric....................................................................................................75
Configuring Auto Fabric for bare metal............................................. 75
Changing RBridge-ID-to-WWN mapping for bare-metal
configuration................................................................................ 76
Mixed-version fabric cluster support............................................................. 77
Using Network Time Protocol.................................................................................................79
Network Time Protocol overview...................................................................79
Date and time settings...................................................................... 79
Time zone settings............................................................................ 79
Configuring NTP............................................................................................80
Configuration considerations for NTP............................................... 80
Setting the date and time.................................................................. 80
Setting the time zone........................................................................ 80
Displaying the current local clock and time zone.............................. 81
Removing the time zone setting........................................................81
Synchronizing the local time with an external source....................... 82
Displaying the active NTP server...................................................... 82
Removing an NTP server IP address................................................82
Configuration Management...................................................................................................83
Configuration management overview........................................................... 83
4
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Configuration file types........................................................................83
Displaying configurations................................................................................ 85
Displaying the default configuration.................................................... 85
Displaying the startup configuration.................................................... 85
Displaying the running configuration................................................... 85
Saving configuration changes......................................................................... 85
Saving the running configuration.........................................................86
Saving the running configuration to a file............................................ 86
Applying previously saved configuration changes.............................. 86
Backing up configurations............................................................................... 86
Uploading the startup configuration to an external host......................87
Backing up the startup configuration to a USB device........................ 87
Configuration restoration.................................................................................87
Restoring the default configuration..................................................... 88
Managing configurations on a modular chassis.............................................. 88
Managing configurations on line cards................................................88
Managing configurations across redundant management modules....89
Managing configurations in Brocade VCS Fabric mode................................. 89
Automatic distribution of configuration parameters............................. 90
Downloading a configuration to multiple switches...............................90
Rejoining an offline node to a logical chassis cluster......................................90
Using default configuration in logical chassis cluster to avoid
segmentation issues..................................................................................91
Managing flash files........................................................................................ 92
Listing the contents of the flash memory.............................................92
Deleting a file from the flash memory..................................................92
Renaming a flash memory file.............................................................92
Viewing the contents of a file in the flash memory.............................. 92
Configuring SNMP...................................................................................................................95
Simple Network Management Protocol overview............................................95
SNMP Manager...................................................................................95
SNMP Agent....................................................................................... 95
Management Information Base (MIB)................................................. 95
Basic SNMP operation........................................................................ 96
Understanding MIBs............................................................................96
SNMP configuration...................................................................................... 101
Configuring SNMP community strings.............................................. 102
Configuring SNMP server hosts........................................................102
Configuring multiple SNMP server contexts......................................104
Configuring SNMP server views....................................................... 104
Configuring SNMP server groups..................................................... 105
Configuring SNMP server users........................................................105
Configuring SNMP server v3hosts.................................................... 106
Displaying SNMP configurations.......................................................106
Configuring Brocade VCS Fabrics ......................................................................................... 109
Fabric overview............................................................................................. 109
Brocade VCS Fabric formation......................................................... 109
How RBridges work...........................................................................110
Neighbor discovery........................................................................... 110
Brocade trunks.................................................................................. 111
Fabric formation................................................................................ 111
Fabric routing protocol ..................................................................... 112
Configuring a Brocade VCS Fabric............................................................... 112
Adding a new switch into a fabric......................................................114
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
5
Configuring fabric interfaces........................................................... 114
Configuring broadcast, unknown unicast, and multicast
forwarding..................................................................................115
Configuring VCS virtual IP addresses.............................................117
Configuring fabric ECMP load balancing........................................ 118
Configuring Metro VCS........................................................................................................121
Metro VCS overview................................................................................... 121
Metro VCS using long-distance ISLs.............................................. 122
Metro VCS using standard-distance ISLs....................................... 125
Metro VCS combined with vLAGs...................................................126
Configuring a long-distance ISL..................................................................129
Configuring interconnected Ethernet Fabrics..............................................129
Administering Zones........................................................................................................... 133
Zoning overview..........................................................................................133
Example zoning topology................................................................ 133
LSAN zones ................................................................................... 135
Managing domain IDs..................................................................... 136
Approaches to zoning..................................................................... 137
Zone objects....................................................................................138
Zoning enforcement........................................................................ 139
Considerations for zoning architecture........................................... 139
Operational considerations for zoning............................................ 140
Configuring and managing zones .............................................................. 141
Zone configuration management overview..................................... 141
Understanding and managing default zoning access modes......... 142
Managing zone aliases................................................................... 143
Creating zones................................................................................ 146
Managing zones..............................................................................148
Zone configuration scenario example............................................. 155
Merging zones.................................................................................156
Configuring LSAN zones: Device-sharing example........................ 161
Configuring Fibre Channel Ports.......................................................................................... 165
Fibre Channel ports overview..................................................................... 165
Connecting to an FC Fabric through an FC Router.................................... 166
Fibre Channel port configuration.................................................................167
Using Fibre Channel commands.....................................................167
Activating and deactivating Fibre Channel ports.............................167
Configuring and viewing Fibre Channel port attributes................... 168
Configuring a Fibre Channel port for trunking................................. 170
Monitoring Fibre Channel ports.......................................................170
Using Access Gateway........................................................................................................ 173
Access Gateway basic concepts.................................................................173
Switches supported for Access Gateway........................................174
Network diagrams........................................................................... 174
Access Gateway and native VCS modes........................................176
Access Gateway in a logical chassis cluster...................................177
Access Gateway with FCoE logical SANs...................................... 177
Access Gateway ports.................................................................... 177
Access Gateway features and requirements.................................. 180
Enabling Access Gateway mode................................................................ 183
6
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Disabling Access Gateway mode..................................................................184
Displaying Access Gateway configuration data............................................ 184
VF_Port to N_Port mapping.......................................................................... 186
Displaying port mapping....................................................................186
Configuring port mapping..................................................................189
Port Grouping policy......................................................................................190
Displaying port grouping information.................................................191
Creating and removing port groups...................................................192
Naming a port group......................................................................... 192
Adding and removing N_Ports in a port group.................................. 193
Port Grouping policy modes..............................................................194
Trunking in Access Gateway mode...............................................................196
Setting up trunking for Access Gateway........................................... 196
Access Gateway under FlexPort...................................................................197
Configuring Access Gateway under FlexPort .................................. 197
Restoring N_Port login balance ....................................................... 198
N_Port monitoring for unreliable links........................................................... 198
Setting and displaying the reliability counter for N_Port monitoring..198
Displaying Access Gateway N_Port utilization data .....................................199
Using System Monitor and Threshold Monitor........................................................................201
System Monitor overview.............................................................................. 201
Monitored components......................................................................201
Monitored FRUs................................................................................ 201
Configuring System Monitor..........................................................................202
Setting system thresholds................................................................. 203
Setting state alerts and actions......................................................... 203
Configuring e-mail alerts................................................................... 203
Viewing system SFP optical monitoring defaults.............................. 204
Displaying the switch health status................................................... 204
Threshold Monitor overview.......................................................................... 204
CPU and memory monitoring............................................................205
SFP monitoring................................................................................. 206
Security monitoring........................................................................... 208
Interface monitoring.......................................................................... 208
Configuring Threshold Monitor......................................................................209
Viewing threshold status................................................................... 210
CPU and memory threshold monitoring............................................ 210
Configuring SFP monitoring thresholds and alerts............................211
Security monitoring........................................................................... 212
Configuring Interface monitoring....................................................... 212
Pausing and continuing threshold monitoring................................... 212
Using VMware vCenter ..........................................................................................................215
vCenter and Network OS integration overview............................................. 215
vCenter properties.............................................................................215
vCenter guidelines and restrictions................................................... 215
vCenter discovery......................................................................................... 216
vCenter configuration.................................................................................... 216
Step 1: Enabling QoS........................................................................217
Step 2: Enabling CDP/LLDP ............................................................ 217
Step 3: Adding and activating the vCenter........................................217
Discovery timer interval ....................................................................218
User-triggered vCenter discovery..................................................... 219
Viewing the discovered virtual assets............................................... 219
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
7
Configuring Remote Monitoring...........................................................................................221
RMON overview.......................................................................................... 221
Configuring and managing RMON.............................................................. 221
Configuring RMON events.............................................................. 221
Configuring RMON Ethernet group statistics collection.................. 222
Configuring RMON alarm settings.................................................. 222
Monitoring CRC errors.................................................................... 222
Index.................................................................................................................................. 225
8
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Preface
● Document conventions......................................................................................................9
● Brocade resources.......................................................................................................... 11
● Contacting Brocade Technical Support...........................................................................11
● Document feedback........................................................................................................ 12
Document conventions
The document conventions describe text formatting conventions, command syntax conventions, and
important notice formats used in Brocade technical documentation.
Text formatting conventions
Text formatting conventions such as boldface, italic, or Courier font may be used in the flow of the text
to highlight specific words or phrases.
Format
Description
bold text
Identifies command names
Identifies keywords and operands
Identifies the names of user-manipulated GUI elements
Identifies text to enter at the GUI
italic text
Identifies emphasis
Identifies variables
Identifies document titles
Courier font
Identifies CLI output
Identifies command syntax examples
Command syntax conventions
Bold and italic text identify command syntax components. Delimiters and operators define groupings of
parameters and their logical relationships.
Convention
Description
bold text
Identifies command names, keywords, and command options.
italic text
Identifies a variable.
value
In Fibre Channel products, a fixed value provided as input to a command
option is printed in plain text, for example, --show WWN.
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
9
Notes, cautions, and warnings
Convention
Description
[]
Syntax components displayed within square brackets are optional.
Default responses to system prompts are enclosed in square brackets.
{x|y|z}
A choice of required parameters is enclosed in curly brackets separated by
vertical bars. You must select one of the options.
In Fibre Channel products, square brackets may be used instead for this
purpose.
x|y
A vertical bar separates mutually exclusive elements.
<>
Nonprinting characters, for example, passwords, are enclosed in angle
brackets.
...
Repeat the previous element, for example, member[member...].
\
Indicates a “soft” line break in command examples. If a backslash separates
two lines of a command input, enter the entire command at the prompt without
the backslash.
Notes, cautions, and warnings
Notes, cautions, and warning statements may be used in this document. They are listed in the order of
increasing severity of potential hazards.
NOTE
A Note provides a tip, guidance, or advice, emphasizes important information, or provides a reference
to related information.
ATTENTION
An Attention statement indicates a stronger note, for example, to alert you when traffic might be
interrupted or the device might reboot.
CAUTION
A Caution statement alerts you to situations that can be potentially hazardous to you or cause
damage to hardware, firmware, software, or data.
DANGER
A Danger statement indicates conditions or situations that can be potentially lethal or
extremely hazardous to you. Safety labels are also attached directly to products to warn of
these conditions or situations.
10
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Brocade resources
Brocade resources
Visit the Brocade website to locate related documentation for your product and additional Brocade
resources.
You can download additional publications supporting your product at www.brocade.com. Select the
Brocade Products tab to locate your product, then click the Brocade product name or image to open the
individual product page. The user manuals are available in the resources module at the bottom of the
page under the Documentation category.
To get up-to-the-minute information on Brocade products and resources, go to MyBrocade. You can
register at no cost to obtain a user ID and password.
Release notes are available on MyBrocade under Product Downloads.
White papers, online demonstrations, and data sheets are available through the Brocade website.
Contacting Brocade Technical Support
As a Brocade customer, you can contact Brocade Technical Support 24x7 online, by telephone, or by email. Brocade OEM customers contact their OEM/Solutions provider.
Brocade customers
For product support information and the latest information on contacting the Technical Assistance
Center, go to http://www.brocade.com/services-support/index.html.
If you have purchased Brocade product support directly from Brocade, use one of the following methods
to contact the Brocade Technical Assistance Center 24x7.
Online
Telephone
E-mail
Preferred method of contact for nonurgent issues:
Required for Sev 1-Critical and Sev
2-High issues:
[email protected]
• My Cases through MyBrocade
•
Continental US: 1-800-752-8061
• Software downloads and licensing •
tools
Europe, Middle East, Africa, and
Asia Pacific: +800-AT FIBREE
(+800 28 34 27 33)
• Knowledge Base
•
For areas unable to access toll
free number: +1-408-333-6061
•
Toll-free numbers are available in
many countries.
Please include:
•
Problem summary
•
Serial number
•
Installation details
•
Environment description
Brocade OEM customers
If you have purchased Brocade product support from a Brocade OEM/Solution Provider, contact your
OEM/Solution Provider for all of your product support needs.
• OEM/Solution Providers are trained and certified by Brocade to support Brocade® products.
• Brocade provides backline support for issues that cannot be resolved by the OEM/Solution Provider.
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
11
Document feedback
• Brocade Supplemental Support augments your existing OEM support contract, providing direct
access to Brocade expertise. For more information, contact Brocade or your OEM.
• For questions regarding service levels and response times, contact your OEM/Solution Provider.
Document feedback
To send feedback and report errors in the documentation you can use the feedback form posted with
the document or you can e-mail the documentation team.
Quality is our first concern at Brocade and we have made every effort to ensure the accuracy and
completeness of this document. However, if you find an error or an omission, or you think that a topic
needs further development, we want to hear from you. You can provide feedback in two ways:
• Through the online feedback form in the HTML documents posted on www.brocade.com.
• By sending your feedback to [email protected]
Provide the publication title, part number, and as much detail as possible, including the topic heading
and page number if applicable, as well as your suggestions for improvement.
12
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
About This Document
● Supported hardware and software.................................................................................. 13
● Using the Network OS CLI ............................................................................................. 14
● What’s new in this document.......................................................................................... 14
Supported hardware and software
In those instances in which procedures or parts of procedures documented here apply to some switches
but not to others, this guide identifies exactly which switches are supported and which are not.
Although many different software and hardware configurations are tested and supported by Brocade
Communications Systems, Inc. for Network OS 6.0.0, documenting all possible configurations and
scenarios is beyond the scope of this document.
The following hardware platforms are supported by this release of Network OS:
• Brocade VDX 2740
NOTE
The Brocade VDX 2740 is the equivalent of the Lenovo Flex System EN4023 10Gb Scalable Switch.
This platform is identified in the system as EN4023.
• Brocade VDX 6740
‐
Brocade VDX 6740-48
‐
Brocade VDX 6740-64
• Brocade VDX 6740T
‐
Brocade VDX 6740T-48
‐
Brocade VDX 6740T-64
‐
Brocade VDX 6740T-1G
• Brocade VDX 6940-36Q
• Brocade VDX 8770
‐
‐
Brocade VDX 8770-4
Brocade VDX 8770-8
To obtain information about a Network OS version other than this release, refer to the documentation
specific to that version.
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
13
Using the Network OS CLI
Using the Network OS CLI
For complete instructions and support for using the Network OS command line interface (CLI), refer to
the Network OS Command Reference.
What’s new in this document
This document supports the following features introduced in Network OSv6.0.0:
• Auto Fabric (Bare-metal configuration)
• Default configuration mode
• Management interface shutdown
Beginning with Network OS v5.0.0, there are now five books that cover Network OS administration:
•
•
•
•
•
Network OS Administration Guide
Network OS Layer 2 Switching Configuration Guide
Network OS Layer 3 Routing Configuration Guide
Network OS Security Configuration Guide
Network OS Troubleshooting Guide
This document supports the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) enhancements introduced
in Network OSv5.0.1a for the Joint Interoperability Test Command (JITC) certification.
For complete information, refer to the Network OS Release Notes.
Additional documents for Network OS include the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
14
Network OS Command Reference
Network OS Upgrade Guide
Network OS Software Licensing Guide
Network OS Message Reference
Network OS Feature and Support RFC Matrix
Network OS NETCONF Operation’s Guide
Network OS YANG Reference
Network OS REST API Reference
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Introduction to Network OS and Brocade VCS Fabric
Technology
● Introduction to Brocade Network OS...............................................................................15
● Introduction to Brocade VCS Fabric technology............................................................. 16
● Brocade VCS Fabric technology use cases....................................................................21
● Topology and scaling...................................................................................................... 24
Introduction to Brocade Network OS
Brocade Network OS is a scalable network operating system available for the Brocade data center
switching portfolio products, including the VDX product line.
Purpose-built for mission-critical, next-generation data centers, Network OS supports the following
capabilities:
TABLE 1 Network OS capabilities
Simplified
network
management
Brocade Virtual Cluster Switching (VCS) fabrics are self-forming and self-healing, providing an
operationally scalable foundation for very large or dynamic cloud deployments. Multi-node fabrics
can be managed as a single logical element, and fabrics can be deployed and easily re-deployed
in a variety of configurations optimized to the needs of particular workloads.
For more information on Brocade VCS Fabric technology, refer to Introduction to Brocade VCS
Fabric technology on page 16 for an overview and Configuring Brocade VCS Fabrics on page
109 for configuration details.
High resiliency Brocade VCS fabrics use hardware-based Inter-Switch Link (ISL) Trunking to provide automatic
link failover without traffic interruption.
Improved
network
utilization
Transparent Interconnection of Lots of Links (TRILL)-based Layer 2 routing service provides
equal-cost multipaths in the network, resulting in improved network utilization. Brocade VCS Fabric
technology also delivers multiple active, fully load-balanced Layer 3 gateways to remove
constraints on Layer 2 domain growth, eliminate traffic tromboning, and enable inter-VLAN routing
within the fabric.
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) eliminates a single point of failure in a static, defaultroute environment by dynamically assigning virtual IP routers to participating hosts. The interfaces
of all routers in a virtual router must belong to the same IP subnet. There is no restriction against
reusing a virtual router ID (VRID) with a different address mapping on different LANs.
Refer to Fabric overview on page 109 for additional information about TRILL.
Refer to the “VRRP overview” section of the Network OS Layer 3 Routing Configuration Guide for
additional information on VRRP/VRRP-E.
Server
virtualization
Automatic Migration of Port Profile (AMPP) functionality provides fabric-wide configuration of
network policies, achieves per-port profile forwarding, and enables network-level features to
support Virtual Machine (VM) mobility.
Refer to the “Configuring AMPP section” of the Network OS Layer 2 Switching Configuration Guide
for more information about AMPP.
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
15
Brocade VCS Fabric terminology
TABLE 1 Network OS capabilities (Continued)
Network
convergence
Data Center Bridging (DCB)-based lossless Ethernet service provides isolation between IP and
storage traffic over a unified network infrastructure. Multi-hop Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE)
allows an FCoE initiator to communicate with an FCoE target that is a number of hops away.
Refer to the "End-to-end FCoE" section of the Network OS Layer 2 Switching Configuration Guide
for more information about multi-hop FCoE.
In Network OS, all features are configured through a single, industry-standard command line interface
(CLI). Refer to the Network OS Command Reference for an alphabetical listing and detailed
description of all the Network OS commands.
Brocade VCS Fabric terminology
The following terms are used in this document.
TABLE 2 Network OS terms
Term
Definition
Edge ports
In an Ethernet fabric, all switch ports used to connect external equipment, including end stations,
switches, and routers.
Ethernet
fabric
A topologically flat network of Ethernet switches with shared intelligence, such as the Brocade
VCS Fabric.
Fabric ports
The ports on either end of an Inter-Switch Link (ISL) in an Ethernet fabric.
Inter-Switch
Link (ISL)
An interface connected between switches in a VCS fabric. The ports on either end of the interface
are called ISL ports or Fabric ports. The ISL can be a single link or a bundle of links forming a
Brocade trunk. This trunk can either be created as a proprietary Brocade trunk, or a standard IEEE
802.3ad based link aggregation.
RBridge
A physical switch in a VCS fabric.
RBridge ID
A unique identifier for an RBridge, each switch has a unique RBridge ID. In commands, the
RBridge ID is used in referencing all interfaces in the VCS fabric. Refer to Configuring a Brocade
VCS Fabric on page 112 for information about setting the RBridge ID.
VCS ID
A unique identifier for a VCS fabric. The factory default VCS ID is 1. All switches in a VCS fabric
must have the same VCS ID.
WWN
World Wide Name. A globally unique ID that is burned into the switch at the factory.
Introduction to Brocade VCS Fabric technology
Brocade VCS Fabric technology is an Ethernet technology that allows you to create flatter, virtualized,
and converged data center networks. Brocade VCS Fabric technology is elastic, permitting you to start
small, typically at the access layer, and expand your network at your own pace.
Brocade VCS Fabric technology is built upon three core design principles:
16
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Automation
• Automation
• Resilience
• Evolutionary design
When two or more Brocade VCS Fabric switches are connected together, they form an Ethernet fabric
and exchange information among each other using distributed intelligence. To the rest of the network,
the Ethernet fabric appears as a single logical chassis.
The following figure shows an example of a data center with a classic hierarchical Ethernet architecture
and the same data center with a Brocade VCS Fabric architecture. The Brocade VCS Fabric
architecture provides a simpler core-edge topology and is easily scalable as you add more server racks.
FIGURE 1 Classic Ethernet architecture
Automation
Resilience is a foundational attribute of Brocade Fibre Channel storage networks and resilience is also
a requirement in modern data centers with clustered applications and demanding compute Service-
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
17
Distributed intelligence
Level Agreements (SLAs). In developing its VCS Fabric technology, Brocade naturally carried over
this core characteristic to its Ethernet fabric design.
In traditional Ethernet networks running Spanning Tree Protocol (STP), only 50 percent of the links are
active; the rest (shown as dotted lines in the previous figure) act as backups in case the primary
connection fails.
When you connect two or more Brocade VCS Fabric mode-enabled switches they form an Ethernet
fabric (provided the two switches have a unique RBridge ID and same VCS ID), as shown in the
following figure.
FIGURE 2 Ethernet fabric with multiple paths
The Ethernet fabric has the following characteristics:
• It is a switched network. The Ethernet fabric utilizes an emerging standard called Transparent
Interconnection of Lots of Links (TRILL) as the underlying technology.
• All switches automatically know about each other and all connected physical and logical devices.
• All paths in the fabric are available. Traffic is always distributed across equal-cost paths. As
illustrated in the figure, traffic from the source to the destination can travel across two paths.
• Traffic travels across the shortest path.
• If a single link fails, traffic is automatically rerouted to other available paths. In the topology shown in
the figure, if one of the links in Active Path #1 goes down, traffic is seamlessly rerouted across
Active Path #2.
• STP is not necessary because the Ethernet fabric appears as a single logical switch to connected
servers, devices, and the rest of the network.
• Traffic can be switched from one Ethernet fabric path to the other Ethernet fabric path.
Distributed intelligence
With Brocade VCS Fabric technology, all relevant information is automatically distributed to each
member switch to provide unified fabric functionality, as illustrated in the following figure.
18
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Logical chassis
FIGURE 3 Distributed intelligence in a Brocade VCS fabric
A Brocade VCS Fabric is designed to be managed as a single "logical chassis," so that each new
switch inherits the configuration of the fabric, and the new ports become available immediately. The
fabric then appears to the rest of the network as a single switch. This significantly reduces complexity
for the management layer, which in turn improves reliability and reduces troubleshooting.
In addition, VCS Fabrics provide a NETCONF application programming interfaces (API), as well as
extensions to OpenStack Quantum to orchestrate both physical and logical networking resources as
part of virtual machine deployment to support multi-tiered application topologies.
Distributed intelligence has the following characteristics:
• The fabric is self-forming. When two Brocade VCS Fabric mode-enabled switches are connected, the
fabric is automatically created and the switches discover the common fabric configuration.
• The fabric is masterless. No single switch stores configuration information or controls fabric
operations. Any switch can fail or be removed without causing disruptive fabric downtime or delayed
traffic.
• The fabric is aware of all members, devices, and virtual machines (VMs). If the VM moves from one
Brocade VCS Fabric port to another Brocade VCS Fabric port in the same fabric, the port-profile is
automatically moved to the new port, leveraging Brocade’s Automatic Migration of Port Profiles
(AMPP) feature.
Logical chassis
All switches in an Ethernet fabric are managed as if they were a single logical chassis. To the rest of the
network, the fabric looks no different from any other Layer 2 switch. The following figure illustrates an
Ethernet fabric with two switches. The rest of the network is aware of only the edge ports in the fabric,
and is unaware of the connections within the fabric.
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
19
Ethernet fabric formation
FIGURE 4 Logical chassis in Ethernet fabric
Each physical switch in the fabric is managed as if it were a blade in a chassis. When a Brocade VCS
Fabric mode-enabled switch is connected to the fabric, it inherits the configuration of the fabric and the
new ports become available immediately.
Ethernet fabric formation
Brocade VCS Fabric protocols are designed to aid the formation of an Ethernet fabric with minimal
user configuration. Refer to Brocade VCS Fabric formation on page 109 for detailed information about
the Ethernet fabric formation process.
All supported switches are shipped with Brocade VCS Fabric mode disabled. Refer to Configuring
Brocade VCS Fabrics on page 109 for information about disabling and enabling Brocade VCS Fabric
mode on your switches.
Automatic neighbor node discovery
When you connect a switch to a Brocade VCS Fabric mode-enabled switch, the Brocade VCS Fabric
mode-enabled switch determines whether the neighbor also has Brocade VCS Fabric mode enabled.
If the switch has Brocade VCS Fabric mode enabled and the VCS IDs match, the switch joins the
Ethernet fabric.
Refer to Configuring Brocade VCS Fabrics on page 109 for information about changing the VCS ID.
20
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Automatic ISL formation and hardware-based trunking
Automatic ISL formation and hardware-based trunking
When a switch joins an Ethernet fabric, ISLs automatically form between directly connected switches
within the fabric.
If more than one ISL exists between two switches, then Brocade ISL trunks can form automatically. All
ISLs connected to the same neighboring Brocade switch attempt to form a trunk. The trunks are formed
only when the ports belong to the same port group. No user intervention is necessary to form these
trunks.
Refer to Configuring fabric interfaces on page 114 for information about enabling and disabling ISLs
and trunks.
Principal RBridge election
The RBridge with the lowest World Wide Name (WWN) in the Ethernet fabric is elected as the principal
RBridge.
The role of the principal RBridge is to decide whether a new RBridge joining the fabric conflicts with any
of the RBridge IDs already present in the fabric. If a conflict arises, the principal RBridge keeps the
joining RBridge segmented.
Refer to Configuring a Brocade VCS Fabric on page 112 for information about setting the RBridge ID.
Brocade VCS Fabric technology use cases
This section describes the following use cases for Brocade VCS Fabric technology:
• Classic Ethernet
• Large-scale server virtualization
• VCS with FC SAN
Classic Ethernet access and aggregation use case
Brocade VCS Fabric can be deployed in the same fashion as existing top-of-rack switches, as shown in
the following figure. In the right-most two server racks, a two-switch Ethernet fabric replaces the
Ethernet switch at the top of each rack.
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
21
Introduction to Network OS and Brocade VCS Fabric Technology
FIGURE 5 Pair of Brocade VDX switches at the top of each server rack
The servers perceive a single top-of-rack switch, allowing for active/active connections running end-toend.
Brocade VCS Fabric technology in this use case provides the following advantages:
•
•
•
•
•
•
22
Multiple active-active connections, with increased effective bandwidth
Preserves existing architecture
Works with existing core and aggregation networking products
Co-exists with existing access switches
Supports 1- and 10-Gbps server connectivity
Works with server racks or blade servers
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Large-scale server virtualization use case
Large-scale server virtualization use case
The following figure shows an example of a logical two-tier architecture with Brocade VCS Fabrics at
the edge. Each Brocade VCS Fabric appears as a single virtual switch to the switches outside the
fabric, which results in flattening the network.
FIGURE 6 Collapsed, flat Layer 3 networks enabling virtual machine mobility
Brocade VCS Fabric technology in this use case provides the following advantages:
• Optimizes the multipath network (all paths and Layer 3 gateways are active, no single point of failure,
and STP is not necessary)
• Increases sphere of virtual machine (VM) mobility
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
23
Brocade VCS Fabric connectivity with Fibre Channel SAN
Brocade VCS Fabric connectivity with Fibre Channel SAN
Using the FlexPort feature on the Brocade VDX 6740 family of hardware, Fibre Channel ports provide
support for connecting a Brocade VCS Fabric to a Fibre Channel SAN. Fibre Channel routers provide
the connectivity, which provides access to Fibre Channel devices while preserving isolation between
the fabrics. Brocade zoning allows you to determine which FCoE devices can access which storage
devices on the Fibre Channel SAN.
Brocade VDX 6740 switches can be deployed into your Brocade VCS Fabric as access-level switches,
aggregation-level switches, or as a means of attachment to Brocade VCS Fabric aggregation-level
switches. Brocade recommends deployment as access-level switches to minimize congestion issues
for storage traffic and isolating FCoE traffic from non-FCoE traffic. The following figure shows such a
deployment.
FIGURE 7 Brocade VDX 6740 switches deployed as access-level switches
Topology and scaling
Up to 24 switches can exist in a Brocade VCS Fabric. Although you can use any network topology to
build a Brocade VCS Fabric, the following topics discuss the scaling, performance, and availability
considerations of topologies more commonly found in data centers:
• Core-edge topology on page 25
• Ring topology on page 25
• Full mesh topology on page 26
24
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Core-edge topology
Core-edge topology
Core-edge topology devices connect to edge switches, which are connected to each other through core
switches. The example shown in the following figure uses three core switches. You could use more or
fewer switches in the core, depending on whether you need higher availably and greater throughput, or
a more efficient use of links and ports.
FIGURE 8 Core-edge topology
This topology is reliable, fast, and scales well. It is reliable because it has multiple core switches. If a
core switch or a link to a core switch fails, an alternate path is available. As you increase the number of
core switches, you also increase the number of link or core switch failures your cluster can tolerate.
High performance and low latency are ensured because throughput is high and the hop count is low.
Throughput is high because multiple core switches share the load. Two hops get you from any edge
switch to any other edge switch. If you need greater throughput, simply add another core switch.
Scaling the topology also requires additional core switches and links. However, the number of additional
links you need is typically not as great as with, for example, a full mesh topology.
Ring topology
Ring topology connects each node to exactly two other nodes, forming a single continuous pathway.
Data travels from node to node, with each node along the path handling every packet of the data. The
following figure shows a ring topology.
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
25
Full mesh topology
FIGURE 9 Ring topology
This topology is highly scalable, yet susceptible to failures and traffic congestion. It is highly scalable
because of its efficient use of interswitch links and ports; an additional node requires only two ports to
connect to the ring. It is susceptible to failures because it provides only one path between any two
nodes. Throughput of the fabric is limited by the slowest link or node. Latency can be high because of
the potentially high number of hops it takes to communicates between two given switches. This
topology is useful where economy of port use is critical, but availability and throughput are less critical.
Full mesh topology
Full mesh topology connects each node to all other cluster nodes, as shown in the following figure.
26
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Introduction to Network OS and Brocade VCS Fabric Technology
FIGURE 10 Full mesh topology
This topology is highly reliable and fast, but it does not scale well. It is reliable because it provides many
paths through the fabric in case of cable or node failure. It is fast with low latency because you can get
to any node in the fabric in just one hop. It does not scale well because each additional node increases
the number of fabric links and switch ports exponentially. This topology is suitable for smaller fabrics
only.
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
27
Full mesh topology
28
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Basic Switch Management
● Switch management overview........................................................................................ 29
● Ethernet management interfaces.................................................................................... 34
● Stateless IPv6 autoconfiguration.....................................................................................35
● Switch attributes..............................................................................................................35
● Switch types.................................................................................................................... 36
● Operational modes..........................................................................................................36
● Modular platform basics.................................................................................................. 40
● Supported interface modes............................................................................................. 42
● Slot numbering and configuration................................................................................... 42
● Connecting to a switch.................................................................................................... 43
● Using the management VRF...........................................................................................47
● Configuring and managing switches............................................................................... 47
● Configuring policy-based resource management............................................................70
● Brocade support for OpenStack......................................................................................73
● Auto Fabric......................................................................................................................75
● Mixed-version fabric cluster support............................................................................... 77
Switch management overview
In addition to connecting to Brocade switches, an understanding of switch types, attributes, and
operational modes is essential to the successful installation and management of networks. This chapter
introduces the operational modes, command modes and submodes, and other switch-related activities
(such as troubleshooting and managing high-availability scenarios), providing an essential reference for
everyday management operations.
Connecting to a switch
You can connect to your switch through a console session on the serial port, or through a Telnet or
Secure Shell (SSH) connection to the management port or the inband mgmt-vrf port. You can use any
account login present in the local switch database or on a configured authentication, authorization, and
accounting (AAA) server for authentication. For initial setup procedures, use the pre-configured
administrative account that is part of the default switch configuration.
The switch must be physically connected to the network. If the switch network interface is not
configured or the switch has been disconnected from the network, use a console session on the serial
port.
• Refer to the Brocade VDX Hardware Reference manuals for information on connecting through the
serial port.
• Refer to Configuring Ethernet management interfaces on page 47 for details on configuring the
network interface.
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
29
Telnet and SSH overview
Telnet and SSH overview
Telnet and Secure Shell (SSH) are mechanisms for allowing secure access to management functions
on a remote networking device. SSH provides a function similar to Telnet, but unlike Telnet, which
offers no security, SSH provides a secure, encrypted connection to the device.
SSH and Telnet support is available in privileged EXEC mode on all Brocade VDX platforms. Both
IPv4 and IPv6 addresses are supported.
Telnet and SSH services are enabled by default on the switch. When the Telnet server or SSH server
is disabled, access to the switch is not allowed for inbound Telnet or SSH connections, thereby
restricting remote access to the switch.
Network OS supports up to 32 CLI sessions on a switch.
In configuration mode, the CLI can be used to disable Telnet or SSH service on the switch. Doing so
will terminate existing inbound Telnet or SSH connections and block any new inbound Telnet or SSH
connections to the switch. Additional inbound Telnet or SSH connections will not be allowed until the
Telnet server or SSH server is re-enabled. If you have admin privileges, you can re-enable inbound
Telnet or SSH connections from configuration mode.
If you are in logical chassis cluster mode (refer to Operational modes on page 36), the command for
enabling or disabling Telnet or SSH services is not distributed across the cluster. The RBridge ID of
the node should be used to configure the service on individual nodes.
In operational mode, you can use the show command to display whether Telnet or SSH is enabled or
disabled on the switch.
SSH server key exchange and authentication
The Secure Sockets Handling (SSH) protocol allows users to authenticate using public and private key
pairs instead of passwords. In password-based authentication, the user must enter a password for
authentication purposes. In public-key authentication, the user should have a private key in the local
machine and a public key in the remote machine. The user should be logged in to the local machine to
be authenticated. If a passphrase is provided while generating the public and private key pair, it must
be entered to decrypt the private key while getting authenticated.
SSH key-exchange specifies the method used for generating the one-time session keys for encryption
and authentication with the SSH server. A user is allowed to configure the SSH server key-exchange
method to DH Group 14. When the SSH server key-exchange method is configured to DH Group 14,
the SSH connection from a remote SSH client is allowed only if the key-exchange method at the client
is also configured to DH Group 14.
The following steps briefly describe public-key authentication:
1. The user generates a pair of encryption keys in a local machine using the ssh-keygen command,
along with the public and private key, as shown below. Messages encrypted with the private key
can only be decrypted by the public key, and vice-versa.
switch# ssh-keygen -t
generates RSA public
switch# ssh-keygen -t
generates DSA public
rsa
and private keypair
dsa
and private keypair
2. The user keeps the private key on the local machine, and uploads the public key to the switch.
3. When attempting to log in to the remote host, the user receives an encrypted message from the
remote host containing the public key. After the message is decrypted in the local host by means of
the private key, the user is authenticated and granted access.
The ssh-keygen command is not distributed across the cluster. The RBridge ID of the node should
be used to configure service on individual nodes.
30
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Feature support for Telnet
Feature support for Telnet
The following features are not supported with Telnet:
• Displaying Telnet sessions
• Terminating hung Telnet sessions
Feature support for SSH
SSHv2 is the supported version of SSH, but not all features typically available with SSHv2 are
supported on the Brocade VDX family of switches.
The following encryption algorithms are supported:
•
•
•
•
3des Triple-DES (default)
aes256-cbc : AES in CBC mode with 256-bit key
aes192-cbc : AES in CBC mode with 192-bit key
aes128-cbc : AES in CBC mode with 128-bit key
The following Hash-based Message Authentication Code (HMAC) message authentication algorithms
are supported:
•
•
•
•
hmac-md5 : MD5 encryption algorithm with 128-bit key (default).
hmac-md5-96 : MD5 encryption algorithm with 96-bit key.
hmac-sha1 : SHA1 encryption algorithm with 160-bit key.
hmac-sha1-96: SHA1 encryption algorithm with 96-bit key.
SSH user authentication is performed with passwords stored on the device or on an external
authentication, authorization, and accounting (AAA) server.
The following features are not supported with SSH:
• Displaying SSH sessions
• Deleting stale SSH keys
Firmware upgrade and downgrade considerations with Telnet or SSH
Downgrading the firmware on a switch to a Network OS version earlier than 4.0 is not allowed when
either the Telnet server or the SSH server on the switch is disabled. To downgrade to a lower version,
both the Telnet Server and SSH Server must be enabled.
Upgrading to Network OS v4.0 or later is automatically allowed because the Telnet server and SSH
server status are enabled by default.
Using DHCP Automatic Deployment
DHCP Automatic Deployment (DAD) is a method used to bring up the switch with new firmware or a
preset configuration automatically. In Network OS 4.1.0 and later, you can automatically bring up a
switch with new firmware or a preset configuration, omitting the need for logging in to the switch console
to configure the switch. If you are in fabric cluster mode, you can apply either the default configuration
or a preset configuration. For node replacement in logical chassis cluster mode, the switch is set to the
default configuration.
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
31
Configuring the DAD process for replacing logical chassis cluster switches
NOTE
The DAD process is disruptive to traffic.
You must be using DHCP to use DAD. You utilize the DHCP process to retrieve certain parameters
(for example, the firmware path, VCS ID, VCS mode, RBridge ID, and preset configuration file) needed
by the DAD process to perform the firmware and configuration downloads. Currently, only DHCPv4 is
supported.
You must enable DAD from the CLI, after which the switch is rebooted automatically. After the DAD
process is triggered and completed, DAD is automatically disabled. If you attempt to download new
firmware that is already installed on the switch, the DAD process is aborted.
NOTE
If DAD is enabled, you are warned when initiating a firmware download from the CLI that the firmware
download will be unsuccessful.
After a firmware download begins, DAD will report firmware download success or failure status.
DAD depends on DHCP automatic firmware download to load the firmware and configuration onto the
switch. For this to occur, you must first adhere to the following dependencies:
• The management interface of the switch must be set up as DHCP. After setting up the management
interface on a switch in fabric cluster mode, you must use the copy running-config startup-config
for the configuration to take effect.
• The DHCP server must have the FTP server IP address and configuration file path.
• The configuration file is on the FTP server and it contains the firmware path, new configuration file
path, VCS ID, VCS mode, and RBridge ID.
DAD supports the following typical use cases:
• Invoking a firmware upgrade (and optional configuration download) on many switches at the same
time in fabric cluster mode.
• Replacing a switch in a cluster by upgrading the firmware and setting up the switch to a preset
configuration. (In this instance, DAD must be completed on the new switch hardware (in order to
update the firmware) before the new switch can be incorporated into the cluster.)
Note the following considerations when using DAD:
• The DAD process is disruptive.
• Configuration download is not supported during a firmware downgrade.
• Configurations are not downloaded if the DAD process is aborted due to a sanity check failure, or if
you are downloading the same firmware version before the firmware download started.
• If an existing firmware download session is either occurring or paused, such as during a firmware
commit, DAD is not triggered. Instead, the last firmware download session continues. If a firmware
download is in progress and you attempt to enable DAD, you are prompted to try again later.
• In-Service Software Upgrade (ISSU) is not supported at this time.
• For dual management module (MM) chassis, the dual MM must be in sync from the chassis bootup
(not from HA failover). In a chassis system, both MMs are rebooted at the same time.
Configuring the DAD process for replacing logical chassis cluster switches
Provides procedures for configuring DHCP Automatic Deployment (DAD) when replacing switches in
logical chassis cluster mode.
The following procedure configures DHCP Automatic Deployment (DAD) when replacing switches in
logical chassis cluster mode.
32
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Configuring the DAD process for fabric cluster switches
1. Disconnect the existing switch from the cluster.
2. Connect the new switch to the cluster. The new switch should be the same model and use the same
cable connection as the old switch.
The new switch should successfully load Network OS. Note, however, that the new switch cannot join
the cluster just yet.
3. From the principal switch, manually run the node replacement with the WWN and RBridge ID.
4. Establish a DAD environment for the new switch. (Make sure DHCP is enabled on the management
interface.)
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
The management interface of the switch must be set up as DHCP. After setting up the
management interface on a switch in fabric cluster mode, you must use the copy runningconfig startup-config command for the configuration to take effect.
The DHCP server must have the FTP server IP address and configuration file path.
The configuration file is on FTP server and it contains the firmware path, new configuration
file path, VCS ID, VCS mode, and RBridge ID.
The DHCP server and FTP server must be up-and-running.
DAD must be enabled on the switch using the CLI.
5. Enable DAD by using the dhcp auto-deployment enable command, and enter yes when prompted
to reboot the system.
6. After the new switch is rebooted, DHCP auto-download process downloads the DAD configuration
file to get the VCS mode, VCS ID, and RBridge ID. The RBridge ID should be configured the same
as the previous node in the cluster.
7. The DHCP auto-download process sets the VCS ID and RBridge ID for a switch in logical chassis
cluster mode. No reboot is triggered.
8. The DHCP auto-download process invokes a firmware download if new firmware is detected.
Firmware download completes successfully and the switch comes up with the new firmware and
configuration settings.
NOTE
The DAD process will abort if any error is detected.
9. When the new switch comes up, it will join the cluster with the same configuration as the previous
switch.
10.Use the show dadstatus command to view the current DAD configuration.
Configuring the DAD process for fabric cluster switches
For fabric cluster switches, the DHCP Automatic Deployment (DAD) process is applicable to both
cluster upgrades and node replacement.
The following procedure configures DAD on switches in fabric cluster mode.
1. Establish a DAD environment for the new switch. (Make sure DHCP is enabled on the management
interface.)
a)
b)
c)
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
The management interface of the switch must be set up as DHCP. After setting up the
management interface on a switch in fabric cluster mode, you must use the copy runningconfig startup-config command for the configuration to take effect.
The DHCP server must have the FTP server IP address and configuration file path.
The configuration file is on FTP server and it contains the firmware path, new configuration
file path, VCS ID, VCS mode, and RBridge ID.
33
Telnet and SSH considerations and limitations
d)
e)
The DHCP server and FTP server must be up and running.
DAD must be enabled on the switch by means of the CLI.
2. Enable DAD by using the dhcp auto-deployment enable command, and enter yes when prompted
to reboot the system.
During system bootup, the DHCP auto-download process downloads the DAD configuration file and
obtains the VCS ID and RBridge ID settings for a switch in fabric cluster mode. The switch
configuration is retrieved from the FTP server if one is set up.
NOTE
The DAD process will abort if any error is detected.
3. If node configuration needs to be downloaded, set up the new configuration as the startup
configuration so it will be applied automatically.
The DHCP auto-download process invokes a firmware download if new firmware is detected. After
the firmware download completes successfully, the switch comes up with the new firmware and
configuration settings.
4. Use the show dadstatus command to view the current DAD configuration.
Telnet and SSH considerations and limitations
• Access to the switch is not allowed for both inbound Telnet and SSH connections from both IPv4
and IPv6 addresses when the Telnet or SSH server are disabled.
• Outgoing Telnet or SSH connections from the switch to any remote device is not affected by
disabling or enabling the Telnet or SSH server in the switch.
• No RASLog or auditlog messages are reported when the Telnet or SSH server is disabled or
enabled.
Ethernet management interfaces
The Ethernet network interface provides management access, including direct access to the Network
OS CLI. You must configure at least one IP address using a serial connection to the CLI before you
can manage the system with other management interfaces. You can either configure static IP
addresses, or you can use a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) client to acquire IP
addresses automatically. For IPv6 addresses, both static IPv6 and stateless IPv6 autoconfiguration
are supported.
ATTENTION
Setting static IPv4 addresses and using DHCP are mutually exclusive. If DHCP is enabled, remove the
DHCP client before you configure a static IPv4 address. However, this does not apply to IPv6
addresses.
Brocade VDX Ethernet interfaces
The Brocade VDX Top-of-Rack (ToR) switches have a single configurable Ethernet interface, Eth0,
which can be configured as a management interface.
The modular chassis, the Brocade VDX 8770-8 and the Brocade VDX 8770-4, have two redundant
management modules, MM1 and MM2. Each management module can communicate with each of the
34
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Lights-out management
line cards (interface modules) through an Ethernet connection. Each management module has two
Ethernet interfaces, Eth0 and Eth2. These interfaces are also known as Out of Band (OoB)
management interfaces.
Eth0 is the management interface and can be configured with an IP address. Eth2 provides connectivity
to the other management module and the line cards in the chassis. The Eth2 IP addressing scheme
uses default IP addresses to communicate between the modules; these addresses are not userconfigurable.
To set a virtual IP or IPv6 address for the chassis, use the chassis virtual-ip or chassis virtual-ipv6
command in RBridge ID configuration mode.
Lights-out management
Lights-out management (LOM) is the ability for a system administrator to monitor and manage servers
by a LOM remote control program.
A complete LOM system consists of a hardware component called the LOM module and a program that
facilitates the continuous monitoring of variables such as microprocessor temperature and utilization.
The program also allows for such remote operations as rebooting, shutdown, troubleshooting, alarm
setting, fan-speed control, and operating system reinstallation.
The modular chassis, the Brocade VDX 8770-8 and the Brocade VDX 8770-4, have two redundant
management modules, MM1 and MM2. Each management module can communicate with each of the
line cards (interface modules) through an Ethernet connection. Each management module has two
Ethernet interfaces, Eth0 and Eth2. These interfaces are also known as Out of Band (OoB)
management interfaces and support LOM programs.
Stateless IPv6 autoconfiguration
IPv6 allows the assignment of multiple IP addresses to each network interface. Each interface is
configured with a link local address in almost all cases, but this address is only accessible from other
hosts on the same network. To provide for wider accessibility, interfaces are typically configured with at
least one additional global scope IPv6 address. IPv6 autoconfiguration allows more IPv6 addresses, the
number of which is dependent on the number of routers serving the local network and the number of
prefixes they advertise.
When IPv6 autoconfiguration is enabled, the platform will engage in stateless IPv6 autoconfiguration.
When IPv6 autoconfiguration is disabled, the platform will relinquish usage of any autoconfigured IPv6
addresses that it may have acquired while IPv6 autoconfiguration was enabled. This same enabled and
disabled state also enables or disables the usage of a link local address for each managed entity
(though a link local address will continue to be generated for each switch) because those link local
addresses are required for router discovery.
The enabled or disabled state of autoconfiguration does not affect any static IPv6 addresses that may
have been configured. Stateless IPv6 autoconfiguration and static IPv6 addresses can coexist.
Switch attributes
A switch can be identified by its IP address, World Wide Name (WWN), switch ID or RBridge ID, or by
its host name and chassis name. You can customize the host name and chassis name with the switchattributes command.
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
35
Switch types
• A host name can be from 1 through 30 characters long. It must begin with a letter, and can contain
letters, numbers, and underscore characters. The default host name is "sw0." The host name is
displayed at the system prompt.
• Brocade recommends that you customize the chassis name for each platform. Some system logs
identify the switch by its chassis name; if you assign a meaningful chassis name, logs are more
useful. A chassis name can be from 1 through 30 characters long, must begin with a letter, and can
contain letters, numbers, and underscore characters. The default chassis names are based on the
switch models, such as is VDX 8770-4 or VDX 8770-8.
Switch types
The switchType attribute is a unique device model identifier that is displayed when you issue the show
chassis or the show rbridge-id commands. When you are gathering information for your switch
support provider, you may be asked for the Brocade product name. Use the information in the
following table to convert the switchType identifier to a Brocade product name.
TABLE 3 Mapping switchType to Brocade product names
switchType Brocade product name Description
112
Management Module
Internal component on the switch
113
Switch Fabric Module
Internal component on the switch
EN4023
VDX 2740
10Gb scalable switch for IBM Flex System Fabric based on the VDX
6740 ToR switch. 42 x 10GbE internal, 14 x 10GbE/16G FC + 2 x
40GbE/64G FC external FlexPorts
131
VDX 6740
48 10-GbE SFP+ ports and 4 40-GbE QSFP+ ports
137
VDX 6740T
48 10-GbE 10BASE-T ports and 4 40-GbE QSFP+ ports
151
VDX 6740T-1G
Same as VDX 6740T, but ships with ports set to 1 GbE
153
VDX 6940-36Q
36 40GbE QSFP+ ports
1000.x
VDX 8770-4
4 I/O slot chassis supporting 48x1 GbE, 48x10 GbE, 48x10G-T, 12x40
GbE, 27x40 GbE, or 6x100 GbE line cards
1001.x
VDX 8770-8
8 I/O slot chassis supporting 48x1 GbE, 48x10 GbE, 48x10G-T, 12x40
GbE, 27x40 GbE, or 6x100 GbE line cards
Operational modes
Network OS supports the following operational modes for Brocade VDX switches.
The two operational modes are:
• Logical chassis cluster mode — One of two types of "VCS" modes for a switch. This mode requires
Network OS 4.0.0 or later. In this mode, both the data and configuration paths are distributed. The
36
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Logical chassis cluster mode
entire cluster is configured from the principal node. Refer to Logical chassis cluster mode on page
37 for more information.
• Fabric cluster mode — The second of two types of "VCS" modes for a switch. In this mode, the data
path for nodes is distributed, but the configuration path is not distributed. Each node keeps its
configuration database independently. Refer to Fabric cluster mode on page 39 for more
information.
When a new switch boots up, the switch enters fabric cluster mode.
ATTENTION
The generic term VCS mode in this manual applies to both fabric cluster mode and logical chassis
cluster mode unless otherwise stated.
Logical chassis cluster mode
Logical chassis cluster mode is defined as a fabric in which both the data and configuration paths are
distributed. The entire cluster must be globally configured from the principal node. Logical chassis
cluster mode requires Network OS 4.0.0 or later.
Logical chassis cluster mode support for platforms
The following platforms support logical chassis cluster mode and is used in any combination:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Brocade VDX 2740
Brocade VDX 6740
Brocade VDX 6740T
Brocade VDX 6740T-1G
Brocade VDX 6940-36Q
Brocade VDX 8770-4
Brocade VDX 8770-8
Logical chassis cluster mode characteristics
The following are the main characteristics of logical chassis cluster mode:
• The maximum number of nodes supported in a logical chassis cluster is 48.
• This mode supports in-band management (through eth0 on management modules) over virtual
Ethernet (VE) interfaces.
• In-Band Management is supported in Logical Chassis mode on VDX devices.
• If you use in-band management only, and wish to disable the management interface (which is
considered out of band), refer to the shutdown (interface) command in the NOS Command
Reference.
• Physical connectivity requirements for logical chassis cluster deployment are the same as those for
fabric cluster deployment.
• A single global configuration exists across all nodes, while each node can contain its unique local
configuration. However, each node contains the local configuration information for all other nodes in
the cluster.
• When an RBridge is rejoining the logical chassis cluster, the interface-level configuration is reset to
the default values.
• Global and local configurations for the entire logical chassis cluster are performed from one node —
the principal node only.
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
37
Command blocking in logical chassis cluster mode
• Startup configurations are not maintained by the cluster; each node preserves its running
configuration.
• A logical chassis cluster can be transitioned into a fabric cluster while preserving configurations, if
you follow the steps provided later in this section
• An existing fabric cluster can be transitioned into a logical chassis cluster while preserving
configurations, if you follow the steps provided later in this section
• Cluster-wide firmware upgrades can be performed.
• Cluster-wide supportSave can be performed.
Command blocking in logical chassis cluster mode
In logical chassis cluster mode, some commands cannot be run while other commands or events are
processing.
If one of the following CLI command types or events is in progress in the cluster, then any one of the
CLI command types in the following list will be rejected until the current command or event has
finished.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Copy file running-config commands
HA failover commands
VCS ID/RbridgeID change commands
Cluster mode change from logical chassis cluster to fabric cluster
Copy default-config startup-config commands
Configuration updates by individual commands
Cluster formation events, such as initial cluster formation or secondary joining or rejoining of a
cluster
These commands and events are considered to be blocked from occurring simultaneously. However, if
the principal node changes during one of these operations or HA failover occurs on principal switch,
the new principal will not retain the information that the commands or events not in progress are in a
blocked state.
In the case of commands being blocked, the following messages are some of the error messages that
could result:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Cluster formation is in progress. Please try again later.
User Configuration update is in progress. Please try again later.
Configuration file replay is in progress. Please try again later.
HA failover is in progress in the cluster. Please try again later.
VCS Config change is in progress in the cluster. Please try again later.
Copy default-config startup-config is in progress. Please try again later.
Logical chassis cluster mode configuration
In logical chassis cluster mode, any operation that results in writing to the configuration database gets
automatically distributed. There are no exceptions.
Each node in the logical chassis cluster maintains an individual copy of the configuration to enable
high availability of the cluster. The following figure illustrates nodes in a logical chassis cluster. Each
node has its own databases, and the databases kept by each node are identical at all times.
38
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Fabric cluster mode
FIGURE 11 Configuration database in a logical chassis cluster
Network OS switches contain both global and local configuration. In a logical chassis cluster, a single
global configuration exists across all cluster members, while each individual member has its own local
configuration. (Conversely, in fabric cluster mode, each cluster member can have its own unique global
configuration.)
Global configuration is required for cluster-wide operations, whereas local configuration is specific to the
operation of an individual node. For more information and examples of each type of configuration, refer
to Examples of global and local configurations on page 62.
Fabric cluster mode
Fabric cluster mode is defined as a fabric in which the data path for nodes is distributed, but the
configuration path is not distributed. Each node keeps its configuration database independently.
By default, the switch will boot up in fabric cluster mode and will attempt to form Inter-Switch Links
(ISLs):
If the chassis is not connected to another switch, it forms a "single node VCS fabric." This means that
the chassis operates as a standalone system, but the operational mode is always VCS-enabled. You
cannot disable the VCS mode on any of the models listed above.
NOTE
In fabric cluster mode, the all keyword to the rbridge-id command is not available, and a remote
RBridge cannot be addressed by means of the rbridge-id rbridge-id command.
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
39
Modular platform basics
Modular platform basics
The Brocade VDX 8770 platform features two redundant management modules, three or six switch
fabric modules, and four or eight line cards depending on the switch model. The Brocade VDX 8770-4
supports four line cards and the Brocade VDX 8770-8 supports eight line cards.
The following table lists the modules supported on each platform.
TABLE 4 Modules supported on the Brocade VDX 8770 platform
Type
MM
Module ID
Slot numbers Slot numbers Description
VDX 8770-4
VDX 8770-8
0x70 = 112 M1, M2
M1, M2
Management module (an 8-core 1.5-GHz Control
Processor)
SFM
0x71 = 113 S1 - S3
S1 - S6
Switch fabric module (core blade)
LC48X10G
0x72 = 114 L1 - L4
L1 - L8
48-port 10-GbE line card
LC12X40G
0x7F = 127 L1 - L4
L1 - L8
12-port 40-GbE line card
LC48X1G
0x83 = 131 L1 - L4
L1 - L8
48-port 1-GbE line card
LC48X10G-T 0x97 = 151 L1 - L4
L1 - L8
48-port 10 Gbps Base-T line card
LC27X40G
0x96 = 150 L1 - L4
L1 - L8
27-port 40-GbE line card
LC6X100G
0x95 = 149 L1 - L4
L1 - L8
6-port 100-GbE line card
Management modules
Two management modules (MMs) provide redundancy and act as the main controller on the Brocade
VDX 8770-4 and VDX 8770-8 chassis. The management modules host the distributed Network OS
that provides the overall control plane management for the chassis. You can install a redundant
management module in slot M1 or M2 in any of the Brocade VDX 8770 chassis. By default, the system
considers the module in slot M1 the active management module and the module in slot M2 the
redundant, or standby, management module. If the active module becomes unavailable, the standby
module automatically takes over management of the system.
Each management module maintains its own copy of the configuration database. The startup
configuration is automatically synchronized with the other management module.
Brocade recommends that each management module (primary and secondary partition) should
maintain the same firmware version. For more information on maintaining firmware, refer to the
“Installing and Maintaining Firmware” section of the Network OS Upgrade Guide.
Each management module has two Ethernet interfaces, Eth0 and Eth2. Eth0 is the management
interface and can be configured with an IP address. For more information on configuring the
management interface, refer to Connecting to a switch on page 29.
40
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
HA failover
HA failover
Warm-recovery High Availability (HA) failover is supported for both fabric cluster mode and logical
chassis cluster mode.
Warm recovery includes the following behaviors:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
No data path disruption results for Layer 2, Layer 3 and FCoE traffic.
All Layer 2 and Layer 3 control protocol states are retained.
The topology state and interface state are retained.
All running configuration is retained (including the last accepted user configuration just before HA
failover).
During a warm recovery, the principal switch in a logical chassis cluster remains the principal switch.
After warm recovery, the principal switch reestablishes cluster management layer connection with
other switches and reforms the cluster.
A secondary switch in a logical chassis cluster reestablishes cluster management layer connection
with the principal switch and rejoins the cluster after warm recovery.
If you run a reload command on an active MM, the principal switch in a logical chassis cluster goes
into cold recovery and comes back up as a secondary switch.
HA behavior during In-service software upgrades is the same as for warm-recovery failover.
NOTE
The ha failover command is supported only on a dual-management-module chassis system.
Support for in-service software upgrades
Refer to the respective NOS-version release notes for ISSU and upgrade-path information. An ISSU
allows a dual management module system or Top of Rack switches to be upgraded non-disruptively
and is invoked by entering the firmware download command from the active management module.
ISSU is not supported in NOS 6.0.0 from previous NOS versions. Use the coldboot or manual options of
the firmware download command.
High Availability behavior during ISSUs is the same as that of warm recovery described in HA failover
on page 41. For more information, refer to the “Upgrading firmware on a modular chassis” of the
Network OS Upgrade Guide.
Switch fabric modules
The switch fabric modules play a dual role in the fabric connectivity between line cards, providing both
the data-plane connectivity and the control-plane connectivity needed for end-to-end credit
management in each of the line cards.
In each chassis model, two slots are designated for supporting the control-plane connectivity. In the
Brocade VDX 8770-4, the slots S1 and S2 are the designated control-plane slots. In the Brocade VDX
8770-8, the slots S3 and S4 are the designated control-plane slots. At least one of the control-plane
slots must be populated to maintain operation. If you remove the switch fabric modules from both the
control-plane slots, all line cards will be faulted and the chassis is no longer operational.
Line cards
The following line cards provide I/O ports for network Ethernet protocols:
• LC48x1G - forty eight 1-GbE/10-GbE SFP+ front ports.
• LC48x10G - forty eight 1-GbE/10-GbE SFP+ front ports.
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
41
Supported interface modes
•
•
•
•
LC12x40G - twelve 40-GbE QSFP front ports.
LC48x10G-T - forty eight 10 Gbps Base-T front ports.
LC27x40G - twenty seven 40-GbE QSFP front ports.
LC6x100G - six 100-GbE front ports.
Supported interface modes
All interfaces in Brocade VDX chassis come online as Fabric Inter-Switch Links ("Fabric ISLs") by
default and will attempt to form a Brocade VCS fabric. If the ISL formation fails, the interfaces come up
as "Edge ports".
Slot numbering and configuration
The slot number specifies the physical location of a module in a switch or router, and the number of
available slots of each type (interface, management, or switch fabric) depends on the router. Slot
configuration is done on a slot-by-slot basis, and the configurations are stored in a persistent database
on the switch.
Slot numbering
The slot numbering on the Brocade VDX 8770 chassis is based on the module type. The slot numbers
for the line card are numbered L1 through L4 on the Brocade VDX 8770-4, and L1 through L8 on the
Brocade VDX 8770-8. The slots for the management modules are numbered M1 and M2. The slots for
the switch fabric modules are numbered S1 through S3 on the Brocade VDX 8770-4, and S1 through
S6 on the Brocade VDX 8770-8.
Slot configuration
Line cards are registered with the system by type, and the slot must be configured with the correct
type before you can install an line card in that slot. When you install a new line card, the system
checks whether or not a previous configuration is associated with the slot. The following rules apply
when you install or replace an line card:
• When you install an line card and boot it up to an online state in a slot that was never occupied or
configured, the module type information is automatically detected and saved to the database. No
special configuration is required.
• If you install an line card in a slot that was previously occupied by an line card of the same type and
the slot is configured for that same type, you can hot-swap the modules without powering off the
line cards. No slot configuration changes are required.
• If the slot was previously configured for a different type of line card, the installation fails and the
module is faulted with a "Type mismatch" error. A RASLog error message is generated. You must
power off the line card and clear the slot configuration with the no linecard command before you
can configure the slot for a new line card.
The slot configuration persists in the database even after the line card is physically removed, powered
off, or faulted since it first came online. All configuration data associated with the slot is automatically
preserved across reboot or hot-swap of the line card with the same type.
42
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Connecting to a switch
Connecting to a switch
You can connect to your switch through a console session on the serial port. Also, you can use SSH or
telnet to connect to the management port. You can also use SSH and telnet to connect to an IP inband
interface configured on an Ethernet port, a VE interface, or loopback in the Management VRF. You can
use any account login present in the local switch database or on a configured authentication,
authorization, and accounting (AAA) server for authentication. For initial setup procedures, use the
preconfigured administrative account that is part of the default switch configuration.
The switch must be physically connected to the network. If the switch network interface is not
configured or the switch has been disconnected from the network, use a console session on the serial
port.
• Refer to the Brocade VDX hardware reference manuals for information on connecting through the
serial port.
• Refer to Configuring Ethernet management interfaces on page 47 for details on configuring the
management interface.
Establishing a physical connection for a Telnet or SSH session
1. Connect through a serial port to the switch.
2. Verify that the switch’s network interface is configured and that it is connected to the IP network
through the RJ-45 Ethernet port.
3. Log off the switch’s serial port.
4. From a management station, open a Telnet or SSH connection using the management IP address of
the switch to which you want to connect.
For more information on setting the management IP address, refer to Connecting to a switch on page
29.
5. Enter the password.
Brocade recommends that you change the default account password when you log in for the first
time. For more information on changing the default password, refer to the Brocade VDX Hardware
Reference manuals.
6. Verify that the login was successful.
The prompt displays the host name followed by a pound sign (#).
switch# login as: admin
[email protected]'s password:******
---------------------------------------------------SECURITY WARNING: The default password for at least
one default account (root, admin and user) have not been changed.
Welcome to the Brocade Network Operating System Software
admin connected from 10.110.100.92 using ssh on VDX 6740-48
Telnet services
You can use the Telnet service to connect to a switch using either IPv4 or IPv6 protocol.
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
43
Establishing a Telnet connection
Establishing a Telnet connection
A Telnet session allows you to access a switch remotely using port 23. However, it is not secure. If
you need a secure connection, use SSH.
1. To establish a Telnet session connection, enter telnet followed by the switch IP address.
switch# telnet 10.17.37.157
If the switch is active and the Telnet service is enabled on it, a display similar to the following will
appear.
Trying 10.17.37.157...
Connected to 10.17.37.157.
Escape character is '^]'.
Network OS (sw0)
switch login:
2. Once you have established the Telnet connection, you can log in normally.
NOTE
You can override the default port by using the telnet ip_address command with the optional port
operand (range 0-65535). However, the device must be listening on that port for the connection to
succeed.
The following example overrides the default port.
switch# telnet 10.17.37.157 87
Trying 10.17.37.157...
Connected to 10.17.37.157.
Escape character is '^]'.
Network OS (sw0)
switch# login:
Shutting down the Telnet service
Shutting down the Telnet service will forcibly disconnect all Telnet sessions running on a switch.
You must be in global configuration mode to shut down the Telnet service on a switch.
The Telnet service runs by default.
To shut down the Telnet service on a switch, enter telnet server shutdown.
switch(config)# telnet server shutdown
switch(config)#
All Telnet sessions are immediately terminated, and cannot be re-established until the service is reenabled.
switch(config)# rbridge-id 3
switch(config-rbridge-id-3)# telnet server shutdown
Re-enabling the Telnet service
Re-enabling the Telnet service permits Telnet access to a switch.
You must be in global configuration mode to shut down the Telnet service on a switch.
To re-enable the Telnet service on a switch enter no telnet server shutdown.
switch(config)# no telnet server shutdown
44
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Connecting with SSH
NOTE
If you are in VCS mode, you must enter RBridge ID configuration mode before issuing the command.
switch(config)# rbridge-id 3
switch(config-rbridge-id-3)# no telnet server shutdown
Connecting with SSH
Connecting to a switch using the SSH (Secure Socket Handling) protocol permits a secure (encrypted)
connection.
For a listing and description of all configuration modes discussed here, refer to Operational modes on
page 36.
Establishing an SSH connection
An SSH (Secure Socket Handling) connection allows you to securely access a switch remotely.
You must be in privileged EXEC mode to make an SSH connection to a switch.
1. To establish an SSH connection with default parameters, enter ssh -l followed by the username you
want to use and the ip_address of the switch.
switch# ssh -l admin 10.20.51.68
2. Enter yes if prompted.
The authenticity of host '10.20.51.68 (10.20.51.68)' can't be established.
RSA key fingerprint is ea:32:38:f7:76:b7:7d:23:dd:a7:25:99:e7:50:87:d0.
Are you sure you want to continue connecting (yes/no)? yes
Warning: Permanently added '10.20.51.68' (RSA) to the list of known hosts.
[email protected]'s password: ********
SECURITY WARNING: The default password for at least
one default account (root, admin and user) have not been changed.
Welcome to the Brocade Network Operating System Software
admin connected from 10.20.51.66 using ssh on C60_68F
NOTE
You can use the -m and -c options to override the default encryption and hash
algorithms.
switch# ssh -l admin -m hmac-md5 -c aes128-cbc 10.20.51.68
Importing an SSH public key
Importing an SSH public key allows you to establish an authenticated login for a switch.
You must be in privileged EXEC mode to import an SSH public key to a switch.
1.
NOTE
The following example allows you to import the SSH public key for the user "admin" from a remote
host using the credentials shown.
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
45
Deleting an SSH public key
To import an SSH public key, enter certutil import sshkey, followed by user Username host
IP_Address directory File_Path file Key_filename login Login_ID.
switch# certutil import sshkey user admin host 10.70.4.106 directory /users/
home40/bmeenaks/.ssh file id_rsa.pub login fvt
2. Enter the password for the user.
Password: ***********
switch# 2012/11/14-10:28:58, [SEC-3050], 75,, INFO, VDX6740-48, Event: sshutil,
Status: success, Info: Imported SSH public key from 10.70.4.106 for user 'admin'.
NOTE
If you are in VCS mode, you must enter RBridge ID configuration mode before
issuing the command.
switch# certutil import sshkey user admin host 10.70.4.106 directory /users/home40/
bmeenaks/.ssh file id_rsa.pub login fvt rbridge-id 3
Deleting an SSH public key
Deleting an SSH public key from a switch prevents it from being used for an authenticated login.
You must be in privileged EXEC mode to delete an SSH public key from a switch.
To delete an SSH public key, enter no certutil sshkey user Username followed by either rbridge-id
rbridge-id or rbridge-id all.
switch# no certutil sshkey user admin rbridge-id all
Specifying a specific RBridge ID removes the key from that RBridge ID; specifying all removes it from
all RBridge IDs on the switch.
Shutting down the SSH service
Shutting down the SSH (Secure Socket Handling) service will forcibly disconnect all SSH sessions
running on a switch.
You must be in global configuration mode to shut down the SSH service on a switch.
The SSH service runs by default.
To shut down the SSH service on a switch, enter ssh server shutdown.
switch(config)# ssh server shutdown
switch(config)#
All SSH sessions are immediately terminated, and cannot be re-established until the service is reenabled.
NOTE
If you are in VCS mode, you must enter RBridge ID configuration mode before issuing the command.
switch(config)# rbridge-id 3
switch(config-rbridge-id-3)# ssh server shutdown
switch(config-rbridge-id-3)#
46
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Re-enabling the SSH service
Re-enabling the SSH service
Re-enabling the SSH (Secure Socket Handling) service permits SSH access to a switch.
You must be in global configuration mode to shut down the SSH service on a switch.
To re-enable the SSH service on a switch enter no ssh server shutdown.
switch(config)# no ssh server shutdown
switch(config)#
NOTE
If you are in VCS mode, you must enter RBridge ID configuration mode before issuing the command.
switch(config)# rbridge-id 3
switch(config-rbridge-id-3)# no ssh server shutdown
Using the management VRF
Virtual Routing and Forwarding (VRF) is a technology that controls information flow within a network,
isolating the traffic by partitioning the network into different logical VRF domains. Prior to Network OS
release 5.0.0, routers were managed through the "default" VRF; any port that was part of the default
VRF could be used for router management.
ATTENTION
Beginning with Network OS release 5.0.0, the default VRF and other user-configured (nondefault) VRFs
can no longer be used for router management. Inband management over ports that are part of the
default VRF or another user-configured nondefault VRF are no longer supported. Support is now
provided for the "management" VRF; this is a dedicated, secure VRF instance that allows users to
manage the router inband on switched virtual interfaces (SVIs) and physical interfaces. and that is
allowed only on management VRF ports. Services such as Telnet, FTP, SNMP, SSH, SCP, and
NetConf are available only through the management VRF. However, Layer 3 routing protocols (such as
OSPF, VRRP), including dynamic routing, are not supported. For details, as well as examples of
configuring the management VRF and using a variety of show commands, refer to the “Understanding
and using the management VRF” section in the Network OS Layer 3 Routing Configuration Guide.
Configuring and managing switches
The following sections describe how to configure and manage Brocade switches.
Configuring Ethernet management interfaces
The Ethernet network interface provides management access, including direct access to the Network
OS CLI. You must configure at least one IP address using a serial connection to the CLI before you can
manage the system with other management interfaces. You can either configure static IP addresses, or
you can use a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) client to acquire IP addresses
automatically. For IPv6 addresses, both static IPv6 and stateless IPv6 autoconfiguration are supported.
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
47
Configuring static IP addresses
ATTENTION
Setting static IPv4 addresses and using DHCP are mutually exclusive. If DHCP is enabled, remove the
DHCP client before you configure a static IPv4 address. However, this does not apply to IPv6
addresses.
NOTE
You must connect through the serial port to set the IP address if the network interface is not
configured already. Refer to the Brocade VDX Hardware Reference manual for your specific product
for information on connecting through the serial port.
Configuring static IP addresses
Use static Ethernet network interface addresses in environments where the DHCP service is not
available. To configure a static IPv4 or IPv6 address, you must first disable DHCP. Refer to
Configuring IPv4 and IPv6 addresses with DHCP on page 49 for more information.
Configuring a static IPv4 Ethernet address
1. Connect to the switch through the serial console.
2. In privileged EXEC mode, issue the configure terminal command to enter global configuration
mode.
3. Enter the interface management rbridge-id/port command to configure the management port.
This command enters a management interface configuration mode where you can choose
configuration parameters for IPv4 and IPv6 addresses.
• A Top-of-Rack (ToR) switch has a single management port, and the port number for the
management port is always 0.
• On a modular switch with two redundant management modules, you can configure two
management ports. The port numbers are 1 and 2.
4. Enter the no ip address dhcp command to disable DHCP.
5. Enter the ip address IPv4_address/prefix_length command.
6. Verify the configuration with the do show running-config interface management command.
NOTE
Specifying an IPv4 address with a subnet mask is not supported. Instead, enter a prefix number in
Classless Inter-Domain Routing (CIDR) notation. To enter a prefix number for a network mask, type
a forward slash (/) and the number of bits in the mask immediately after the IP address. For
example, enter, "209.157.22.99/24" for an IP address that has a network mask with 24 leading 1s in
the network mask, representing 255.255.255.0.
switch(config-Management-1/0)# do show running-config interface management
interface Management 1/0
no ip address dhcp
ip address 10.24.85.81/20
vrf forwarding mgmt-vrf
no ipv6 address autoconfig
7. Apart from the two IP addresses on the management modules, modular switches also supports a
chassis virtual IP address. Using this virtual IP address, you can login to the switch. The VCS virtual
IP address binds to the active MM automatically.
switch(config)# rbridge-id 1
switch(config-rbridge-id-1)# chassis virtual-ip 10.24.85.90/20
48
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Configuring a static IPv6 Ethernet address
NOTE
In DHCP mode, the chassis IP address is obtained by means of DHCP.
Configuring a static IPv6 Ethernet address
1. In privileged EXEC mode, enter the configure terminal command to enter global configuration
mode.
2. Enter the interface management rbridge-id/port command.
This command enters a management interface configuration mode where you can choose
configuration parameters for IPv4 and IPv6 addresses.
• A Top-of-Rack (ToR) switch has a single management port, and the port number for the
management port is always 0.
• On a modular switches with two redundant management modules, you can configure two
management ports. The port numbers are 1 and 2.
3. Enter the ipv6 address IPv6_addresss/prefix_length command.
switch# configure terminal
Entering configuration mode terminal
switch(config)# interface management 1/0
switch(config-Management-1/0)# ipv6 address fd00:60:69bc:832:e61f:13ff:fe67:4b94/64
4. Apart from the two IP addresses on the management modules, modular switches also support a
chassis virtual IP address. Using this virtual IP address, you can log in to the switch. The VCS virtual
IP address binds to the active MM automatically.
switch(config)# rbridge-id 1
switch(config-rbridge-id-1)# chassis virtual-ipv6 2001:db8:8086:6502/64
Configuring IPv4 and IPv6 addresses with DHCP
By default, DHCP is disabled. You must explicitly enable the service. Use the ip address dhcp
command to enable DHCP for IPv4 addresses, and the ipv6 address dhcp command to enable DHCP
for IPv6 addresses. The Network OS DHCP clients support the following parameters:
• External Ethernet port IP addresses and prefix length
• Default gateway IP address
NOTE
When you connect the DHCP-enabled switch to the network and power on the switch, the switch
automatically obtains the Ethernet IP address, prefix length, and default gateway address from the
DHCP server. The DHCP client can only connect to a DHCP server on the same subnet as the switch.
Do not enable DHCP if the DHCP server is not on the same subnet as the switch.
The following example enables DHCP for IPv4 addresses.
switch(config)# interface management 1/1
switch(config-Management-1/1)# ip address dhcp
The following example enables DHCP for IPv6 addresses.
switch(config)# interface management 1/1
switch(config-Management-1/1)# ipv6 address dhcp
The show running-config interface management command indicates whether DHCP is enabled. The
following example shows a switch with DHCP enabled for IPv4 addresses.
switch# show running-config interface management
interface Management 2/0
ip address dhcp
ip route 0.0.0.0/0 10.24.80.1
ip address 10.24.73.170/20
no ipv6 address autoconfig
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
49
Configuring IPv6 autoconfiguration
NOTE
Enabling DHCP removes all configured static IP addresses.
NOTE
Refer to the Network OS Layer 3 Routing Configuration Guide for more information on configuring IP
DHCP relay.
Configuring IPv6 autoconfiguration
Refer also to Stateless IPv6 autoconfiguration on page 35.
1. In privileged EXEC mode, issue the configure terminal command to enter global configuration
mode.
2. Take the appropriate action based on whether you want to enable or disable IPv6 autoconfiguration.
• Enter the ipv6 address autoconfig command to enable IPv6 autoconfiguration for all managed
entities on the target platform.
• Enter the no ipv6 address autoconfig command to disable IPv6 autoconfiguration for all
managed entities on the target platform.
NOTE
On the Brocade VDX 8770, the autoconfig command can be issued only on the interface rbridgeid /1. However, this operation enables auto-configuration for the entire chassis.
Displaying the network interface
If an IP address has not been assigned to the network interface, you must connect to the Network OS
CLI using a console session on the serial port. Otherwise, connect to the switch through Telnet or
SSH. Enter the show interface management command to display the management interface.
The following example shows the management interface on a Brocade VDX Top-of-Rack (ToR)
switch.
switch# show interface management
interface Management 9/0
ip address 10.24.81.65/20
ip gateway-address 10.24.80.1
ipv6 ipv6-address [ ]
ipv6 ipv6-gateways [ fe80::21b:edff:fe0f:bc00 fe80::21b:edff:fe0c:c200 ]
line-speed actual "1000baseT, Duplex: Full"
line-speed configured Auto
The following example shows the management interfaces on a Brocade VDX 8770-4. IPv6
autoconfiguration is enabled for the entire chassis, and, as a result, a stateless IPv6 address is
assigned to both management interfaces.
switch# show interface management
interface Management 110/1
ip address 10.20.238.108/21
ip gateway-address 10.24.80.1
ipv6 ipv6-address [ "stateless fd00:60:69bc:85:205:33ff:fe78:7d88/64 preferred" ]
ipv6 ipv6-gateways [ fe80::21b:edff:fe0b:7800 fe80::21b:edff:fe0b:2400 ]
line-speed actual "1000baseT, Duplex: Full"
line-speed configured Auto
interface Management 110/2
ip address 10.20.238.109/21
ip gateway-address 10.24.80.1
ipv6 ipv6-address [ "stateless fd00:60:69bc:85:205:33ff:fe78:be14/64 preferred" ]
50
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Configuring the management interface speed
ipv6 ipv6-gateways [ fe80::21b:edff:fe0b:7800 fe80::21b:edff:fe0b:2400 ]
line-speed actual "1000baseT, Duplex: Full"
line-speed configured Auto
Configuring the management interface speed
By default, the speed of the interface is set to autoconfiguration, which means the interface speed is
optimized dynamically depending on load and other factors. You can override the default with a fixed
speed value of 10 Mbps full duplex or 100 Mbps full duplex.
1. In privileged EXEC mode, issue the configure terminal command to enter global configuration
mode.
switch# configure terminal
Entering configuration mode terminal
2. Enter the interface management command followed by rbridge-id/0 .
This command places you in the management interface subconfiguration mode.
switch(config)# interface management 1/0
switch(config-Management-1/0)#
3. Enter the speed command with the selected speed parameter. The valid values are 10, 100, and
auto.
switch(config-Management-1/0)# speed auto
4. Enter the do show interface management command followed by rbridge-id/0 to display the new
settings.
switch(config-Management-1/0)# do show interface management 1/0
interface Management 1/0
ip address 10.24.81.65/20
ip route 0.0.0.0/0 10.24.80.1
ipv6 ipv6-address [ ]
ipv6 ipv6-gateways [fe80::21b:edff:fe0f:bc00 fe80::21b:edff:fe0c:c200]
line-speed actual "1000baseT, Duplex: Full"
line-speed configured Auto
5. Save the configuration changes by using the copy running-config startup-config command.
switch(config-Management-1/0)# do copy running-config startup-config
Configuring a switch banner
A banner is a text message that displays on the switch console. It can contain information about the
switch that an administrator may want users to know when accessing the switch.
The banner can be up to 2048 characters long. To create a multi-line banner, enter the banner login
command followed by the Esc-m keys. Enter Ctrl-D to terminate the input.
If you are in logical chassis cluster mode, the configuration is applied to all nodes in the cluster.
Complete the following steps to set and display a banner.
1. In privileged EXEC mode, issue the configure terminal command to enter global configuration
mode.
2. Enter the banner login command and a text message enclosed in double quotation marks (" ").
3. Enter the do show running-config banner command to display the configured banner.
switch# configure terminal
Entering configuration mode terminal
switch(config)# banner login "Please do not disturb the setup on this switch"
switch(config)# do show running-config banner
banner login "Please do not disturb the setup on this switch"
Use the no banner login command to remove the banner.
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
51
Configuring switch attributes
Configuring switch attributes
Refer also to:
• Switch attributes on page 35.
• Switch types on page 36.
Setting and displaying the host name
1. In privileged EXEC mode, issue the configure terminal command to enter global configuration
mode.
2. If Telnet is not activated on the switch, enter the no telnet server disable command to activate
Telnet.
3. Enter the switch-attributes command, followed by a question mark (?) to determine the local
RBridge ID.
4. Enter the switch-attributes command, followed by the RBridge ID.
5. Enter the host-name operand, followed by the host name.
6. Save the configuration changes by using the do copy running-config startup-config command.
NOTE
This step is used for switches in fabric cluster mode only. If you are using logical chassis cluster
mode, startup configurations are not maintained by the cluster; each node preserves its running
configuration. For more information about logical chassis cluster mode, refer to Logical chassis
cluster mode on page 37.
7. Verify the configuration with the do show running-config switch-attributes rbridge-id command.
switch# configure terminal
Entering configuration mode terminal
switch(config)# no telnet server disable
switch(config)# switch-attributes ?
Possible completions: <NUMBER:1-239> Specify the rbridge-id 1
switch(config)# switch-attributes 1
switch(config-switch-attributes-1)# host-name lab1_vdx0023
switch(config-switch-attributes-1)# exit
switch(config)# do copy running-config startup-config
switch(config)# do show running-config switch-attributes 1
switch-attributes 1
chassis-name VDX 6740-48
host-name lab1_vdx0023
Setting and displaying the chassis name
1. In privileged EXEC mode, issue the configure terminal command to enter global configuration
mode.
2. Enter the switch-attributes command, followed by a question mark (?) to determine the local
RBridge ID.
3. Enter the switch-attributes command, followed by the RBridge ID.
4. Enter the chassis-name operand, followed by the chassis name.
5. Save the configuration changes using the do copy running-config startup-config command.
NOTE
This step is used for switches in fabric cluster mode only. If you are using logical chassis cluster
mode, startup configurations are not maintained by the cluster; each node preserves its running
52
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Viewing switch types
configuration. For more information about logical chassis cluster mode, refer to Logical chassis
cluster mode on page 37.
switch# configure terminal
Entering configuration mode terminal
switch(config)# switch-attributes ?
Possible completions: <NUMBER:1-239> Specify the rbridge-id 1
switch(config)# switch-attributes 1
switch(config-switch-attributes-1# chassis-name lab1_vdx0023
switch(config)# do copy running-config startup-config
switch(config)# do show running-config switch-attributes 1
switch-attributes 1
chassis-name lab1_vdx0023
host-name lab1_vdx0023
Viewing switch types
The switchType attribute is a unique device model identifier that allows you to identify the model of a
switch from the command line.
In this example, the number 1000 is the value of the switchType attribute. An optional number (.x)
indicates the revision of the motherboard.
Refer also to Switch types on page 36.
Enter show chassis.
switch# show chassis
Chassis Family: VDX 87xx
Chassis Backplane Revision: 1
switchType: 1000 <== Use table to convert this parameter
(output truncated)
Configuring a switch in logical chassis cluster mode
Refer to Logical chassis cluster mode on page 37.
Creating a logical chassis cluster
This section covers the basic steps to create a logical chassis cluster, with the assumption that all
physical connectivity requirements have been met. The following figure is a representation of a fivenode logical chassis cluster.
FIGURE 12 Five-node logical chassis cluster
To create a logical chassis cluster, follow the steps in the following example:
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
53
Taking precautions for mode transitions
1. Log in to one switch that will be a member of the logical chassis cluster you are creating:
2. In privileged EXEC mode, enter the vcs command with options to set the VCD ID, the RBridge ID
and enable logical chassis mode for the switch. The VCS ID and RBridge IDs shown are chosen for
the purposes of this example.
switch# vcs vcsid 22 rbridge-id 15 logical-chassis enable
3. The switch reboots after you run the vcs command. You are asked if you want to apply the default
configuration; answer yes.
4. Repeat the previous steps for each node in the cluster, changing only the RBridge ID each time.
You must, however, set the VCS ID to the same value on each node that belongs to the cluster.
5. When you have enabled the logical chassis mode on each node in the cluster, run the show vcs
command to determine which node has been assigned as the cluster principal node. The arrow (>)
denotes the principal node. The asterisk (*) denotes the current logged-in node.
switch# show vcs
Config Mode
: Distributed
VCS Mode
: Logical Chassis
VCS ID
: 44
VCS GUID
: bcab366e-6431-42fe-9af1-c69eb67eaa28
Total Number of Nodes
: 3
Rbridge-Id
WWN
Management IP
VCS Status
Fabric Status
HostName
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------144
10:00:00:27:F8:1E:3C:8C
10.18.245.143
Offline
Unknown
sw0
152
>10:00:00:05:33:E5:D1:93*
10.18.245.152
Online
Online
cz41-h06-m-r2
158
10:00:00:27:F8:F9:63:41
10.18.245.158
Offline
Unknown
sw0
The RBridge ID with the arrow pointing to the WWN is the cluster principal. In this example, RBridge
ID 154 is the principal.
6. Set the clock and time zone for the principal node. Time should be consistent across all the nodes.
Refer to Network Time Protocol overview on page 79.
7. Log in to the principal cluster and make any desired global and local configuration changes. These
changes then are distributed automatically to all nodes in the logical chassis cluster.
NOTE
You can enter the RBridge ID configuration mode for any RBridge in the cluster from the cluster
principal node. You can change the principal node by using the logical-chassis principal priority
and logical chassis principal switchover commands. For more information about cluster principal
nodes, refer to Selecting a principal node for the cluster on page 58.
Taking precautions for mode transitions
Ensure that all nodes to be transitioned are running the same version of Network OS. Logical chassis
cluster mode is supported starting with Network OS release 4.0.0
If you are merging multiple global configuration files to create one new global configuration file, be
sure that the same entity name does not exist in the merged file. For example, if mac access-list
extended test1 contains the entries shown in the following "Node 1 global configuration" and "Node 2
global configuration", when you merge the files you can rename mac access-list extended test1 from
Node 2 to mac access-list extended test2 , as shown in the "Combined global configuration."
Node 1 global configuration
mac access-list extended test1
seq 10 permit any 1111.2222.333a ffff.ffff.ffff
seq 20 deny any 1111.2222.333b ffff.ffff.ffff
54
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Node 2 global configuration
seq 30 deny any 1111.2222.333c ffff.ffff.ffff
seq 40 permit any any
Node 2 global configuration
mac
seq
seq
seq
access-list extended test1
10 permit any 4444.5555.666d ffff.ffff.ffff
20 deny any 4444.5555.666e ffff.ffff.ffff
30 permit any any
Combined global configuration
mac
seq
seq
seq
seq
!
mac
seq
seq
seq
access-list extended test1
10 permit any 1111.2222.333a ffff.ffff.ffff
20 deny any 1111.2222.333b ffff.ffff.ffff
30 deny any 1111.2222.333c ffff.ffff.ffff
40 permit any any
access-list extended test2
10 permit any 4444.5555.666d ffff.ffff.ffff
20 deny any 4444.5555.666e ffff.ffff.ffff
30 permit any any
The local configuration for Node 2 also needs to be changed accordingly. In this example, one of the
local configuration changes would be the interface TenGigabitEthernet. Instead of referencing test1, the
local configuration file for Node 2 needs to reference test2 because of the change that was made to the
global configuration file. This is shown in the following "Node 2 local configuration..." sections.
Node 2 local configuration before matching the combined global configuration
interface TenGigabitEthernet 4/0/3
fabric isl enable
fabric trunk enable
switchport
switchport mode access
switchport access vlan 1
spanning-tree shutdown
mac access-group test1 in
no shutdown
Node 2 local configuration after matching the combined global configuration
interface TenGigabitEthernet 4/0/3
fabric isl enable
fabric trunk enable
switchport
switchport mode access
switchport access vlan 1
spanning-tree shutdown
mac access-group test2 in
no shutdown
ATTENTION
Be sure to take the following precautions.
• Note that the copy default-config to startup-config command in logical chassis cluster mode
causes a cluster-wide reboot and returns the entire logical chassis cluster to the default
configuration. Therefore, use this command only if you want to purge all existing configuration in the
logical chassis cluster.
• Make sure that the backup files for global and local configurations are available in a proper SCP or
FTP location that can be easily retrieved in logical chassis cluster mode during restore. Do not save
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
55
Converting a fabric cluster to a logical chassis cluster
the files in the local flash, because they may not be available on the principal node for replay of
local configurations.
Converting a fabric cluster to a logical chassis cluster
You can convert an existing fabric cluster to a logical chassis cluster using the default configuration
file.
1. Be sure all nodes are running the same firmware version. Logical chassis cluster functionality is
supported in Network OS 4.0.0 and later.
2. Be sure all the nodes that you intend to transition from a fabric cluster to a logical chassis cluster
are online. Run either the show vcs or show vcs detail command to check the status of the nodes.
3. Log in to one switch that you are converting from fabric cluster mode to logical chassis cluster
mode.
4. In Privileged EXEC mode, enter the vcs logical-chassis enable command with desired options; for
example you can convert all RBridges with one command:
switch# vcs logical-chassis enable rbridge-id all default-config
NOTE
To convert a specific RBridge from fabric cluster mode to logical chassis mode, use the RBridge ID
value in place of the "all" option. You can also specify a range, such as "1,3,4-6". Refer to the
Network OS Command Reference for details.
The nodes automatically reboot in logical chassis cluster mode. Allow for some down time during
the mode transition.
5. Run either the show vcs or the show vcs detail command to check that all nodes are online and
now in logical chassis cluster (listed as "Distributed" in the command output) mode.
6. The show vcs command output can also be used to determine which node has been assigned as
the cluster principal node.
switch# show vcs
R-Bridge
WWN
Switch-MAC
Status
___________________________________________________________________
1
> 11:22:33:44:55:66:77:81
AA:BB:CC::DD:EE:F1
Online
2
11:22:33:44:55:66:77:82
AA:BB:CC::DD:EE:F2
Online
3
11:22:33:44:55:66:77:83*
AA:BB:CC::DD:EE:F3
Online
The RBridge ID with the arrow pointing to the WWN is the cluster principal. In this example, RBridge
ID 1 is the principal.
7. Log in to the principal cluster and make any desired global and local configuration changes. These
changes then are distributed automatically to all nodes in the logical chassis cluster.
NOTE
You can enter the RBridge ID configuration mode for any RBridge in the cluster from the cluster
principal node.
NOTE
You can change the principal node by using the logical-chassis principal priority and logical
chassis principal switchover commands. For more information about cluster principal nodes,
refer to Selecting a principal node for the cluster on page 58.
56
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Converting a fabric cluster while preserving configuration
Converting a fabric cluster while preserving configuration
There is no specific command that can convert a fabric cluster to a logical chassis cluster while
preserving current configurations, but you can accomplish this task as follows:
1. Be sure that all nodes are running the same firmware version. Logical chassis cluster functionality is
supported in Network OS 4.0 and later.
2. Make sure all the nodes that you intend to transition from a fabric cluster to a logical chassis cluster
are online. Run either the show vcs or show vcs detail command to check the status of the nodes.
3. Determine which node contains the global configuration you want to use on the logical chassis
cluster, and make a backup of this configuration by running the copy global-running-config
command and saving the configuration to a file on a remote FTP, SCP, SFTP, or USB location:
NOTE
If you need to combine the global configurations of two or more nodes, manually combine the
required files into a single file which will be replayed after the transition to logical chassis cluster
mode by using the copy global-running-config location_config_filename command. Refer to the
section Taking precautions for mode transitions on page 54
4. Back up the local configurations of all individual nodes in the cluster, by running the copy localrunning-config command on each node and saving the configuration to a file on a remote ftp, scp,
sftp, or usb location:
copy local-running-config location_config_filename
5. Perform the mode transition from fabric cluster to logical chassis cluster by running the vcs logicalchassis enable rbridge-id all default-config command, as shown in Converting a fabric cluster to a
logical chassis cluster on page 56.
The nodes automatically reboot in logical chassis cluster mode. Allow for some down time during the
mode transition.
6. Run either the show vcs or the show vcs detail command to check that all nodes are online and
now in logical chassis cluster (listed as "Distributed" in the command output) mode.
7. The show vcs command output can also be used to determine which node has been assigned as
the cluster principal node.
switch# show vcs
R-Bridge
WWN
Switch-MAC
Status
___________________________________________________________________
1
>
11:22:33:44:55:66:77:81
AA:BB:CC::DD:EE:F1
Online
2
11:22:33:44:55:66:77:82
AA:BB:CC::DD:EE:F2
Online
3
11:22:33:44:55:66:77:83*
AA:BB:CC::DD:EE:F3
Online
The RBridge ID with the arrow pointing to the WWN is the cluster principal. In this example, RBridge
ID 1 is the principal.
8. While logged on to the principal node in the logical chassis cluster, copy the saved global
configuration file from the remote location to the principal node as follows:
copy location_config_filename running-config
9. Verify that the global configuration is available by running the show global-running-config
command.
10.While logged on to the principal node in the logical chassis cluster, copy each saved local
configuration file from the remote location to the principal node as follows:
copy location_config_filename running-config
NOTE
You must run this command for each local configuration file you saved (one for each node).
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
57
Selecting a principal node for the cluster
The configuration file is automatically distributed to all nodes in the logical chassis cluster. Each
node will contain the same global configuration after the previous steps are performed. Each node
will also contain the local configuration information of all the other nodes.
11.Verify that the local configurations are available by running the show local-running-config
command.
12.Log in to the principal cluster and make any desired global and local configuration changes. These
changes then are distributed automatically to all nodes in the logical chassis cluster.
NOTE
You can enter the RBridge ID configuration mode for any RBridge in the cluster from the cluster
principal node. You can change the principal node by using the logical-chassis principal priority
and logical chassis principal switchover commands. For more information about cluster principal
nodes, refer to Selecting a principal node for the cluster on page 58.
Selecting a principal node for the cluster
Logical chassis cluster principal node behavior includes:
• All configuration for the logical chassis cluster must be performed on the principal node.
• By default, the node with the lowest WWN number becomes the principal node.
• You can run the show vcs command to determine which node is the principal node. An arrow in the
display from this command points to the WWN of the principal node.
• You can select any node in the logical chassis cluster to become the principal by running the
logical chassis principal priority command, followed by the logical-chassis principal
switchover command, as shown in the following example (in this example, RBridge ID 5 is being
assigned with the highest priority):
switch# configure
switch(config)# rbridge-id 5
switch(config-rbridge-id-5)# logical-chassis principal-priority 1
switch(config-rbridge-id-5)# end
switch# logical-chassis principal-switchover
A lower number means a higher priority. Values range from 1 to 128.
Until you run the logical-chassis principal switchover command, the election of the new principal
node does not take effect.
Converting a logical chassis cluster to a fabric cluster
To transition all nodes in a logical chassis cluster to a fabric cluster, using default configurations,
perform these steps:
1. Make sure all the nodes that you intend to transition from a logical chassis cluster to a fabric cluster
are online. Run either the show vcs or show vcs detail command to check the status of the nodes.
2. Log in to the principal node on the logical chassis cluster.
3. Run the following command to convert all RBridge IDs: no vcs logical-chassis enable rbridge-id
all default-config.
NOTE
To convert just one RBridge ID, specify the ID as shown in the following example: no vcs logicalchassis enable rbridge-id rbridge-id default-config.
58
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Converting to a fabric cluster while preserving configuration
The nodes automatically reboot in fabric cluster mode. Plan for some down time for this transition.
4. Run either the show vcs or show vcs detail command to check that all nodes are online and now in
fabric cluster (listed as "Local-only" in the command output) mode.
Converting to a fabric cluster while preserving configuration
There is no specific command that can convert a logical chassis cluster to a fabric cluster while
preserving current configurations, but you can accomplish this task as follows:
1. Make sure all the nodes that you intend to transition from a logical chassis cluster to a fabric cluster
are online. Run either the show vcs or show vcs detail command to check the status of the nodes.
2. Back up the configurations of all nodes in the cluster by running the copy rbridge-running-config
rbridge-id command on each node and saving the configuration to a file on a remote FTP, SCP,
SFTP, or USB location:
copy rbridge-running-config rbridge-id rbridge-id location_configfilename
This command copies both the global and local configurations for the specified RBridge ID.
3. From the principal node of the logical chassis cluster, transition the entire cluster to fabric cluster
mode (using the default configuration) by running the following command:
no vcs logical-chassis enable rbridge-id all default-config
The nodes automatically reboot in fabric cluster mode. Plan for some down time for this transition.
4. Run either the show vcs or show vcs detail command to check that all nodes are online and now in
fabric cluster (listed as "Local-only" in the command output) mode.
5. Restore the global and local configurations on each individual node for which you backed up these
configurations by running the following command on each node:
copy location_configfilename running-config
6. To cause this downloaded configuration to be persistent for a node, run the copy running-config
startup-config command.
Adding a node to a logical chassis cluster
Nodes can be dynamically added to an existing logical chassis cluster. If the proper physical
connections exist between the existing logical chassis cluster and the new node, the process is
automatic.
Log into the new node and run the vcs logical-chassis enable command with the desired options. You
must assign the new node the VCS ID of the existing cluster.
You can run the show vcs command to verify that the status of the added node is "online."
Removing a node from a logical chassis cluster
If the no vcs logical-chassis enable rbridge-id <rbridge-id | all> default-config command is executed
on a switch that is currently in logical chassis cluster mode, the switch boots in fabric cluster mode. The
following is example:
no vcs logical-chassis enable rbridge-id 239 default-config
Once the node is converted to fabric cluster mode, the Rbridge goes into offline state from the original
cluster. To remove the configuration of the node, you must enter the no vcs enable rbridge-id rbridgeid command, as shown in the following example:
no vcs enable rbridge-id 239
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
59
Rejoining a node to the cluster
Once the node is removed, all configurations corresponding to that node are removed from the cluster
configuration database. Similarly, the removed node does not retain any configurations corresponding
to the other nodes in the cluster.
The following figure shows the cluster after node N5 has been removed. Nodes N1 through N4 remain
in the cluster, and N5 is an island. There is no data path or management path connectivity between
the two islands.
FIGURE 13 Removal of Node N5 from the logical chassis cluster
Rejoining a node to the cluster
Nodes that are temporarily isolated from a logical chassis cluster can re-join the cluster as long as no
configuration or cluster membership changes have taken place on either the deleted node or the
cluster. Run the vcs logical-chassis enable command with the desired options to rejoin the node to
the cluster.
However, if configuration changes have occurred on either the node or cluster since the node was
removed, you must reboot the node with its default configuration by issuing copy default-config
startup-config on the segmented node.
Replacing a node in a logical chassis cluster
If a node in a logical chassis cluster becomes damaged and no longer be used, a similar node with
identical capabilities can be used in its place.
The new node must use the same RBridge ID of the node that is being replaced. When the new node
is detected, it joins the cluster as a previously known node instead of being considered a new node.
To replace a node that has an RBridge ID of 3 and then enter the WWN of the new node, follow the
steps shown in the following example:
1. Add the new switch hardware to the network and connect all data cables.
2. Power on the replacement hardware and add the switch to the network as a standalone switch.
3. Run the following command on the principal switch:
switch# vcs replace rbridge-id 3
Enter the WWN of the new replacement switch: 11:22:33:44:55:66:77:81
4. Assign the RBridge ID of 3 to the new node by running the following command on the new node:
switch# vcs rbridge-id 3
60
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Merging two logical chassis clusters
Merging two logical chassis clusters
You can merge two logical chassis clusters that have the same VCS ID. Follow these steps:
1. Make all required physical connections between the two independent clusters.
2. Decide which cluster should retain the configuration after the merge. Only one configuration can be
retained.
3. On the cluster whose configuration will not be retained, issue the copy default-config startupconfig command so that the nodes in this cluster will reboot with the default configuration.
4. Reboot all nodes in each cluster. The logical chassis cluster whose configuration is being retained
recognizes the nodes from the other cluster as new nodes and adds them accordingly.
5. Re-apply the configuration to the cluster whose configuration was not retained.
Changing an RBridge ID on a switch within a fabric
It may become necessary to change the RBridge ID number on a switch that rebooted and has become
orphaned from the cluster.
1. Backup the global configuration before changing the RBridge ID, because the local configuration will
be reset to default values. Refer to Backing up configurations on page 86.
2. On the rebooted switch, execute the chassis disable command.
switch# chassis disable
3. From the fabric principal switch, execute the no vcs enable rbridge-id rbridge-id command, where
rbridge-id is the switch that was orphaned.
switch# no vcs enable rbridge-id 3
4. On the rebooted switch, execute the vcs rbridge-id rbridge-id command, where rbridge-id is the
RBridge you want to use.
5. The VCSID should already be set, if it's not set it with the vcs rbridge-id rbridge-id.
6. Reboot the orphaned switch.
The following behavior will take effect after the switch reboots:
• All interfaces will be in shutdown state. You must perform a no shutdown command on ISL
interfaces before the switch will rejoin the cluster.
• The original configuration will be lost and the switch will have a default configuration when it
rejoins the cluster with the new RBridge ID.
7. Use the show vcs detail command to verify that the switch is in the fabric.
switch# show vcs detail
Config Mode : Local-Only
VCS ID : 1
Total Number of Nodes : 6
Node :1
Serial Number : BKN2501G00R
Condition : Good
Status : Connected to Cluster
VCS Id : 1
Rbridge-Id : 38
Co-ordinator : NO
WWN : 10:00:00:05:33:52:2A:82
Switch MAC : 00:05:33:52:2A:82
FCF MAC : 0B:20:B0:64:10:27
Switch Type : BR-VDX6720-24-C-24
Internal IP : 127.1.0.38
Management IP : 10.17.10.38
Node :2
Serial Number : BZA0330G00P
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
61
Examples of global and local configurations
Examples of global and local configurations
The following table provides examples of global and local configuration commands that are available
under the respective configuration modes. These settings can be viewed respectively by means of the
show global-running-config command and the show local-running-config command.
TABLE 5 Global and local configuration commands
Global
Local
Interface vlan
switch-attributes
interface port-channel
interface management
port-profile
interface ve
mac access-list
diag post
ip access-list
dpod
sflow
switch-attributes
snmp-server
fabric route mcast
protocol lldp
rbridge-id
zoning
ip route
cee-map
linecard
username
router ospf
ipv6 router ospf
router bgp
protocol vrrp
vrrp-group
interface management
interface gigabitethernet
interface tengigabitethernet
interface fortygigabitethernet
interface fcoe
Use the copy snapshot commands if you need to upload or download configuration snapshot files to
and from an ftp or scp server. You may need to use these commands if you took a snapshot of a
configuration on a node that was disconnected from the cluster.
62
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Configuring a switch in fabric cluster mode
Refer to the Network OS Command Reference for detailed information about these and other logical
chassis server commands.
Configuring a switch in fabric cluster mode
Refer also to Fabric cluster mode on page 39. When you issue the show vcs command to display the
VCS configuration for the chassis, the command output shows a single-node VCS with a VCS ID of 1
and an RBridge ID of 1. Use the vcs command to change the default values.
switch0# show vcs
Config Mode : Local-Only
VCS ID
: 1
Total Number of Nodes : 1
Rbridge-Id WWN
Management IP VCS Status Fabric Status HostName
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------1
>10:00:00:05:33:51:63:42* 10.17.37.154 Online
Online
switch0
2607:f0d0:1002:ff51:ffff:ffff:ffff:fff5
Displaying switch interfaces
Interfaces on the VDX 8770 platform are identified by the RBridge ID, slot number, and port number,
separated by forward slashes (/). For example, the notation 9/2/8 indicates port 8 located in slot 2 on a
chassis with the RBridge ID of 9.
Enter the show running-config interface interface_type command to display the interfaces and their
status.
switch# show running-config interface tengigabitethernet
interface tengigabitethernet 1/1/1
fabric isl enable
fabric trunk enable
no shutdown
!
interface tengigabitethernet 1/1/2
fabric isl enable
fabric trunk enable
no shutdown
!
interface tengigabitethernet 1/1/3
fabric isl enable
fabric trunk enable
no shutdown
!
interface tengigabitethernet 1/1/4
fabric isl enable
fabric trunk enable
no shutdown
!
interface tengigabitethernet 1/1/5
fabric isl enable
fabric trunk enable
no shutdown
!
interface tengigabitethernet 1/1/6
fabric isl enable
fabric trunk enable
no shutdown
Enter the show interface interface_type rbridge_id/slot/port command to display the configuration
details for the specified interface.
switch# show interface tengigabitethernet 1/1/9
tengigabitethernet 1/1/9 is up, line protocol is up (connected)
Hardware is Ethernet, address is 0005.3315.df5a
Current address is 0005.3315.df5a
Pluggable media present
Interface index (ifindex) is 4702109825
MTU 9216 bytes
LineSpeed Actual
: 10000 Mbit
LineSpeed Configured : Auto, Duplex: Full
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
63
Displaying slots and module status information
Flowcontrol rx: off, tx: off
Priority Tag disable
Last clearing of show interface counters: 04:12:03
Queueing strategy: fifo
Receive Statistics:
1580 packets, 140248 bytes
Unicasts: 0, Multicasts: 1580, Broadcasts: 0
64-byte pkts: 0, Over 64-byte pkts: 1561, Over 127-byte pkts: 17
Over 255-byte pkts: 2, Over 511-byte pkts: 0, Over 1023-byte pkts: 0
Over 1518-byte pkts(Jumbo): 0
Runts: 0, Jabbers: 0, CRC: 0, Overruns: 0
Errors: 0, Discards: 0, TrillportCtrlFrames: 1564
Transmit Statistics:
1583 packets, 140120 bytes
Unicasts: 0, Multicasts: 1583, Broadcasts: 0
Underruns: 0
Errors: 0, Discards: 0, TrillportCtrlFrames: 1583
Rate info:
Input 0.000000 Mbits/sec, 0 packets/sec, 0.00% of line-rate
Output 0.000000 Mbits/sec, 0 packets/sec, 0.00% of line-rate
Time since last interface status change: 00:15:53
Refer also to Slot numbering and configuration on page 42.
Displaying slots and module status information
Use the show slots command to display information for all slots in the chassis. The following example
shows slot information for the Brocade VDX 8770-8.
switch# show slots
Slot Type
Description
ID
Status
--------------------------------------------------------------------------M1
MM
Management Module
112
ENABLED
M2
MM
Management Module
112
ENABLED
S1
SFM
Switch Fabric Module
113
ENABLED
S2
[email protected]
S3
SFM
Switch Fabric Module
113
ENABLED#
S4
SFM
Switch Fabric Module
113
ENABLED#
S5
SFM
Switch Fabric Module
113
ENABLED
S6
SFM
Switch Fabric Module
113
ENABLED
L1
VACANT
L2
VACANT
L3
LC48X10G
48-port 10GE card
114
DIAG RUNNING POST1
L4
LC48X10G
48-port 10GE card
114
ENABLED
L5
VACANT
L6
VACANT
L7
LC48X1G
48-port 1GE card
114
ENABLED
L7
VACANT
L8
VACANT
# = At least one enabled SFM in these slots is required.
@ = The SFM Optical Switch is open.
Alternatively, you can use the following commands to display slots per module type:
• Use the show mm command to display information for the management modules.
• Use the show sfm command to display information for the switch fabric modules.
• Use the show linecard command to display information for the line cards.
To make the slot configuration persistent across a chassis reboot (which involves reloading the
management modules), you must save the configuration persistently by issuing the copy runningconfig startup-config command after the line card reaches the online state and before the system
reboots.
64
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Replacing a line card
Replacing a line card
You can remove a line card without powering it off. However, doing so will not remove the configuration.
When you replace a card with a different type, you must first remove the configuration and then
reconfigure the slot for the new line card type.
Install a new line card only if it is supported by the firmware running in the chassis. Inserting a line card
into a chassis running firmware that does not support the line card may result in unexpected behavior.
Complete the following steps to replace a line card.
CAUTION
Removing the configuration requires the card to be powered off.
1. Power off the line card by issuing the power-off linecard command followed by the slot number.
2. Enter the configure terminal command to enter global configuration mode.
3. Enter the rbridge-id rbridge-id command to enter RBridge ID configuration mode.
4. Enter the no linecard slot_number command to clear the slot configuration.
5. Remove the line card.
6. Enter the linecard slot_number command followed by a question mark (?) to display the line card
menu.
7. Select a line card type and enter the linecard slot_number linecard_type command.
8. Enter the exit command twice to return to privileged EXEC mode.
9. Insert the new line card into the configured slot.
10.Enter the power-on linecard command to power on the line card.
11.Save the configuration persistently by issuing the copy running-config startup-config command
after the line card reaches the online state.
12.Verify the configuration with the show running-config linecard linecard command.
switch# power-off linecard 4
switch# configure terminal
Entering configuration mode terminal
switch(config)# rbridge-id 1
switch(config-rbridge-id-1)# no linecard 4
switch(config-rbridge-id-1)# linecard 4 ?
Possible completions:
LC12x40G 12X40G linecard
LC48x1G
48X1G linecard
LC48x10G 48X10G linecard
LC72x1G 72X1G linecard
LC48x10GT
48X10G Base-T linecard
LC27X40G
27X40G linecard
LC6X100G
6X100G linecard
switch(config-rbridge-id-1)# linecard 4 LC48x10G
Creating new linecard configuration was successful.
switch(config-rbridge-id-1)# exit
switch(config)# exit
switch# copy running-config startup-config
switch# show running-config rbridge-id 4 linecard
rbridge-id 1
linecard 1 LC48x10G
linecard 4 LC48x10G
Configuring High Availability
The following sections provide you with information on configuring High Availability (HA) support on
Brocade switches.
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
65
Using HA commands
Using HA commands
A variety of High Availability (HA) commands are available on the switch in privileged EXEC mode.
• show ha displays the management module status.
switch# show ha
Local (M2): Active, Cold Recovered
Remote (M1): Standby, Healthy
HA enabled, Heartbeat Up, HA State synchronized
• ha failover forces the active management module to fail over. The standby management module
will take over as the active management module. This command is only available in a modular
chassis system.
• reload system reboots the entire chassis. This command is supported only on the active
management module. This command is not supported on the standby management module. Both
management modules must be in sync for the HA reboot operation to succeed. In logical chassis
cluster mode, this command can be issued from the principal node to reset one remote node or all
of the remote nodes by specifying either the individual rbridge-id or all.
• ha sync start enables HA state synchronization after an ha sync stop command has been
invoked.
• show ha all-partitions displays details for all line cards and the MM HA state.
NOTE
For additional HA commands and related commands, refer to the Network OS Command Reference.
Understanding expected behaviors for reload and failover
The following tables identify expected behaviors that result from controlled and uncontrolled reload
and failover conditions.
NOTE
When MMs are out of sync, the reload command does not work. Use the reload system command to
reboot the switch in this case.
TABLE 6 Expected behaviors for controlled reload and failover
66
Command syntax
Behavior in fabric cluster and
logical chassis cluster
Behavior in compact switches
reload
Cold failover to standby
management module (MM).
Reloads the switch
reload standby
Reboot the standby MM.
Not available
reload system
Reboot both MMs. MMs will retain
the HA roles.
Reloads the switch
ha failover
Warm failover to standby MM.
Not available
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Disabling and enabling a chassis
TABLE 7 Expected behaviors for uncontrolled failover
Command syntax
Behavior in fabric cluster and
logical chassis cluster
Behavior in compact switches
Panic
Warm failover to standby MM.
Reloads the switch
MM removal
Warm failover to standby MM.
Not available
Power cycle
MMs will retain the HA roles upon
booting up.
Resets the switch
Disabling and enabling a chassis
The chassis is enabled after power is turned on, and diagnostics and switch initialization routines have
finished. All interfaces are online. You can disable and re-enable the chassis as necessary.
• Use the chassis disable command if you want to take all interfaces offline. If the switch was part of
an Ethernet fabric, the fabric reconfigures.
• Use the chassis enable command to bring the interfaces back online. All interfaces that were
enabled before the chassis was disabled are expected to come back online. If the switch was part of
an Ethernet fabric, it rejoins the fabric.
NOTE
Disabling the chassis is a disruptive operation. Use the shutdown command to disable or enable a few
selected interfaces only. Refer to the Network OS Command Reference for more information on this
command.
Rebooting a switch
Network OS provides several commands to reboot your system: reload, fastboot, and reload system.
CAUTION
All reboot operations are disruptive, and the commands prompt for confirmation before
executing. When you reboot a switch connected to a fabric, all traffic to and from that switch
stops. All ports on that switch remain inactive until the switch comes back online.
Rebooting a Top-of-Rack switch
• The reload command performs a "cold reboot" (power off and restart) of the control processor (CP).
If the power-on self-test (POST) is enabled, POST is executed when the system comes back up.
• The fastboot command performs a "cold reboot" (power off and restart) of the control processor
(CP), bypassing POST when the system comes back up. Bypassing POST can reduce boot time
significantly.
CAUTION
Do not perform a reload command between a chassis disable command and a chassis enable
command. Your ports will be closed.
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
67
Rebooting a modular chassis
Rebooting a modular chassis
A chassis reboot brings up the system in sequential phases. First, software services are launched on
the management modules and brought up to the active state. Then, the line cards are powered on and
initialized. Software services are launched on the line cards and brought up to the active state. When
the line card initialization reaches the final state, the chassis is ready to accept user commands from
the CLI interface.
During the boot process system initialization, configuration data (default or user-defined) are applied to
the switch through configuration replay. For more information, refer to Managing configurations across
redundant management modules on page 89.
• On a modular chassis, the reboot and the fastboot commands only reboot the management
module on which the command is executed. If you log in to the switch IP address and execute one
of these commands, only the active management module reboots and POST is bypassed.
• The reload system command performs a "cold reboot" (power off and restart) of the entire chassis.
If the power-on self-test (POST) is enabled, POST is executed when the system comes back up.
Troubleshooting switches
This section presents an overview of a variety of techniques for capturing data and system messages,
which can be helpful in interactions with technical support.
Capturing and managing supportSave data
If you are troubleshooting a production system, you will have to capture data for further analysis or
send the data to your switch service provider. The copy support command provides a mechanism for
capturing critical system data and uploading the data to an external host or saving the data to an
attached USB device.
Uploading supportSave data to an external host
To upload supportSave data interactively, enter the copy support-interactive command and provide
input as prompted. Specifying an IPv6 address for the server requires Network OS v3.0.0 or later. For
a non-interactive version of the command, refer to the Network OS Command Reference.
switch# copy support-interactive
Server Name or IP Address: 10.38.33.131
Protocol (ftp, scp): ftp
User: admin
Password: ********
Directory: /home/admin/support
VCS support [y/n]? (y): n
Module timeout multiplier [Range: 1 to 5. Default: 1]: 1
copy support start
Saving support information for chassis:sw0, module:RAS...(output truncated)
Saving supportSave data to an attached USB device
You can use a Brocade-branded USB device to save the support data. The Brocade-branded USB
device comes with factory-configured default directories and interacts with the Network OS CLI.
1. Enter the usb on command to enable the USB device.
2. Enter the usb dir command to display the default directories.
3. Enter the copy support usb directory command.
switch# usb on
USB storage enabled
68
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Displaying the status of a supportSave operation
switch# usb dir
firmwarekey\ 0B 2010 Aug 15 15:13
support\ 106MB 2010 Aug 24 05:36
support1034\ 105MB 2010 Aug 23 06:11
config\ 0B 2010 Aug 15 15:13
firmware\ 380MB 2010 Aug 15 15:13
Available space on usbstorage 74%
switch# copy support usb directory support
If you are in logical chassis cluster mode, you can use the rbridge-id all option to invoke
supportSave on all nodes at the same time. The copy support rbridge-id all command is a blocking
command. The Telnet session from which the command is issued will be blocked until supportSave is
completed on all nodes in the cluster; however, users can again Telnet into the same node or any
other nodes in the cluster. When the command is in progress, output messages from all nodes are
shown that include the respective node RBridge IDs. The copy support command, when executed
with USB as the protocol option, will collect support files to the USB device that is connected to the
respective nodes. All USB devices connected to each of the nodes should be enabled before the
copy support usb command is executed.
The following example shows the copy support command with the rbridge-id all option.
switch# copy support ftp host 10.1.2.30 user fvt password pray4green directory /support rbridge-id all
switch 100: copy support start
switch 117: Saving support information for chassis:sw0, module:RAS...
switch 100: Saving support information for chassis:sw, module:RAS...
switch 117: Saving support information for chassis:sw0, module:CTRACE_OLD...
......
switch 100: copy support completed
switch 117: copy support completed
2011/04/07-18:03:07, [SS-1000], 2752,, INFO, VDX6720-24, copy support has uploaded support information
to the host with IP address 10.70.4.101.
Displaying the status of a supportSave operation
Enter the show copy-support status command.
switch# show copy-support status
Slot Name
SS type
Completion Percentage
# # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # #
M1
NORMAL
[100%]
L1/0
NORMAL
[100%]
L1/1
NORMAL
[100%]
L2/0
NORMAL
[100%]
L2/1
NORMAL
[100%]
L4/0
NORMAL
[100%]
L4/1
NORMAL
[100%]
Configuring automatic uploading of supportSave data
You can configure a switch to upload first-fault data capture (FFDC) and trace data files automatically to
a remote server that is specifically set up for collecting information that results from the supportSave
command. To enable this feature, you must configure a dedicated server, then invoke the autouploadparam command to set the parameters, followed by the support autoupload enable command to
enable the configurations.
switch(config)# support autoupload-param hostip 10.31.2.27 username supportadmin
directory /users/support/ffdc_autoupload protocol ftp password (<string>): ******
Displaying the autoupload configuration
Enter the show running-config support autoupload-param command to display the autoupload
configuration on the local switch.
switch(config)# do show running-config support autoupload-param
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
69
Using additional supportSave commands
support autoupload-param hostip 10.31.2.27 username supportadmin directory /users/
support/ffdc_autoupload protocol ftp password "3iTYxJWEUHp9axZQt2tbvw==\n"
Using additional supportSave commands
Use the following commands to configure additional supportSave data collection parameters:
• Use the show support command to display a list of core files on the switch.
• Use the clear support command to erase support data on the switch.
Refer to the Network OS Command Reference for more information on these commands.
Logging error messages
Network OS provides several mechanisms for logging error messages including syslog, RASLog, and
audit log. The types of message logging available and the setup procedures are documented in the
"Introduction to Brocade Error Message Logging" chapter of the Network OS Message Reference
Manual.
Configuring policy-based resource management
The policy-based resource management feature allows users to make better use of hardware
resources. In particular, pre-made profiles are provided that optimize ASIC resources for route profiles
and ternary content-addressable memory (TCAM) profiles. The profiles are enabled by keywords
available under the hardware-profile command in RBridge ID configuration mode. The profile
configuration is local to an RBridge within a VCS Fabric.
NOTE
In order for the last update of the profile configuration to take effect on a switch, the switch has to be
rebooted. In Logical Chassis mode, use the reload system command. In Fabric Cluster mode, run the
copy running-config startup-config command, followed by the reload system command.
The following table describes the available command options (keywords) to optimize route profiles,
available under the route-table keyword. Refer also to the hardware-profile command in the Network
OS Command Reference.
TABLE 8 Options for optimizing route profiles
Keyword
Optimizes resources for . . .
default
IPv4/IPv6 dual-stack operations
ipv4-max-route
Maximum number of IPv4 routes
ipv4-max-arp
Maximum number of IPv4 ARP entries
ipv4-min-v6
IPv4 routes in dual-stack configurations
ipv6-max-route
Maximum number of IPv6 routes
ipv6-max-nd
Maximum number of IPv6 Neighbor Discovery entries
The following table describes the available command options (keywords) to optimize TCAM profiles,
available under the tcam keyword.
70
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Configuring hardware profiles
TABLE 9 Options for optimizing TCAM profiles
Keyword
Optimizes resources for . . .
default
Basic support for all applications
l2-ipv4-acl
Layer 2 and IPv4 ACLs
ipv4-v6-pbr
IPv4 and IPv6 ACLs and policy-based routing tables
ipv4-v6-qos
IPv4 and IPv6 ACLs and QoS
ipv4-v6-mcast
Multicast
l2-acl-qos
Layer 2 ACLs and QoS
Note the following conditions for TCAM profiles:
• TCAM profiles affect only ACLs, policy-based routing (PBR), flow-based QoS, and multicast entries,
without affecting other features, protocols, or hardware resources.
• The TCAM profile options (listed in the table) are not customizable or configurable, and they may not
be appropriate to all network designs.
• The following QoS features are optimized by TCAM profiles:
‐
Flow-based QoS and flow-based policing for Layer2/Layer 3 ingress and egress
‐
System Qos (VLAN-based) for Layer2/Layer 3 ingress and egress
‐
Auto NAS
‐
Storm control
‐
Flow-based SPAN and RSPAN, including VXLAN based
‐
Flow-based Sflow, including VXLAN based
• The following QoS features are not affected by TCAM profiles:
‐
‐
‐
All port-based QoS features (RED; PFC and legacy flow control; CoS mutation, DSCP CoS,
DSCP traffic class, DSCP mutation; scheduling, shaping, and port-based policing)
Port-based SPAN and RSPAN
Port-based Sflow
Configuring hardware profiles
The following examples illustrate the application of the hardware-profile command, which is executed
in the RBridge ID configuration mode. The options for the route-table and tcam keywords are as listed
in the tables in the previous section.
NOTE
To apply the most recent profile configuration update, you must reboot (reload) the switch. Before
reloading, the current profile is in effect and functioning.
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
71
Guidelines for changing hardware profiles
The following example selects a route table profile to optimize resources for the
maximum number of IPv6 Neighbor Discovery entries:
switch(config)# rbridge-id 10
switch(config-rbridge-id-10)# hardware-profile route-table ipv6-max-nd
%Warning: To activate the new profile config, please run 'reload system' on the
target switch.
NOTE
When you use the hardware-profile route-table ? command to see the
available options, the currently applied hardware profile is at the top of the list
and is enclosed by square brackets ([ ]).
The following example selects a TCAM profile to optimize resources for the
maximum number of IPv4/IPv6 multicast entries:
switch(config)# rbridge-id 10
switch(config-rbridge-id-10)# hardware-profile tcam ipv4-ipv6-mcast
%Warning: To activate the new profile config, please run 'reload system' on the
target switch.
NOTE
When you use the hardware-profile tcam ? command to see the available
options, the currently applied TCAM profile is at the top of the list and is
enclosed by square brackets ([ ]).
Guidelines for changing hardware profiles
Note the following guidelines for changing hardware profiles:
• In fabric cluster and logical chassis cluster mode, you must reload the target switch after changing a
profile for the new profile to take effect.
‐
In logical chassis mode, when a secondary switch rejoins the cluster with a default profile
configuration while the profile configuration for the secondary switch is "nondefault" on the
principle switch, you must reload the secondary switch again after it has rejoined the
cluster for the nondefault profile to take effect. The TCAM and LPM hardware profiles are
persistent across “copy default-config startup-config” operation.
‐
In fabric cluster mode, you must use the copy running-config startup-config command
first, before reloading the switch. If the VCS ID changes to move one RBridge ID out of the
cluster, the system reboots with the default running configuration and boots with the
“default” TCAM and routing hardware profile. The previously applied TCAM-based
hardware profile is not persistent.
• After Netinstall or a firmware upgrade from to Network OS v5.0.0,, the default profiles are
automatically set for both TCAM and route tables in the running configuration. Also, the profile
configuration defaults after changing a switch VCS ID or Rbridge ID. However, the current profile
persists after the copy default-config startup-config command completes and the switch reboots.
Additionally, the current profile persists after a VCS mode change.
72
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Using hardware profile show commands
• There is no "no" option for the hardware-profile command, because hardware profiles always exist,
with either the default or one of the non-default configurations.
• When you change a hardware profile, the supported scale numbers remain the same with respect to
the configuration even if hardware may not be able to fulfill them. This ensures that the same
protocol and interface information remain valid with all hardware profile settings.
Using hardware profile show commands
The following show commands can be used to verify the status of hardware profiles. For details, refer
to the Network OS Command Reference.
TABLE 10 Network OS show commands
Command
Description
show hardware-profile
Displays the current active profile information and
subtype details for each profile type and RBridge ID on
local switch or specified RBridge ID or all switches in LC
cluster. For complete details on the show hardwareprofile command, refer to the Network OS Command
Reference.
show running-config rbridge-id hardware-profile
Displays the enabled route table and TCAM profiles in
the running configuration for all RBridge IDs, or a
specific enabled RBridge ID.
Brocade support for OpenStack
OpenStack is an open source Infrastructure as a Service (IaaS) initiative for creating and managing
large groups of virtual private servers in a cloud computing environment. The Brocade Neutron Plugin
for VDX/VCS provides a means to interface with Openstack's networking to orchestrate the Brocade
physical switches.
In cloud environments where Virtual Machines (VMs) are hosted by physical servers, the VMs see a
new virtual access layer provided by the host machine. This new access layer can be created using
many mechanisms, such as Linux Bridges or Virtual Switches. The policies of the virtual access layer
(virtual network), must be coordinated with the policies set in the hardware switches. The Brocade
Neutron Plugin helps in coordinating this behavior automatically without any intervention from the
administrator.
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
73
Configuring OpenStack to access Network OS
FIGURE 14 Virtual and physical network orchestration
The Brocade Neutron ML2 Plugin communicates with the Brocade Mechanism Driver, which uses
NETCONF on the back-end to configure the Brocade switches. The OpenStack feature supports
VLANs only.
FIGURE 15 OpenStack configuration path
For the latest version of the OpenStack Neutron plugin, go to the https://wiki.openstack.org/wiki/
Neutron site and search under plugins for the Brocade plugin. The OpenStack community can be
contacted at http://www.openstack.org/.
Configuring OpenStack to access Network OS
You must configure the Neutron Plugin and Brocade configuration to activate OpenStack access.
The Brocade ML2 drivers have been certified on Redhat and Ubuntu.
74
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Auto Fabric
1. Modify the physical switch configuration parameters and the Brocade-specific database configuration
in the brocade.ini configuration file.
% cat /etc/neutron/plugins/brocade/brocade.ini
[SWITCH]
username
password
address
ostype
=
=
=
=
admin
password
<switch mgmt ip address>
NOS
[DATABASE]
sql_connection = mysql://root:[email protected]/brcd_Neutron?charset=utf8
2. Modify the the ml2_config.ini file to enable the Brocade ML2 driver.
% cat /etc/neutron/plugins/ml2/ml2_conf.ini
[ml2]
tenant_network_types = vlan
type_drivers = local,flat,vlan,gre,vxlan
mechanism_drivers = openvswitch,brocade
Auto Fabric
Auto Fabric is a feature that allows plug-and-play for Brocade VDX switches.
A type of configuration known as bare-metal is required for a switch to join an existing VCS cluster by
means of plug and play. The cluster must be a logical chassis cluster.
Bare-metal configuration is a profile that contains a WWN-to-RBridge ID mapping. You first must preconfigure this mapping in the existing VCS cluster to allow the bare-metal switch to join the cluster. A
switch with its bare-metal flag set to true (which is the factory default) can request the following required
configuration settings from a physically connected neighbor that already belongs to the cluster:
•
•
•
•
VCS ID
RBridge ID
VCS mode
Global VLAN state
From this information, the bare-metal switch auto-configures itself and reboots with the bare-metal flag
now disabled. (Any configuration performed on the switch disables the bare-metal flag, but you may
need to toggle the ISL.) Bare-metal state must be disabled for cluster formation to occur.
NOTE
If VCS parameters are not set, the switch returns to the bare-metal-enabled state if you issue a write
erase command, or if you do a Netinstall. In addition, if VCS parameters are not set, the
firmwaredownload default-config command also returns the switch to the bare-metal-enabled state.
Configuring Auto Fabric for bare metal
Bare-metal configuration requires a unique WWN-to-RBridge ID mapping, which informs the cluster
which RBridge ID can be assigned to a joining bare-metal switch. Each time you want to add a baremetal switch to a cluster, you need to create a new WWN-RBridge-ID mapping that is unique for the
cluster.
The cluster must be a logical chassis cluster, and this configuration must be executed the principal node
in that cluster. Run the show vcs command on the bare-metal switch to obtain its WWN.
To create a bare-metal configuration, do the following:
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
75
Changing RBridge-ID-to-WWN mapping for bare-metal configuration
1. Enter the configuration command to enter global configuration mode:
switch# configure
2. Enter the preprovision command to map an RBridge ID to the WWN name of the bare-metal
switch you will be adding to the cluster. This can be any RBridge ID that is not currently assigned
within the cluster. For example, if the WWN of the bare-metal switch is 10:11:12:13:14:15:16:17,
and you wish to assign an RBridge of of 5 to the bare-metal switch, you would enter:
switch (config)# preprovision rbridge-id 5 wwn 10:11:12:13:14:15:16:17
NOTE
If you want to change this Rbridge-ID assignment after you have issued the above command, refer
to the Changing RBridge-ID-to-WWN mapping for bare-metal configuration on page 76.
3. Physically connect the bare-metal switch to the cluster.
The bare-metal switch obtains its VCS ID, VCS mode, Virtual-Fabric state, and RBridge ID from its
neighbor, then the bare-metal switch automatically reboots. After reboot is completed, the switch is
now bare-metal disabled. The cluster then verifies that the RBridge ID of the bare-metal switch is
unique to the cluster and to the RBridge-ID-to_WWN mapping, then adds the switch to the cluster.
Each time you want to add a bare-metal switch, you need to repeat this procedure with the WWN
name of the bare-metal switch by mapping it to an RBridge ID that is not currently assigned within the
cluster.
Changing RBridge-ID-to-WWN mapping for bare-metal configuration
If you have configured the RBridge-ID-to-WWN mapping for a bare-metal switch, but have not yet
plugged the switch into the cluster, you can still change the RBridge ID that will be assigned to the
bare-metal switch.
Do the following on the principal switch to change the mapping:
1. Use the no preprovision command to remove a currently configured mapping. For example, if you
already ran the command preprovision rbridge-id 5 wwn 10:11:12:13:14:15:16:17, and you want
to remove this configuration, enter the following command:
switch (config)# no preprovision rbridge-id 5 wwn 10:11:12:13:14:15:16:17
NOTE
To display the currently configured RBridge-ID-to-WWN mapping, enter the show running-config
preprovision command. To update only the WWN and not the RBridge ID, use the preprovision
command with the RBridge ID whose WWN mapping you wish to change. For example, if you have
already configured RBridge ID 5 to map to a WWN of 10:11:12:13:14:15:16:17, and you want to
change the WWN to 11:11:11:11:11:11:11:11, you would enter the following command:
preprovision rbridge-id 5 wwn 11:11:11:11:11:11:11:11 command.
2. Enter the preprovision command containing the new RBridge ID-to-WWN mapping. For example,
if you now want RBridge ID 6 to be assigned to the bare-metal switch referenced in the previous
step, enter the following command:
switch (config)# preprovision rbridge-id 6 wwn 10:11:12:13:14:15:16:17
NOTE
To delete all configured RBridge-ID-to-WWN mappings, enter the no preprovision rbridge-id
command. This removes all mappings under the previous container, so that the show runningconfig preprovision command will return "% No entries found."
76
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Mixed-version fabric cluster support
Mixed-version fabric cluster support
A mixed-version fabric cluster is a group of fabric cluster nodes running different versions of Network
OS during an upgrade process.
During a VCS cluster upgrade all nodes are not necessarily upgraded at the same time, and the cluster
is in a mixed-version state with the VCS cluster in an incomplete state. The software features do not
function, but the fabric and ISL data connections remain intact until the entire fabric is running the same
version of Network OS.
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
77
Mixed-version fabric cluster support
78
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Using Network Time Protocol
● Network Time Protocol overview.....................................................................................79
● Configuring NTP..............................................................................................................80
Network Time Protocol overview
Network Time Protocol (NTP) maintains uniform time across all switches in a network. The NTP
commands support the configuration of an external time server to maintain synchronization between all
local clocks in a network.
To keep the time in your network current, it is recommended that each switch have its time
synchronized with at least one external NTP server. External NTP servers should be synchronized
among themselves in order to maintain fabric-wide time synchronization.
All switches in the fabric maintain the current clock server value in nonvolatile memory. By default, this
value is the local clock server of the switch.
Date and time settings
Brocade switches maintain the current date and time inside a battery-backed real-time clock (RTC)
circuit. Date and time are used for logging events. Switch operation does not depend on the date and
time; a switch with incorrect date and time settings can function correctly. However, because the date
and time are used for logging, error detection, and troubleshooting, you should set them correctly.
Time zone settings
You can set the time zone by specifying a geographic region and city by name. You can choose one of
the following regions: Africa, America, Pacific, Europe, Antarctica, Arctic, Asia, Australia, Atlantic, and
Indian.
The time zone setting has the following characteristics:
• The setting automatically adjusts for Daylight Savings Time.
• Changing the time zone on a switch updates the local time zone setup and is reflected in local time
calculations.
• By default, all switches are in the Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) time zone (0,0). If all switches in a
fabric are in one time zone, it is possible for you to keep the time zone setup at the default setting.
• System services that have already started will reflect the time zone changes only after the next
reboot.
• Time zone settings persist across failover for high availability.
• Time zone settings are not affected by NTP server synchronization.
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
79
Configuring NTP
Configuring NTP
The following sections discuss how to correctly configure the Network Time Protocol for Brocade
switches.
Configuration considerations for NTP
Network time synchronization is guaranteed only when a common external time server is used by all
switches. If you are in VCS mode, when an ntp server command is invoked on one switch in a cluster,
the configuration is applied to all switches in the cluster.
The ntp server command accepts up to five server addresses in IPv4 or IPv6 format. When you
configure multiple NTP server addresses, the ntp server command sets the first obtainable address
as the active NTP server. If there are no reachable time servers, then the local switch time is the
default time until a new active time server is configured.
Setting the date and time
The clock set command sets the local clock date and time. Valid date and time values must be in the
range between January 1, 1970 and January 19, 2038. If a time zone is not configured, the time zone
defaults to Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). If an active NTP server is configured for the switch, it
overrides the local time settings.
Enter the clock set CCYY-MM-DDTHH:MM:SS command.
The variables represent the following values:
•
•
•
•
•
•
CCYY specifies the year; the valid range is 1970 through 2038.
MM specifies the month; the valid range is 01 through 12.
DD specifies the day; the valid range is 01 through 31.
HH specifies the hour; the valid range is 00 through 23.
MM specifies the minutes; the valid range is 00 through 59.
SS specifies the seconds; the valid range is 00 through 59.
If you are in VCS mode, setting the time and date is done using the RBridge ID of the node.
Here is an example of setting and displaying the date and time in VCS mode:
switch# clock set 2013-06-06T12:15:00 rbridge-id all
switch# show clock
rbridge-id all: 2013-06-06 12:15:05 Etc/GMT+0
Setting the time zone
Use the clock timezone command to set the time zone for a switch. You must use the command for
all switches for which a time zone must be set. However, you only need to set the time zone once on
each switch, because the value is written to nonvolatile memory.
Setting the time and date can be done in Privileged EXEC mode by using the RBridge ID of the node.
(Setting the date and time can also be done in RBridge ID configuration mode, but must be done on a
per-node basis in this mode.) Refer to the clock timezone command in each mode in the Network OS
Command Reference.
Refer to Using Network Time Protocol on page 79 for a complete list of configurable regions and cities.
80
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Displaying the current local clock and time zone
Enter the clock timezone region/city command.
switch# clock timezone America/Los_Angeles rbridge-id all
NOTE
Upgrade considerations: The existing timezone of the system is retained after a firmware upgrade, and
it will be updated in configuration settings.
Downgrade Considerations: Existing timezone of system will be retained after firmware downgrade and
the respective entry will be removed from configuration settings.
Displaying the current local clock and time zone
The show clock command returns the local time, date, and time zone.
NOTE
This command is currently supported on the local switch.
This example shows the local switch clock time:
switch# show clock
rbridge-id 1: 2012-05-04 16:01:51 America/Los Angeles
This example shows the clock time for all switches in the cluster (logical chassis cluster mode only):
switch# show clock rbridge-id all
rbridge-id 1: 2013-06-06 12:15:05 Etc/GMT+0
rbridge-id 5: 2013-06-06 12:15:05 Etc/GMT+0
rbridge-id 10: 2013-06-06 12:15:05 Etc/GMT+0
This example shows the clock time for the switch with rbridge-id 16:
switch# show clock rbridge-id 16
rbridge-id 16: 2012-05-04 18:18:51 America/Los Angeles
Removing the time zone setting
Use the no clock timezone command to remove the time zone setting for the local clock. This
operation returns the local time zone to the default value (GMT). When using the no operand, you do
not need to reference a timezone setting.
Enter the no clock timezone command.
switch# no clock timezone rbridge-id 5
NOTE
The clock timezone command can be run in privileged EXEC mode, as shown in the previous
example, or in RBridge ID configuration mode. Refer to the Network OS Command Reference for
descriptions of this command in each of these modes.
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
81
Synchronizing the local time with an external source
Synchronizing the local time with an external source
Use the ntp server command to synchronize the local switch time with an NTP server. You can
configure up to five IP address. At least one IP address in the list must be a reachable, configured
NTP server or the request will fail.
The following example synchronizes the time on the local switch with the ntp server at 192.168.10.1.
Enter the ntp server ip_address command.
switch(config)# ntp server 192.168.10.1
Displaying the active NTP server
Use the show ntp status command to display the current active NTP server IP address. If an NTP
server is not configured or the server is unreachable, the output displays LOCL (for local switch time).
Otherwise, the command displays the NTP server IP address. The command displays the local NTP
server configuration only.
If the RBridge ID parameter is not provided, status results default to the local switch. If rbridge-id all is
specified, the command displays the status for all switches in the cluster. If the RBridge ID is specified,
the command displays that node's NTP status.
This example shows the local switch NTP status when an NTP server is not configured:
switch# show ntp status
rbridge-id 1: active ntp server is LOCL
This example shows the configured NTP server:
switch# show ntp status
rbridge-id 1: active ntp server is 10.31.2.81
This example shows NTP status for all switches in a cluster.
switch# show ntp status rbridge-id all
rbridge-id 7: active ntp server is LOCL
Removing an NTP server IP address
To remove an NTP server IP address from the list of server IP addresses on a switch, enter no ntp
server followed by the server IP address.
The following example removes the NTP server at 192.168.10.1 from the local server IP address
database.
switch(config)# no ntp server 192.168.10.1
switch# show ntp status
rbridge-id 1: active ntp server is LOCL
At least one IP address in the remaining list must be for a reachable and configured NTP server; if
there is not one the remove request will fail.
82
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Configuration Management
● Configuration management overview..............................................................................83
● Displaying configurations................................................................................................ 85
● Saving configuration changes......................................................................................... 85
● Backing up configurations............................................................................................... 86
● Configuration restoration.................................................................................................87
● Managing configurations on a modular chassis.............................................................. 88
● Managing configurations in Brocade VCS Fabric mode................................................. 89
● Rejoining an offline node to a logical chassis cluster......................................................90
● Using default configuration in logical chassis cluster to avoid segmentation issues.......91
● Managing flash files........................................................................................................ 92
Configuration management overview
Maintaining consistent configuration settings among switches in the same fabric is an important part of
switch management and minimizes fabric disruptions. As part of standard maintenance procedures, it is
recommended that you back up all important configuration data for every switch on an external host for
emergency reference.
Typical configuration management tasks include the following actions:
• Saving the running configuration to the startup configuration file (Saving configuration changes on
page 85).
• Uploading the configuration files to a remote location (Backing up configurations on page 86).
• Restoring a configuration file from a remote archive (Configuration restoration on page 87).
• Archiving configuration files for all your switches to a remote location (Managing configurations in
Brocade VCS Fabric mode on page 89).
• Downloading a configuration file from a remote location to multiple switches (Managing
configurations in Brocade VCS Fabric mode on page 89).
Configuration file types
Brocade Network OS supports three types of configuration files. The table below lists the standard
configuration files and their functions.
TABLE 11 Standard switch configuration files
Configuration file
Description
Default configuration
Part of the Network OS firmware package. The default configuration
is applied, if no customized configuration is available.
•
•
defaultconfig.novcs
defaultconfig.vcs
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
83
Default configuration
TABLE 11 Standard switch configuration files (Continued)
Configuration file
Description
Startup configuration
Configuration effective on startup and after reboot.
• startup-config
Running configuration
• running-config
Current configuration active on the switch. Whenever you make a
configuration change, it is written to the running configuration. For
fabric cluster mode, the running configuration does not persist
across reboot, unless you copy it to the startup configuration.
However, when the switch is in logical chassis cluster mode, the
running-config file is saved automatically and it does not need to be
copied.
Configuration management follows a transaction model. When you boot up a switch for the first time,
the running configuration is identical to the startup configuration. As you configure the switch, the
changes are written to the running configuration. To save the changes, you must save the currently
effective configuration (the running configuration) as the startup configuration. When the switch
reboots, the configuration changes become effective.
Default configuration
Default configuration files are part of the Network OS firmware package and are automatically applied
to the startup configuration under the following conditions:
• When the switch boots up for the first time and no customized configuration is available.
• When you restore the default configuration.
You cannot remove, rename, or change the default configuration.
Startup configuration
NOTE
There is no startup configuration for logical chassis cluster mode. Switches in a logical chassis cluster
always preserve their running configuration.
The startup configuration is persistent. It is applied when the system reboots.
• When the switch boots up for the first time, the switch uses the default configuration as the startup
configuration, depending on the mode.
• The startup configuration always matches the current Brocade VCS Fabric mode. It is deleted when
you change modes, unless you make a backup copy.
• When you make configuration changes to the running configuration and save the changes to the
startup configuration with the copy command, the running configuration becomes the startup
configuration.
Running configuration
The configuration currently effective on the switch is referred to as the running configuration. Any
configuration change you make while the switch is online is made to the running configuration.
84
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Displaying configurations
• The running configuration is nonpersistent.
• To save configuration changes, you must copy the running configuration to the startup configuration.
If you are not sure about the changes, you can copy the changes to a file, and apply the changes
later.
Displaying configurations
The following examples illustrate how to display the default, startup, and running configurations,
respectively.
Displaying the default configuration
To display the default configuration, enter the show file filename command in privileged EXEC mode.
switch# show file defaultconfig.novcs
switch# show file defaultconfig.vcs
Displaying the startup configuration
To display the contents of the startup configuration, enter the show startup-config command in
privileged EXEC mode.
switch# show startup-config
Displaying the running configuration
To display the contents of the running configuration, enter the show running-config command in the
privileged EXEC mode.
switch# show running-config
Saving configuration changes
Configuration changes are nonpersistent and are lost on reboot unless you save them permanently.
You have two options for saving configuration changes:
• Copy the running configuration to the startup configuration. The changes become effective upon
reboot.
• Copy the running configuration to a file, and apply it at some later date.
NOTE
Always make a backup copy of your running configuration before you upgrade or downgrade the
firmware.
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
85
Saving the running configuration
Saving the running configuration
To save the configuration changes you made, copy the running configuration to the startup
configuration. The next time the switch reboots, it uses the startup configuration and the changes you
made earlier become effective.
NOTE
When the switch is in logical chassis cluster mode, the running-config file is saved automatically and it
does not need to be copied.
Enter the copy running-config startup-config command in privileged EXEC mode.
switch# copy running-config startup-config
copy running-config startup-config
This operation will modify your startup configuration. Do you want to continue? [Y/
N]: y
Saving the running configuration to a file
If you want to save the changes you made to the configuration, but you do not want the changes to
take effect when the switch reboots, you can save the running configuration to a file. You can apply
the changes at some later time.
1. Enter the copy running-config file command in privileged EXEC mode. Specify the file name as
the file URL.
switch# copy running-config flash://myconfig
2. Verify the transaction by listing the directory contents.
switch# dir
total 32
drwxr-xr-x
drwxr-xr-x
-rwxr-xr-x
-rwxr-xr-x
-rw-r--r--rw-r--r--
2
3
1
1
1
1
root
root
root
root
root
root
sys
root
sys
sys
root
root
4096
4096
417
697
6777
6800
Feb
Jan
Oct
Oct
Feb
Feb
17 17:50 .
1 1970 ..
12 2010 defaultconfig.novcs
12 2010 defaultconfig.vcs
17 17:50 myconfig
13 00:37 startup-config
Applying previously saved configuration changes
When you are ready to apply the configuration changes you previously saved to a file, copy the file
(myconfig in the example) to the startup configuration. The changes take effect after the switch
reboots.
Enter the copy filename startup-config command in privileged EXEC mode. Specify the file name as
the file URL.
switch# copy flash://myconfig startup-config
This operation will modify your startup configuration. Do you want to continue? [Y/
N]: y
Backing up configurations
Always keep a backup copy of your configuration files, so you can restore the configuration in the
event the configuration is lost or you make unintentional changes.
86
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Uploading the startup configuration to an external host
NOTE
This operation is not supported in logical chassis cluster mode, because the running-config will be autosynced to the startup-config.
The following recommendations apply:
• Keep backup copies of the startup configuration for all switches in the fabric.
• Upload the configuration backup copies to an external host or to an attached Brocade-branded USB
device.
• Avoid copying configuration files from one switch to another. Instead restore the switch configuration
files from the backup copy.
Uploading the startup configuration to an external host
Enter the copy startup-config destination_file command in privileged EXEC mode.
In the following example, the startup configuration is copied to a file on a remote server by means of
FTP.
switch# copy startup-config ftp://admin:******@122.34.98.133//archive/startup-config_vdx24-08_20101010
Backing up the startup configuration to a USB device
When you make a backup copy of a configuration file on an attached USB device, the destination file is
the file URL on the USB device. You do not need to specify the target directory. The file is automatically
recognized as a configuration file and stored in the default configuration directory.
1. Enable the USB device.
switch# usb on
USB storage enabled
2. Enter the copy startup-config destination_file command in privileged EXEC mode.
switch# copy startup-config usb://startup-config_vdx24-08_20101010
Configuration restoration
Restoring a configuration involves overwriting a given configuration file on the switch by downloading an
archived backup copy from an external host or from an attached USB device.
A typical scenario for configuration restoration is:
• Restoring the default configuration on page 88.
All interfaces remain online. The following parameters are unaffected:
• Interface management IP address
• Software feature licenses installed on the switch
• Virtual IP address
NOTE
Configuration files that were created using Brocade Network OS 2.x should not be loaded onto a
system running Brocade Network OS 3.x or later. The ACL and VLAN configuration information has
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
87
Restoring the default configuration
changed in Brocade Network OS 3.x or later, and the affected lines of configuration are skipped when
loading a Brocade Network OS 2.x configuration file.
Restoring the default configuration
This restoration procedure resets the configuration to the factory defaults. The default configuration
files are always present on the switch and can be restored with the copy command.
To restore the default configuration, perform the following procedure in privileged EXEC mode.
1. Enter the copy source_file destination_file command to overwrite the startup configuration with the
default configuration.
switch# copy
default-config startup-config
2. Confirm that you want to make the change by entering Y when prompted.
This operation will modify your startup configuration. Do you want to continue?
[Y/N]: y
3. Reboot the switch.
switch# reload system
Managing configurations on a modular chassis
NOTE
When the switch is in logical chassis cluster mode, the running-config file is saved automatically and
does not need to be copied. There is no startup configuration for logical chassis cluster mode;
therefore, the information about startup configuration does not apply to logical chassis cluster mode.
The configuration data on a modular chassis are managed in a distributed fashion. The Brocade VDX
8770-4 and VDX 8770-8 chassis maintain two types of configuration data, global configuration
parameters and slot configuration parameters. The global configuration, such as the VLAN
configuration, applies to the entire chassis. The slot configuration includes specific parameters that
apply only to the line cards.
The startup configuration is maintained at the chassis level and includes both chassis-wide and slotspecific configuration parameters.
Managing configurations on line cards
When an line card (interface module) boots up in a slot which was never occupied previously or is not
configured, the module type is automatically saved in the configuration database. The type
configuration associated with a given slot persists in the database even after the line card is physically
removed, powered off, or faulted. This mechanism ensures that all configuration data associated with
a given slot is automatically preserved across reboots or hot swaps with the same type of line card.
If you insert an line card in a slot that was previously occupied by a module of a different type, the line
card will be faulted with a "type mismatch" error. Before you replace an line card with a different type,
you must clear the existing type configuration from the database. Refer to Replacing a line card on
page 65 for more information.
88
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Managing configurations across redundant management modules
NOTE
The line card configuration is non-persistent. You must issue the copy running-config startup-config
command after the line card comes online. Otherwise, all configuration data associated with the slot
along with line module type will be lost after a chassis reboot.
Managing configurations across redundant management modules
In modular switches with redundant management modules, the VCS configuration, the startup
configuration, and the startup database are synchronized and shared between the two management
modules. The initial configuration synchronization occurs when the system boots up. After the initial
synchronization has been completed successfully, synchronization can be triggered during the following
events:
• When a failover occurs from the active management module to the standby management module.
Unsaved configuration changes made on the active management module are lost after a failover.
Issue the copy running-config startup-config command on the active management module to
preserve the running configuration across a management module failover.
• When you insert a standby management module into a chassis after the active management module
is already fully initialized.
• When you change the startup configuration by issuing the copy running-config startup-config
command on the active management module.
• When you restore the default configuration by issuing the copy default-config startup-config
command on the active management module.
• When you change the VCS configuration (VCS mode, RBridge ID, or VCS ID), the configuration
change is synchronized with the standby management module and saved persistently. This event
triggers a chassis reboot after the synchronization is complete.
• When you initiate a firmware download. Refer to Configuration Management on page 83 for more
information.
Managing configurations in Brocade VCS Fabric mode
With the exception of a few parameters, configuration changes you make to a single switch in a
Brocade VCS Fabric are not automatically distributed. When configuring Ethernet fabric parameters and
software features on multiple switches, you must configure each switch individually. To simplify the
procedure, you can upload a configuration file from one switch and download it to the other switches in
the fabric, provided the switches are of the same type.
NOTE
The switches must be of the same model to share a configuration file. For example, downloading a
configuration file from a Brocade VDX 6740-48 to a Brocade VDX 6740-64 or to a switch with a different
firmware version may cause the switch to misapply the configuration and lead to unpredictable
behavior.
To determine the switch type, issue the show system command. To map the switch type to the
Brocade switch model name, refer to Switch types on page 36.
If you need to reset affected switches, restore the default configuration as described in Restoring the
default configuration on page 88.
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
89
Automatic distribution of configuration parameters
Automatic distribution of configuration parameters
A few configuration parameters are fabric-wide in fabric cluster mode. This means they are
automatically distributed to all switches in a VCS fabric when you configure one or more of these
parameters on a single RBridge that is part of a VCS fabric. These parameters include the following:
• Zoning configuration
• vCenter parameters
• Virtual IP address
NOTE
In logical chassis cluster mode, all configuration is automatically distributed.
The show running configuration command displays the same configuration for these features on all
RBridges in the VCS fabric. Copy operations from any RBridge include all fabric-wide configuration
parameters.
Downloading a configuration to multiple switches
NOTE
This section does not apply to logical chassis cluster mode because, in that mode, configuration is
automatically distributed.
1. Configure one switch.
2. Copy the running configuration to the startup configuration as described in Saving the running
configuration on page 86.
3. Upload the configuration to an external host (Uploading the startup configuration to an external host
on page 87) or to an attached USB device as described in Backing up the startup configuration to a
USB device on page 87.
4. Download the configuration file to each of the target switches. Refer to Configuration restoration on
page 87 for more information.
Rejoining an offline node to a logical chassis cluster
If a node goes into offline state, and configuration changes are made to online nodes while the cluster
is in a degraded state, database mismatches can occur when the offline node tries to rejoin the
cluster.
Situations that can cause a node to go offline include:
• ISLs are shutdown, isolating a node from the fabric and cluster.
• A node reboots.
The following list describes possible scenarios that can occur when an offline node tries to rejoin its
cluster, and what actions, if any, you must take. For more information about commands that are
referenced, refer to the Network OS Command Reference.
• If local-only configurations have been added, updated, or deleted for online nodes after another
node has temporarily left the cluster, the offline node automatically rejoins the cluster. Any nondefault configurations specific to the rejoining node are then pushed back to the cluster
configuration. If the rejoining node has the default configuration, and if no local-only configuration
90
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Using default configuration in logical chassis cluster to avoid segmentation issues
changes were made while this node was offline, then the cluster's configuration for the rejoining node
is pushed onto the rejoining node.
• If the offline node has local-only configuration changes and its global configuration is non-default and
matches the global configuration of the cluster, then the offline node is allowed to rejoin the cluster.
The local-only configuration changes that were made while the node was offline are preserved.
• If global configurations have been added, updated, or deleted after another node has temporarily left
the cluster, the global configuration differences between the cluster and the rejoining node result in a
configuration database mismatch and node segmentation. To rejoin the cluster, issue the copy
default-config startup-config on the segmented node.
• If the rejoining node's global configuration is the default configuration, and both of the following are
true: 1) local-only configuration changes have been made to the rejoining node while it was offline,
and 2) the cluster contains a different set of local configurations for the rejoining node, then a
configuration database mismatch occurs. This situation can occur if the user issues a copy default
to start command on a segmented node and issues local-only configurations on the segmented
node before it rejoins the cluster. To rejoin the cluster, issue the copy default to startup command
on the segmented node or cluster island.
The following table lists commands that change a local configuration for a node but also affect the
global configuration. If these commands are run on online nodes in the cluster, be aware that global
configuration in the cluster will also change.
TABLE 12 Local-configuration commands that affect global configuration
Command (Local Configuration)
Description
flexport <RBridge-ID/slot/port>, followed by the type fibre- Done in Hardware configuration mode, this command,
channel command from the flexport rbridge-id/slot/port
which converts an Ethernet interface to a Fibreprompt, changes the global configuration.
Channel interface, can cause global configuration
changes because the Ethernet interface affects
L2Sys, SPAN, IGMPs, and MLD configuration
settings.
vrf <name>
Done in RBridge-ID configuration mode, the creation
of a VRF on an RBridge is a local-only VRF
configuration exception and also changes the global
configuration.
Using default configuration in logical chassis cluster to avoid
segmentation issues
Using a command called default-config enable allows a node to rejoin a logical chassis cluster by
obtaining the configuration of the principal node in the cluster.
Enabling this feature can eliminate the following segmentation issues:
• A node rebooting while a global configuration change could not be applied.
• ISL connectivity to the primary node going down while configuration is in progress.
Brocade recommends not enabling this feature on every node (especially on core nodes) in the cluster.
The following restrictions apply:
• This command cannot be used on the principal node of the logical chassis cluster.
• Principal priority cannot be set on a node which has this feature enabled.
For information on how to use this command, refer to the default-config enable command in the
Network OS Command Reference.
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
91
Managing flash files
Managing flash files
Brocade Network OS provides a set of tools for removing, renaming, and displaying files you create in
the switch flash memory. You can use the display commands with any file, including the system
configuration files. The rename and delete commands only apply to copies of configuration files you
create in the flash memory. You cannot rename or delete any of the system configuration files.
Listing the contents of the flash memory
To list the contents of the flash memory, enter the dir command in privileged EXEC mode.
switch# dir
drwxr-xr-x
drwxr-xr-x
-rwxr-xr-x
-rwxr-xr-x
-rw-r--r--
2
3
1
1
1
root
root
root
root
root
sys
root
sys
sys
root
4096
4096
417
697
6800
Feb
Jan
Oct
Oct
Feb
13 00:39 .
1 1970 ..
12 2010 defaultconfig.novcs
12 2010 defaultconfig.vcs
13 00:37 startup-config
Deleting a file from the flash memory
To delete a file from the flash memory, enter the delete file command in privileged EXEC mode.
switch# delete myconfig
Renaming a flash memory file
To rename a file in the flash memory, enter the rename source_file destination_file command in
privileged EXEC mode.
switch# rename myconfig myconfig_20101010
Viewing the contents of a file in the flash memory
To investigate the contents of a file in the flash memory, enter the show file file command in privileged
EXEC mode.
switch# show file defaultconfig.novcs
!
no protocol spanning-tree
!
vlan dot1q tag native
!
cee-map default
remap fabric-priority priority 0
remap lossless-priority priority 0
priority-group-table 1 weight 40 pfc on
priority-group-table 2 weight 60 pfc off
priority-group-table 15.0 pfc off
priority-table 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 15.0
!
interface Vlan 1
shutdown
!
port-profile default
vlan-profile
switchport
switchport mode trunk
switchport trunk allowed vlan all
!
protocol lldp
!
92
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Configuration Management
end
!
NOTE
To display the contents of the running configuration, use the show running-config command. To
display the contents of the startup configuration, use the show startup-config command.
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
93
Viewing the contents of a file in the flash memory
94
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Configuring SNMP
● Simple Network Management Protocol overview............................................................95
● SNMP configuration...................................................................................................... 101
Simple Network Management Protocol overview
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is a set of protocols for managing complex networks.
SNMP protocols are application layer protocols. Using SNMP, devices within a network send
messages, called protocol data units (PDUs), to different parts of a network. Network management
using SNMP requires three components:
• SNMP Manager
• SNMP Agent
• Management Information Base (MIB)
SNMP Manager
The SNMP Manager can communicate to the devices within a network using the SNMP protocol.
Typically, SNMP Managers are network management systems (NMS) that manage networks by
monitoring the network parameters, and optionally, setting parameters in managed devices. Normally,
the SNMP Manager sends read requests to the devices that host the SNMP Agent, to which the SNMP
Agent responds with the requested data. In some cases, the managed devices can initiate the
communication, and send data to the SNMP Manager using asynchronous events called traps.
SNMP Agent
The SNMP agent is a software that resides in the managed devices in the network, and collects data
from these devices. Each device hosts an SNMP Agent. The SNMP Agent stores the data, and sends
these when requested by an SNMP Manager. In addition, the Agent can asynchronously alert the
SNMP Manager about events, by using special PDUs called traps.
Management Information Base (MIB)
SNMP Agents in the managed devices store the data about these devices in a database called
Management Information Base (MIB). The MIB is a hierarchical database, which is structured on the
standard specified in the RFC 2578 [Structure of Management Information Version 2 (SMIv2)].
The MIB is a database of objects that can be used by a network management system to manage and
monitor devices on the network. The MIB can be retrieved by a network management system that uses
SNMP. The MIB structure determines the scope of management access allowed by a device. By using
SNMP, a manager application can issue read or write operations within the scope of the MIB.
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
95
Basic SNMP operation
Basic SNMP operation
Every Brocade device carries an agent and management information base (MIB), as shown in the next
figure. The agent accesses information about a device and makes it available to an SNMP network
management station.
FIGURE 16 SNMP structure
When active, the management station can "get" information or "set" information when it queries an
agent. SNMP commands, such as get , set, getnext, and getresponse, are sent from the
management station, and the agent replies once the value is obtained or modified as shown in the
next figure. Agents use variables to report such data as the number of bytes and packets in and out of
the device, or the number of broadcast messages sent and received. These variables are also known
as managed objects. All managed objects are contained in the MIB.
FIGURE 17 SNMP query
The management station can also receive traps, unsolicited messages from the switch agent if an
unusual event occurs as shown in the next figure.
FIGURE 18 SNMP trap
The agent can receive queries from one or more management stations and can send traps to up to six
management stations.
Understanding MIBs
The management information base (MIB) is a database of monitored and managed information on a
device, in this case a Brocade switch. The MIB structure can be represented by a tree hierarchy. The
root splits into three main branches: International Organization for Standardization (ISO), Consultative
Committee for International Telegraph and Telephone (CCITT), and joint ISO/CCITT. These branches
have short text strings and integers (OIDs) to identify them. Text strings describe object names, while
integers allow software to create compact, encoded representations of the names.
96
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Brocade MIB structure
Brocade MIB structure
Each MIB variable is assigned an object identifier (OID). The OID is the sequence of numeric labels on
the nodes along a path from the root to the object. For example, as shown in the figure below, the Entity
MIB OID is:
1.3.6.1.2.1.47
The corresponding name is:
iso.org.dod.internet.mgmt.mib-2.entityMIB
The other branches are part of the standard MIBs, and the portions relevant to configuring SNMP on a
Brocade switch are referenced in the remainder of this chapter.
FIGURE 19 Brocade MIB tree location
Access to MIB variables
You can use a MIB browser to access the MIB variables: all MIB browsers perform queries and load
MIBs.
Once loaded, MAX-ACCESS provides access levels between the agent and management station. The
access levels are described in the following table.
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
97
Brocade MIBs
TABLE 13 MIB access levels
Access level
Description
not accessible
You cannot read or write to this variable.
read create
Specifies a tabular object that can be read, modified, or created as a new row in a
table.
read only - Public
You can only monitor information.
read-write - Private
You can read or modify this variable.
accessible-to-notify
You can read this information only through traps.
Brocade MIBs
The Brocade MIB is a set of variables that are private extensions to the Internet standard MIB-II. The
Brocade agents support many other Internet-standard MIBs. These standard MIBs are defined in RFC
publications. To find specific MIB information, examine the Brocade proprietary MIB structure and the
standard RFC MIBs supported by Brocade.
Brocade MIB files
The Brocade MIB files are as follows:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
BRCD_NOS_PRODUCTS.mib
BROCADE-PRODUCTS-MIB.mib
BROCADE-REG-MIB.mib
BRCD_TC.mib
SWBase.mib
Resource.mib
System.mib
FA.mib
HA.mib
FOUNDRY-SN-NOTIFICATION.mib
Agent Capability MIBs
In SNMP, capability MIBs provide the implementation details for the associated MIBs. These MIBs,
called AGENT-CAPABILITY MIBs, list supported conformance groups and any deviations from the
MIBs as implemented in the associated software version. The following table lists the Brocade
supported capability MIBs.
TABLE 14 Agent Capabilities
98
Capability MIBs
Description
BROCADE-IEEE8021-PAE-CAPABILITY-MIB
Provides the implementation details for the IEEE8021PAE-MIB
BROCADE-IEEE8023-LAG-CAPABILITY-MIB
Provides the implementation details for the IEEE8023LAG-MIB
BROCADE-LLDP-CAPABILITY-MIB
Provides the implementation details for the LLDP-MIB
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Standard MIBs
TABLE 14 Agent Capabilities (Continued)
Capability MIBs
Description
BROCADE-LLDP-EXT-DOT3-CAPABILITY-MIB
Provides the implementation details for the LLDP-EXTDOT3-MIB
Standard MIBs
Standard MIBs are not distributed through Brocade. You can download the following MIBs from http://
www.oidview.com/:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
IF-MIB
LLDP-MIB
BRIDGE-MIB
LLDP-EXT-DOT3-MIB
LLDP-EXT-DOT1-MIB
RSTP-MIB
RFC1213-MIB
IEEE8023-LAG-MIB
Q-BRIDGE-MIB
IEEE8021-PAE-MIB
P-BRIDGE-MIB
RMON-MIB
SFlow-MIB
ENTITY-MIB
IP-FORWARD-MIB
IP-MIB
OSPF-MIB
BGP4-MIB
TCP-MIB
UDP-MIB
HOST-RESOURCE-MIB
INET-ADDRESS-MIB
IANAifType-MIB
IANA-RTPROTO-MIB
SNMPv2-PDU
SNMPv2-TM
SNMP-FRAMEWORK-MIB
IANA-ADDRESS-FAMILY-NUMBERS-MIB
FC-MGMT-MIB
SNMP-COMMUNITY-MIB
SNMP-MPD-MIB
SNMP-TARGET-MIB
SNMP-VIEW-BASED-ACM-MIB
SNMP-NOTIFICATION-MIB
SNMP-USER-BASED-SM-MIB
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
99
MIB loading order
MIB loading order
Many MIBs use definitions that are defined in other MIBs. These definitions are listed in the IMPORTS
section near the top of the MIB. When loading the Brocade MIBs, refer to the following table to ensure
that any MIB dependencies are loading in the correct order.
NOTE
Before loading the Brocade MIB files, ensure that you have the correct version of SNMP for the
Brocade Network OS. All versions of Network OS support SNMPv1, SNMPv2c, and SNMPv3.
SNMPv2c informs are not supported.
TABLE 15 Brocade SNMP MIB dependencies
MIB Name
Dependencies
Brocade-REG-MIB
RFC1155-SMI
Brocade-TC
Brocade-REG-MIB
SNMPv2-TC
SNMPv2-SMI
BRCD_NOS_PRODUCTS.mib
SNMPv2-SMI
Brocade-REG-MIB
BROCADE-PRODUCTS-MIB.mib
SNMPv2-SMI
Brocade-REG-MIB
SWBase.mib
SNMPv2-TC
SNMPv2-SMI
Brocade-REG-MIB
Resource.mib
SNMPv2-TC
SNMPv2-SMI
SWBASE-MIB
System.mib
SNMPv2-TC
Brocade-TC
SWBASE-MIB
FA.mib
RFC1155-SMI
RFC-1212
RFC1213-MIB
RFC-1215
100
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
SNMP configuration
TABLE 15 Brocade SNMP MIB dependencies (Continued)
MIB Name
Dependencies
HA-mib
SNMPv2-SMI
Brocade-REG-MIB
SW-MIB
ENTITY-MIB
SNMPv2-TC
FOUNDRY-SN-NOTIFICATION.mib SNMPv2-SMI
FOUNDRY-SN-ROOT-MIB
IF-MIB
DOT3-OAM-MIB
FOUNDRY-SN-SWITCH-GROUP-MIB
FOUNDRY-SN-AGENT-MIB
FOUNDRY-SN-SWITCH-GROUP-MIB
FOUNDRY-SN-SW-L4-SWITCH-GROUP-MIB
FOUNDRY-SN-WIRELESS-GROUP-MIB
FOUNDRY-SN-OSPF-GROUP-MIB
IEEE8021-CFM-MIB
SNMP configuration
The following sections discuss configuring the Simple Network Management Protocol on Brocade
devices. This includes configuring SNMP community strings, SNMP server hosts, SNMP server
contexts, password encryption for SNMPv3 users, and displaying SNMP configurations.
ATTENTION
The SNMP default configurations, such as community string, user name, community, group, view
configuration, and so on, have been removed, because of a security risk. The show running-config
snmp-server command displays only system parameters during startup. You can configure the
appropriate SNMP attributes by using a variety of snmp-server commands. (This does not apply to the
Brocade VDX 2740, as that switch displays both system and user SNMP configurations.)
Note the following:
• After an upgrade to Network OS6.0.0, the default SNMP configuration from previous releases is
removed only if the copy default-config startup-config command is issued before the upgrade.
Otherwise, the running configuration is not changed.
• There is no change in the behavior of the upgrade from the running configuration to the startup
configuration.
• Following a netinstall to Network OS6.0.0 or a reboot when the default configuration is copied to the
startup configuration, the following SNMP configuration appears, with previous default configurations
removed:
device#show running-config snmp-server
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
101
Configuring SNMP community strings
snmp-server
snmp-server
snmp-server
snmp-server
contact "Field Support."
location "End User Premise."
sys-descr "Brocade VDX Switch."
enable trap
Configuring SNMP community strings
SNMP versions 1 and 2c use community strings to restrict access to the switch. There is support for a
total of 256 SNMP communities.
Adding an SNMP community string
The snmp-server community command sets the community string and associates it with the userdefined group to restrict the access of MIBs for SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 requests. You execute this
command in global configuration mode.
1. Enter the configure command.
2. Enter the snmp-server community string [groupname group-name] command.
switch(config)# snmp-server community public groupname user
When creating a new community string without specifying a group name, there is no group name
associated with the community string. You must associate the community string with any
nonexisting or existing group name to be able to contact the switch using SNMPv1/v2c.
NOTE
The maximum number of community strings supported is 256.
Removing an SNMP community string
This example removes the community string "public" and its associated group name "user".
1. Enter the configure command.
2. Enter the no snmp-server community string command.
switch(config)# no snmp-server community public
Configuring SNMP server hosts
The snmp-server host command sets the trap destination IP addresses, SNMP version, community
string for SNMPv1and SNMPv2c, the destination port for the SNMP server host, and the severity level.
To configure SNMP trap hosts associated with community strings, you must create the community
string using the snmp-server community command before configuring the host.
The SNMP agent supports six trap-recipient severity levels. The default value for each attribute is as
follows: host = 0.0.0.0; udp-port = 162; severity-level = none. The length of the community string must
be from 2 through 16 characters.
Setting the SNMP server host
You can execute SNMP server commands in global configuration mode.
1. Enter the configure command.
2. Enter the snmp-server host ipv4_host | ipv6_host | dns_host community-string [version { 1 |
2c }] [ udp-port port ] [severity-level | none | debug | info | warning | error | critical ] command.
102
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Removing the SNMP server host
• The ipv4_host | ipv6_host | dns_host variable specifies the IP address of the host.
• The community-string variable sets the community string.
• The version option specifies either SNMPv1- or SNMPv2c-related configuration parameters.
These parameters include the community string. The default SNMP version is 1.
• The udp-port port option specifies the UDP port where SNMP traps will be received. The default
port is 162. The acceptable range of ports is from 0 through 65535.
• The severity sev_level option provides the ability to filter traps based on severity level on both the
host and the v3host. Only RASLog (swEvent) traps can be filtered based on severity level. If the
severity level of None is specified, all traps are filtered and no RASLog traps are received. If the
severity level of Critical is specified, no traps are filtered and all traps are received by the host.
Severity level options include None, Debug, Info, Warning, Error, and Critical.
The following example sets up "commaccess" as a read-only community string and sets 10.32.147.6
as a trap recipient with SNMPv2c on target port 162.
switch(config)# snmp-server host 10.32.147.6 commaccess version 2c udp-port 162
severity warning
Removing the SNMP server host
The no snmp-server host host community-string string version 2c command brings version 2c down
to version 1.
The no snmp-server host host community-string string command or the no snmp-server v3host
host command removes the SNMP server host from the switch configuration altogether.
Configuring the SNMP system group
The following tasks allow you to configure the system contact and system location objects for the SNMP
system group.
Setting the SNMP server contact
Use the snmp-server contact command to set the SNMP server contact string. The default contact
string is "Field Support." The number of characters allowed is from 4 through 255.
1. Enter the configure command.
2. Enter the snmp-server contact string command.
switch(config)# snmp-server contact "Operator 12345"
The example changes the default contact string to "Operator 12345." You must enclose the text in
double quotes if the text contains spaces.
Removing the SNMP server contact
The no snmp-server contact string command restores the default contact information (Field Support).
Setting the SNMP server location
Use the snmp-server location command to set the SNMP server location string. The default SNMP
server location string is "End User Premise." The number of characters allowed is from 4 through 255.
1. Enter the configure command.
2. Enter the snmp-server location string command.
switch(config)# snmp-server location "Building 3 Room 214"
3. Enter the no snmp-server location command to remove the location.
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
103
Setting the SNMP server description
The example changes the default location string to "Building 3 Room 214." You must enclose the
text in double quotes if the text contains spaces.
Setting the SNMP server description
Use the snmp-server sys-descr command to set the SNMP server description string. The default
SNMP server description string is "Brocade-VDX-VCS <vcsid>." The number of characters allowed is
from 4 through 255.
1. Enter the configure command.
2. Enter the snmp-server sys-descr string command.
switch(config)# snmp-server sys-descr "Brocade-VDX Test Bed"
3. Enter the no snmp-server sys-descr command to remove the location.
The example changes the default location string to "Brocade-VDX Test Bed." You must enclose the
text in double quotes if the text contains spaces.
Configuring multiple SNMP server contexts
A single SNMP agent can be supported by the multiple instances of the same MIB module by mapping
the context name to a virtual routing and forwarding (VRF) instance as described below. The SNMP
agent supports 256 contexts to support context-to-VRF mapping. Do the following to set the SNMP
server context, using the snmp-server context command to map a context to the name of a VRF
instance.
1. Enter the configure command.
2. Enter the snmp-server context context_name vrf-name vrf_name command.
switch(config)# snmp-server context mycontext vrf-name myvrf
The example maps the context name "mycontext" to the VRF name "myvrf."
Configuring SNMP server views
SNMP views are named groups of MIB objects that can be associated with user accounts to allow
limited access for viewing and modification of SNMP statistics and system configuration.
1. Enter the configure command.
2. Enter the snmp-server view view-name mib_tree {included | excluded} command.
switch(config)# snmp-server view view1 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 excluded
Enter the no form of the command to remove the configured SNMP server view entry.
NOTE
The maximum number of views supported with MIB tree entries is 10.
104
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Configuring SNMP server groups
Configuring SNMP server groups
SNMP groups map the SNMP user for the version v3 and the community for the versions v1 and v2c to
SNMP views. Each SNMP group can be configured with a read view, a write view, a notify view, or all of
the above.
1. Enter the configure command.
2. Enter the snmp-server group groupname {v1 | v2c | v3 {auth | noauth | priv}} [read viewname]
[write viewname] [notify viewname] command.
switch(config)# snmp-server group group1 v3 auth read myview write myview notify
myview
Enter the no form of the command to remove the configured SNMP server group.
NOTE
The maximum number of SNMP groups supported is 10.
Configuring SNMP server users
The snmp-server user command configures a SNMPv3 user and allows the configured user to be
associated with user-defined SNMP groups. You execute this command in global configuration mode
and RBridge ID configuration mode.
1. Enter the configure command.
2. Enter the snmp-server user user-name [groupname groupname] [auth] [md5 | sha] [authpassword password-string] [encrypted] [priv] [DES | AES128] [priv-password password-string]
[encrypted] command.
switch(config)# snmp-server user user1 groupname group1
switch(config)# snmp-server user user2 groupname group1 auth md5 auth-password
password priv DES priv-password
This example configures the SNMPv3 users "user1" and "user2" associated with used-defined group
"group1" under global configuration mode.
switch(config-rbridge-id-1)# snmp-server user snmpadmin1 groupname snmpadmin auth
sha auth-password private123 priv DES priv-password public123
This example configures the SNMPv3 user under RBridge ID configuration mode. Enter the no form
of the command to remove the configured SNMP server user.
When creating a new SNMPv3 user without groupname option, by default there is no group name
mapped with the SNMPv3 user. You must map the configured SNMPv3 user with a group name
available in the group CLI configuration to contact the switch through SNMPv3.
The behavior of this command in RBridge ID configuration mode is same as in global configuration
mode. If the user name is configured to be the same in both global and RBridge ID configurations,
the RBridge ID configuration takes precedence. The encrypted password generated in global
configuration mode can be used for another global user to modify the passwords. The encrypted
passwords generated in global configurations cannot be used in RBridge ID configurations, and vice
versa.
NOTE
The maximum number of SNMP users that can be configured is 10 in both global and RBridge ID
configurations.
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
105
Configuring password encryption for SNMPv3 users
Configuring password encryption for SNMPv3 users
For SNMPv3 users, the passwords for auth-password and priv-password are encrypted. You can
configure either with a plain-text password or an encrypted password. In both cases, the passwords
are shown in the show running-config command as encrypted.
The following example shows a plain-text password configuration:
switch(config)# snmp-server user snmpadmin1 auth md5 auth-password private123 priv
DES priv-password public123
The following example shows an encrypted password configuration:
switch(config)# snmp-server user snmpadmin2 groupname snmpadmin auth md5
authpassword "MVb+360X3kcfBzug5Vo6dQ==\n" priv DES priv-password
"ckJFoHbzVvhR0xFRPjsMTA== \n" encrypted
NOTE
This command may not be successful where encrypted passwords are generated by third-party or
open-source tools.
Configuring SNMP server v3hosts
The snmp-server v3host command configures a SNMPv3 host by associating with the SNMP users.
You execute this command in global configuration mode and RBridge ID configuration mode.
1. Enter the configure command.
2. Enter the snmp-server v3host [host { ipv4_host | ipv6_host | dns_host}] user_name[notifytype
{traps | informs}] engineid engine-id udp-port port_number [severity-level | {none | debug | info
| warning | error | critical}] command.
switch(config)# snmp-server v3host 1050::5:600:300c:326b snmpadmin2 severitylevel Info
This example configures the SNMPv3 trap IPv6 host 1050:0:0:0:5:600:300c:326b associated with
SNMP user "snmpadmin2" under global configuration mode.
switch(config-rbridge-id-1)# snmp-server v3host 10.26.3.166 snmpuser2 severitylevel Info udp-port 4425
This example configures the SNMPv3 trap host 10.26.3.166 associated with SNMP user
"snmpuser2" under RBridge ID configuration mode.
The global SNMPv3 host can be configured by associating with only global SNMPv3 users and the
local SNMPv3 host can be configured by associating with only local SNMPv3 users. You cannot
create a SNMPv3 host in global configuration by associating with the local SNMPv3 users and vice
versa.
Displaying SNMP configurations
Use the show running-config snmp-server command to display the current SNMP configurations for
the SNMP host, community string, contact, and location, as well as other SNMP configuration options
such as SNMPv3 host address, context, and VRF mapping. There are no default configurations for
this command. This command can be executed only in privileged EXEC command mode.
Enter the show running-config snmp-server command.
switch# show running-config snmp-server
snmp-server contact "Field Support."
snmp-server location "End User Premise."
snmp-server sys-descr "Brocade VDX Switch."
snmp-server community ConvergedNetwork
snmp-server community OrigEquipMfr rw
106
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Configuring SNMP
snmp-server
snmp-server
snmp-server
snmp-server
snmp-server
snmp-server
snmp-server
snmp-server
snmp-server
snmp-server
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
community "Secret C0de" rw
community common
community private rw
community public
user snmpadmin1 groupname snmpadmin
user snmpadmin2 groupname snmpadmin
user snmpadmin3 groupname snmpadmin
user snmpuser1
user snmpuser2
user snmpuser3
107
Displaying SNMP configurations
108
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Configuring Brocade VCS Fabrics
● Fabric overview............................................................................................................. 109
● Configuring a Brocade VCS Fabric............................................................................... 112
Fabric overview
The Brocade VCS Fabric Ethernet fabric is defined as a group of switches that exchange information
between each other to implement distributed intelligence. The Brocade Ethernet fabric uses
Transparent Interconnection of Lots of Links (TRILL) protocol, designed for the sole purpose of scaling
Ethernet networks by allowing a set of devices, called routing bridges (RBridges), to connect with each
other.
A link state dynamic routing protocol, rather than Spanning Tree Protocol, determines how the traffic is
forwarded between the inter-connected RBridges. Link state routing in Brocade VCS Fabric-based
TRILL networks is performed using Fabric Shortest Path First (FSPF) protocol.
TRILL enables Layer 2 networks to behave like routed Layer 3/IP networks. TRILL also defines native
support for forwarding both unicast and multicast traffic, and therefore unifies support for both of these
different classes of applications over a single transport.
Brocade VCS Fabric formation
Brocade VCS Fabric technology uses RBridge identifiers (IDs) to discover fabric creation problems,
such as duplicate IDs. The RBridge ID of a cluster unit is equal to the domain ID of an FC switch.
RBridge ID assignment is implemented by leveraging the domain ID assignment protocols in the FC
SANs. Request for Domain ID (RDI) and Domain ID Assignment (DIA) protocols ensure that a single
switch (the principal switch) is centrally allocating the domain IDs for every RBridge in the fabric and
detecting any domain ID conflicts in the fabric. In case of conflict, the conflicting node is segmented
from the fabric. You must take action to resolve the conflict
NOTE
Network OS 5.0.1 and later support a maximum of 48 RBridges in a single Brocade VCS Fabric,
depending on the hardware mix. However, Brocade recommends using only 24 RBridges per fabric.
The following sequence of events describes the Brocade VCS Fabric formation process:
• Each Brocade VCS Fabric is identified by a VCS ID.
• All Brocade VCS Fabric-capable switches are configured with a factory default VCS ID of 1.
• The switch software searches for the value for the "VCS enable" attribute setting and verifies it is set
to "enabled".
• Assuming the switch is Brocade VCS Fabric-enabled, the switch software invokes a series of
protocols:
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
109
How RBridges work
‐
Brocade Link Discovery Protocol (BLDP) attempts to discover if a Brocade VCS Fabriccapable switch is connected to any of the edge ports. Refer to Neighbor discovery on page
110 for more information.
‐
BLDP attempts to merge the adjacent Brocade switch into the Brocade VCS Fabric
environment at the link level.
• A series of FC fabric formation protocols (RDI, DIA, and FSPF) are initiated once a link level
relationship has been established between two neighbor switches. Refer to Fabric formation on
page 111 for more information.
• The "Merge and Join" protocol invokes a merge of switch configuration between the cluster units
once the fabric has successfully formed.
How RBridges work
RBridges find each other by exchanging FSPF Hello frames. Like all TRILL IS-IS frames, Hello frames
are transparently forwarded by RBridges and are processed by RBridge Inter-Switch Link (ISL) ports.
Using the information exchanged in the Hello frames, the RBridges on each link elect the designated
RBridge for that link.
The RBridge link state includes information such as VLAN connectivity, multicast listeners, and
multicast router attachment, claimed nicknames, and supported ingress-to-egress options. The
designated RBridge specifies the appointed forwarder for each VLAN on the link (which could be itself)
and the designated VLAN for inter-RBridge communication. The appointed forwarder handles native
frames to and from that link in that VLAN.
The Ingress RBridge function encapsulates frames from the link into a TRILL data frame. The Egress
RBridge function decapsulates native frames destined for the link from the TRILL data frames. TRILL
data frames with known unicast destinations are forwarded by RBridge next hop. Multi-destination
frames (broadcast, unknown unicast, and multicast) are forwarded on a tree rooted at the multicast
root RBridge.
• Unicast forwarding is handled by combining domain routing generated by FSPF and MAC-toRBridge learning generated by MAC learning and a distributed MAC database.
• Multicast forwarding usually uses one tree that is rooted at the RBridge with the lowest RBridge ID.
However, there are several rules for Multicast root tree selection. It is not always the lowest RBridge
ID.
If a duplicated RBridge ID is found while the links are still coming up, the links are segmented. Both
sides recognize the error and segment the link. If the RBridge ID overlap cannot be found at ISL link
bringup time (in the case where a new switch is brought from an offline state into the fabric) it will be
found during the fabric build and the conflicting switch is isolated.
An RBridge requests a specific RBridge ID from the coordinator switch. If the coordinator switch
detects that this RBridge ID is already used, it returns the next unused RBridge ID. The requesting
RBridge is not allowed to take another RBridge ID and it segments itself from the fabric. In this case,
you cannot boot the ISLs. The ISLs have to be explicitly disabled and then enabled again in order for
the RBridge with the overlapping RBridge ID to be removed.
Neighbor discovery
Brocade VCS Fabric-capable neighbor discovery involves the following steps:
• Discover whether the neighbor is a Brocade switch.
• Discover whether the Brocade neighbor switch is Brocade VCS Fabric-capable.
Only Brocade VCS Fabric-capable switches with the same VCS ID can form a virtual cluster switch.
The default settings for Brocade Network OS switches are Brocade VCS Fabric capable and a VCS ID
of "1."
110
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Brocade trunks
Brocade trunks
Network OS 4.0.0 and later supports Brocade trunks (hardware-based link aggregation groups, or
LAGs). These LAGs are dynamically formed between two adjacent switches. The trunk formation is
controlled by the same Fibre Channel Trunking protocol that controls the trunk formation on FC
switches. As such, it does not require user intervention or configuration except enabling or disabling,
which instructs the switch software to form a trunk at the global level or not. All ISL ports connected to
the same neighbor Brocade switch will attempt to form a trunk. Refer to Enabling a fabric trunk on page
115 for instructions.
Ports groups have been established on supported standalone switches and on line cards in chassis
systems for trunking. For a successful trunk formation, all ports on the local switch must be part of the
same port group and must be configured at the same speed. Following are the number of ports allowed
per trunk from port groups in supported platforms. For details on how port groups are arranged on these
platforms, refer to the switch or chassis system Hardware Reference Manual.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
VDX 8770 switches - up to six port groups of eight ports each per blade (1 , 10, or 40 GbE)
VDX 6740 switches - up to 16 ports per trunk.
VDX 6940-36Q switches - up to three ports per trunk
VDX 2740 - up to 16 ports per trunk.
48x10 GbE line card - up to eight ports per trunk.
48x10G-T line card - up to 16 ports per trunk.
12x40 GbE line card - up to two 40-GbE ports are allowed per trunk, and these ports must be
configured in breakout mode.
• 27x40 GbE line card - up to two 40-GbE ports are allowed per trunk, and these ports must be
configured in breakout mode. Note that breakout mode is only allowed on the first two ports in port
groups that are configured in Performance operating mode. Refer to the Brocade 8770 Hardware
Reference Manual for more information on line card operating modes.
The following additional rules apply to Brocade trunks:
• On Brocade VDX 6740 switches, low-volume traffic below certain thresholds may not be evenly
distributed on all links. This threshold can be as low as 64 K.
• The trunk is turned on by default.
• Trunks are not supported between the Brocade 8000 and the Brocade VDX 8770.
Fabric formation
Brocade VCS Fabric technology leverages proven FC Fabric protocols to build a TRILL fabric. The main
functions of the fabric formation protocols are as follows:
• Assign the Brocade VCS Fabric-wide unique RBridge IDs (Domain ID Assignment).
• Create the network topology database using link state routing protocol (Fabric Shortest Path First, or
FSPF). FSPF calculates the shortest path routes to a destination RBridge.
• Distribute fabric multicast traffic.
Principal switch selection
Every Brocade VCS Fabric-enabled switch, upon boot-up and after the Fabric port formation, declares
itself to be a principal switch and advertises this intent on all fabric ports. The intent includes a priority
and its switch WWN. If all switches boot up at the same time, the default priority is the same and all
switches will compare their mutual intents. The switch with the lowest Switch WWN becomes the
principal switch. The WWN is an industry-standard burnt-in switch identifier, similar to the Bridge-MAC
except it is 8 bytes. The role of the principal switch is to decide whether a new RBridge joining the fabric
conflicts with any of the RBridge IDs already present in the fabric. At the end of the principal switch
selection process, all the switches in the cluster have formed a tree with the principal switch at the root.
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
111
RBridge ID allocation
NOTE
Brocade VDX Data Center switches are shipped with factory-programmed world wide names (WWNs)
that are unique.
NOTE
In a logical chassis cluster, you can select the principal node by using the command line interface. For
more information, refer to Selecting a principal node for the cluster on page 58.
RBridge ID allocation
RBridge ID assignment is implemented by leveraging proven Domain ID assignment protocols from
FC SANs. Request for Domain ID (RDI) and Domain ID Assignment (DIA) protocols ensure that a
single switch (the principal switch) centrally allocates the domain IDs for every RBridge in the fabric
and detects and resolves any domain ID collisions in the fabric. A Brocade VCS Fabric supports up to
48 RBridge IDs. RBridge IDs can range from 1 through 239.
Only the principal switch can allocate RBridge IDs (domain IDs) for all other switches in the fabric. The
principal switch starts the allocation process by allocating an RBridge ID for itself (using the ID value
supplied by the user), and initiates the DIA messages on all ports.
Other switches, which are now in subordinate mode, upon receiving the DIA frames respond with an
RDI message towards the principal switch. The process continues until all the switches in the fabric
have been allocated a unique ID.
Fabric routing protocol
After a RBridge ID is assigned to a switch, the Fabric Shortest Path First (FSPF) link state routing
protocol begins to form adjacencies and collects topology and inter-connectivity information with its
neighbors. Brocade VCS Fabric uses FSPF to calculate and elect a loop-free multicast tree rooted at
the multicast root RBridge. The multicast tree is calculated after the unicast routes are computed.
Configuring a Brocade VCS Fabric
Refer to the following tables for commands and examples used in configuring a Brocade VCS Fabric.
For command details, refer to the Network OS Command Reference.
The following table lists command examples for enabling Brocade VCS logical chassis cluster mode:
TABLE 16 Command examples for enabling logical chassis cluster mode
Command
Command Behavior
switch# vcs logical-chassis enable
The VCS ID becomes the default
value of 1, the RBridge ID is not
changed, and Brocade VCS
logical chassis cluster mode is
enabled.
112
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Configuring Brocade VCS Fabrics
TABLE 16 Command examples for enabling logical chassis cluster mode (Continued)
Command
Command Behavior
switch# vcs vcsid 22 rbridge-id 15 logical-chassis enable
The VCS ID is changed to 22,
the RBridge ID is changed to 15,
and Brocade VCS logical chassis
cluster mode is enabled. RBridge
IDs range from 1 through 239.
switch# vcs vcsid 11 logical-chassis enable
The VCS ID is changed to 11,
the RBridge ID is not changed,
and Brocade VCS logical chassis
cluster mode is enabled.
switch# vcs rbridge-id 6 logical-chassis enable
The VCS ID becomes the default
value of 1, the RBridge ID is
changed to 6 , and Brocade VCS
logical chassis cluster mode is
enabled.
The following table lists command examples for enabling Brocade VCS fabric cluster mode:
TABLE 17 Command examples for enabling fabric cluster mode
Command
Command Behavior
switch# vcs vcsid 55 rbridge-id 19 enable
The VCS ID is changed to 55 ,
the RBridge ID is changed to 19,
and Brocade VCS fabric cluster
mode is enabled.
switch# vcs vcsid 73 enable
The VCS ID is changed to the
value of 73 , the RBridge ID is not
changed, and Brocade VCS
fabric cluster mode is enabled.
switch# vcs rbridge-id 10 enable
The VCS ID becomes the default
value 1, the RBridge ID is
changed to 10, and Brocade VCS
fabric cluster mode is enabled.
The following table lists command examples for switches that are already in either fabric cluster mode
or logical chassis cluster mode.
TABLE 18 Command examples for when one of the VCS modes is already enabled:
Command
Command Behavior
switch# vcs vcsid 44 rbridge-id 22
The VCS ID is changed to 44 and
the RBridge ID is changed to 22.
switch# vcs vcsid 34
The VCS ID is changed to 34.
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
113
Adding a new switch into a fabric
Adding a new switch into a fabric
Complete the following configuration steps to add a new switch into a fabric.
1. Connect to the switch and log in using an account assigned to the admin role.
2. Enter the vcs rbridge-id rbridge-id enable command.
The switch remembers its RBridge ID once it has been assigned. The vcs rbridge-id rbridge-id
enable command also sets the insistent RBridge ID property on the switch.
3. Reboot the system.
After the required reboot the switch participates in the RBridge ID allocation protocol, which insists
that the same value that was manually configured prior to reboot be allocated after reboot.
The switch is not allowed into the fabric if there is a conflict; for example, if another switch with the
same ID exists and is operational in the fabric. You have the opportunity to select a new RBridge ID
by using the same CLI.
Once an ID has been assigned by the fabric protocol, these IDs are then numerically equated to
RBridge IDs and are treated as such after that.
Use the vcs command to configure the Brocade VCS Fabric parameters, VCS ID, and the switch
RBridge ID, and to enable Brocade VCS Fabric mode (also called VCS mode).
VCS mode encompasses two mode types:
• Fabric cluster mode — The data path for nodes is distributed, but the configuration path is not
distributed. Each node keeps its configuration database independently.
• Logical chassis cluster mode — Both the data and configuration paths are distributed. The entire
cluster can be configured from the principal node. Logical chassis cluster mode requires Network
OS 4.0 or later.
The generic term VCS mode in this manual applies to both fabric cluster mode and logical chassis
cluster mode unless otherwise stated.
You can set the Brocade VCS Fabric parameters and enable VCS mode at the same time, or you
can enable VCS mode and then perform the ID assignments separately. Refer to Configuring a
Brocade VCS Fabric on page 112 for details.
After configuring the Brocade VCS Fabric parameters, the switch applies the changes and reboots.
The switch disable is not saved across a reboot, so if the switch was disabled prior to the reboot,
the switch returns to the enabled state when it finishes the boot cycle.
Configuring fabric interfaces
A physical interface in a virtual switch cluster can either be an edge port or a fabric port, but not both.
Similar to a switch-port configuration on a physical interface, you can also change a fabric-port
configuration on its physical interface by using the fabric ISL enable and fabric trunk enable
commands, described below.
Enabling a fabric ISL
The fabric isl enable command controls whether an ISL should be formed between two cluster
members. With the default setting of ISL discovery to auto and the ISL formation mode to enable , an
ISL automatically forms between two cluster switches.
Performing a fabric isl enable command on an operational ISL has no effect. However, performing a
no fabric isl enable command on an interface toggles its link status and subsequently disables ISL
formation. In addition, the no fabric isl enable command triggers the switch to inform its neighbor that
114
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Disabling a fabric ISL
the local interface is ISL disabled. Upon receiving such information, a neighbor switch stops its ISL
formation activity regardless of its current interface state.
NOTE
After you repair any segmented or disabled ISL ports, toggle the fabric ISL in order to propagate the
changes.
NOTE
A shutdown command on an operating ISL interface not only brings down the physical link but also its
FSPF adjacency. The main difference between a shutdown command and a no fabric isl enable
command is that the link stays up after a no fabric isl enable, while the link stays down after a
shutdown.
NOTE
Upon a fabric reconvergence that due to a topology change involving the ECMP fabric-isl path, there
may be sub-second flooding of known unicast traffic.
Disabling a fabric ISL
The no fabric isl enable command takes this interface out of the trunk group if this interface happens
to be currently part of the trunk. If you know and would like to fix the edge and fabric port assignments
on a switch, then this command allows you to completely turn off ISL formation logic and shorten any
link bring-up delays on edge ports.
1. Connect to the switch and log in using an account assigned to the admin role.
2. Enter the no fabric isl enable command.
Enabling a fabric trunk
NOTE
Trunks are not supported between the Brocade 8000 and the Brocade VDX 8770.
1. Connect to the switch and log in using an account assigned to the admin role.
2. Enter the fabric trunk enable command.
Disabling a fabric trunk
Fabric trunking is enabled by default. Enter the no fabric trunk enable command to revert the ISL back
to a standalone adjacency between two Brocade VCS Fabric switch.
Configuring broadcast, unknown unicast, and multicast forwarding
All switches in a Brocade VCS Fabric cluster share a single multicast tree rooted at the RBridge with the
lowest RBridge ID (domain ID). All broadcast, unknown unicast, and multicast traffic between two edge
RBridges is forwarded on this multicast tree inside the Brocade VCS Fabric. The multicast tree includes
all RBridges in the Brocade VCS Fabric.
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
115
Multicast distribution tree-root selection
Multicast distribution tree-root selection
Network OS supports the following distribution tree behaviors.
• The root of the distribution tree is the switch with the lowest RBridge ID. The automated selection
process does not require any user intervention.
• Each switch in the cluster optionally carries a multicast root priority. This priority setting overrides
the automatically-selected multicast root. In deployments where a multicast root is required to be a
specific switch that does not have the lowest RBridge ID, then the priority setting on that switch can
override the root selection. If there are two switches with the same priority, then the switch with the
lower RBridge ID prevails.
• A back-up multicast root is pre-selected, which is the switch with the next lowest RBridge ID. The
back-up multicast root is automatically selected by all switches should the current multicast root fail.
Configuring priorities
As stated above, the root of the tree is auto-selected as the switch with the lowest RBridge ID. For
example, if you had a cluster with RBridge IDs 5, 6, 7, and 8, then 5 would be the root. If you then
added RBridge ID 1 to this fabric, the tree would be re-calculated with 1 as the root.
In order to avoid this behavior, you can set a priority (default is 1). The highest priority overrides the
lowest RBridge ID and becomes the root.
For example, to build a fabric with RBridge ID 7 or 8 as the root, set their priority to something higher
than 1 (priority values are 1 through 255). If there is a tie in priority, the lower RBridge is still chosen. If
RBridge ID 7 and 8 are both set to priority 1, 7 becomes the root.
Changing the priority
1. Connect to the switch and log in using an account assigned to the admin role.
2. Enter the fabric route mcast rbridge-id command.
Here is an example of changing an RBridge multicast priority:
switch(config)# fabric route mcast rbridge-id 12 priority 10
Displaying the running configuration
The show running-config fabric route mcast command allows you to display fabric route multicast
configuration information. The configuration currently effective on the switch is referred to as the
running configuration. Any configuration change you make while the switch is online is made to the
running configuration. The running configuration is nonpersistent.
NOTE
To save configuration changes, you must save the running-config file to a file, or you can apply the
changes by copying the running configuration to the startup configuration.
1. Connect to the switch and log in using an account assigned to the admin role.
2. Enter the show running-config fabric route mcast command.
switch# show running-config fabric route mcast priority
fabric route mcast rbridge-id 12 priority 10
116
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Configuring VCS virtual IP addresses
Configuring VCS virtual IP addresses
A virtual IP address is assigned for each VCS cluster. This virtual IP address is tied to the principal
switch in the cluster. The management interface of the principal switch can be accessed by means of
this virtual IP address. Because the virtual IP address is a property of the fabric cluster and logical
chassis cluster, in the event that the principal switch goes down, the next principal switch is assigned
this address.
Virtual IP address can be configured by means of the vcs virtual ip address command:
switch(config)# vcs virtual ip address 10.0.0.23/24
This command can be used in logical chassis cluster and fabric cluster modes only. When the virtual IP
address is configured for the first time, the current principal switch in the cluster is assigned this IP
address.
Virtual IP configuration is global in nature. All the nodes in the cluster are configured with the same
virtual IP address, but address is bound to the current principal switch only. Make sure that the
assigned virtual IP address is not a duplicate of an address assigned to any other management port in
the cluster or network.
Brocade recommends that you use a /32 address in the same subnet as the IP address of the
management interface. For example, if you are using inband management via rbridge interface ve 100
with the ip address 192.168.100.10/24, set your vcs virtual ip address as a /32 address in this subnet by
using the command vcs virtual ip address 192.168.100.1/32. To display the currently configured
virtual IP address, use the show vcs virtual ip command:
switch# show vcs virtual ip
Virtual IP
Associated rbridge-id
: 10.21.87.2/20
: 2
To remove the currently configured virtual IP address, use the no vcs virtual ip address command.
switch(config)# no vcs virtual ip address
switch# show running-config vcs virtual ip address
% No entries found.
NOTE
You should not use the no vcs virtual ip address command when logged onto the switch through the
virtual IP address. Use the management port IP address of the principal switch, or the serial console
connection of the principal switch.
If you wish to rebind this virtual IP address to this management interface, remove the currently
configured virtual IP address and reconfigure it. This situation can arise when the virtual IP address is
not bound to management interface of the principal switch as a result of duplicate address detection.
A separate gateway cannot be configured for virtual IP address. The default gateway is the same as the
gateway address for the management port of the same switch.
Virtual IP address configuration scenarios
Virtual IP address may be assigned to a switch whenever it is the principal switch in the cluster. The
configuration scenarios that may occur are described below.
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
117
Configuring fabric ECMP load balancing
TABLE 19 Virtual IP address configuration scenarios
Scenario
Description
First time cluster
formation
When the cluster is first being formed, and if the virtual IP address is already configured,
the principal switch is assigned the Virtual IP address. If no Virtual IP configuration
exists, then the principal switch can be access using the management port IP address.
Virtual IP configuration
When you configure the virtual IP address for a cluster the first time, the address is
bound to the management interface of the principal switch.
Principal switch
failover
If the principal switch becomes a secondary switch while the virtual IP address is
assigned to its management interface, then the virtual IP address is reassigned to the
new principal switch.
Principal switch goes
down
When the principal switch in the cluster goes down, the virtual IP address is released
from its management interface. The virtual IP address will be assigned to the next switch
that becomes the principal switch.
Principal switch
chassis is disabled
When the chassis disable command is executed on the principal switch, the virtual IP
address is released from its management interface. The virtual IP address will be
assigned to the next switch that becomes the principal switch.
Virtual IP removal
If you remove the virtual IP address from the configuration, then the address is unbound
from management interface of the principal switch. In this case, the principal switch can
still be accessed by using the management port’s IP address.
Trivial merge
In the event that two clusters merge together, the global configuration of the smaller
cluster (Cluster A) is overwritten by the larger cluster (Cluster B). During this time, the
virtual IP address is unbound from the principal switch of Cluster A. The virtual IP
address of Cluster B can now be used to access the principal of new merged cluster. If
the virtual IP address of Cluster B is not configured, there will not be a virtual IP address
in the merged cluster.
Cluster reboot
When the cluster reboots, the virtual IP address is persistent and is bound to the new
principal switch.
Cluster Islanding
If the ISL link goes down between two or more clusters that are forming, the principal
switch in the original cluster retains the virtual IP address. The new principal switch in
the second cluster will perform a check to confirm that the virtual IP address is not in
use. If it is in use, then the address is not assigned to the switch and an error is logged
in RASLog.
Virtual MAC address
Virtual MAC address are not supported by virtual IP addresses.
Management port
primary IPv4 address
For a virtual IP address to work correctly, the management port’s IPv4 address should
be assigned and functional.
Configuring fabric ECMP load balancing
Traffic towards ECMP paths are load-balanced using the following eight fields as the Key; VlanID,
MAC DA/SA, L3_ULP, L3 DA/SA, L4 Dst/Src. For some pattern of streams, most of the traffic falls into
one ECMP path, and rest of the ECMP paths are underutilized. This results in loss of data traffic, even
though more ECMP paths are available to offload the traffic. You can configure the ECMP path
selection method within the fabric by using the fabric ecmp load-balance command. The operands
for this command are listed and described in the following table.
118
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Configuring Brocade VCS Fabrics
TABLE 20 ECMP load-balancing operands
Operand
Description
dst-mac-vid
Destination MAC address and VID-based load balancing
src-dst-ip
Source and Destination IP address-based load balancing
src-dst-ip-mac-vid
Source and Destination IP and MAC address and VID-based load balancing
src-dst-ip-mac-vid-port Source and Destination IP, MAC address, VID and TCP/UDP port based load balancing
src-dst-ip-port
Source and Destination IP and TCP/UDP port-based load balancing
src-dst-mac-vid
Source and Destination MAC address and VID-based load balancing
src-mac-vid
Source MAC address and VID-based load balancing
Additionally, you can choose to swap adjacent bits of the hash key using the fabric ecmp loadbalance-hash-swap command. This is useful in cases where a choice of any of the hash key
combinations causes the distribution of traffic to not be uniform.
The fabric ecmp load-balance-hash-swap command is used to configure the swapping of the input
fields before feeding them to the hash function. The integer is interpreted as a bitwise control of the
212-bit key. Each bit controls whether the two adjacent bits of the key are to be swapped. This 32-bit
control value is written to all four hash swap control registers. This value is replicated in 32-bit block to
form a 106-bit value. A value of 0x0 does not swap any input fields while a value of 0xffffffff swaps all
106 input bit-pairs.
NOTE
The fabric ecmp load-balance-hash-swap command is supported on the Brocade VDX 8770.
To configure the ECMP load-balancing feature, perform the following steps in global configuration
mode.
1. Enter RBridge ID configuration mode.
switch(config)# rbridge-id 2
switch(config-rbridge-id-2)#
2. Execute the fabric ecmp load-balance command for the stream you want to favor.
This example uses the Destination MAC address and VID-based load balancing flavor.
switch(config-rbridge-id-2)# fabric ecmp load-balance dst-mac-vid
3. Optional: Use the fabric ecmp load-balance-hash-swap command to swap the input fields before
feeding them to the hash function.
switch(config-rbridge-id-2)# fabric ecmp load-balance-hash-swap 0x4
4. Use the show fabric ecmp load-balance command to display the current configuration of hash field
selection and hash swap.
switch# show fabric ecmp load-balance
Fabric Ecmp Load Balance Information
-----------------------------------Rbridge-Id
: 2
Ecmp-Load-Balance Flavor : Destination MAC address and VID based load balancing
Ecmp-Load-Balance HashSwap : 0x4
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
119
Configuring fabric ECMP load balancing
120
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Configuring Metro VCS
● Metro VCS overview..................................................................................................... 121
● Configuring a long-distance ISL.................................................................................... 129
● Configuring interconnected Ethernet Fabrics................................................................129
Metro VCS overview
Metro VCS allows you to interconnect different locations and form clusters of data centers over long
distance in order to provide disaster protection/recovery and load sharing.
In cases where distances are moderate, within 30km, and where either dedicated fiber or transparent
wavelength services are available, the Metro VCS approach is a good and cost-effective Layer 2
interconnect solution. Due to the multi-pathing capabilities of the TRILL-based Metro VCS solution there
is no issue with topology loops between multiple DC locations.
For longer distances alternative solutions are available.
• Interconnecting separate fabrics through Layer 2 point-to-point connectivity -- Layer 2 point-topoint connectivity is used to interconnect VCS Fabrics using their Edge-Ports. If more than one Layer
2 link is needed for capacity or for redundancy reasons, link aggregation (LAG/vLAG) can be used in
order to avoid loops between the VCS Fabric edge ports and allow for active/active protection.
• Interconnecting separate fabrics through Layer 2-VPN connectivity -- VCS Fabrics are
interconnected through their edge ports using Layer 2-VPN connectivity. This can be implemented
with Layer 2-VPN services from Connectivity Service Providers or using VPLS functionality
implemented on Brocade MLX routers.
FIGURE 20 Metro VCS configuration example
Both options are distance independent in relation to the speed of the protocols used (for example, LAG/
vLAG is a slow protocol) and provide flat Layer 2 interconnection between multiple locations. In the
case of more than two DC locations, care needs to be taken in order to avoid any topology loops.
Metro VCS details and configuration
Metro VCS allows for interconnection of different locations and allows to form clusters of data centers
over metro distances (<10/30 km) in order to provide disaster protection/recovery and application load
sharing.
By using Inter-Switch Links (ISLs) over longer distances (more than the standard 1000 m), Ethernet
fabrics can be distributed across data centers located in geographically different locations.
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
121
Metro VCS using long-distance ISLs
FIGURE 21 Basic Metro VCS configuration
If more complex setups are needed within different locations, then local VCS Fabrics can be used
interconnected via a stretched interconnect fabrics.
FIGURE 22 Complex Metro VCS configuration
Standard VCS Fabrics scaling limitations apply if Inter-Switch Links (ISLs) are used over distances of
up to 1000 m. Using Inter-Switch Links (ISLs) over longer distances (more than the standard 1000 m)
is currently available for 10G, 40G, and 100G ISLs and can be done in two ways:
• Configuring long-distance ISLs (LD-ISLs) -- This is supported only on 10G ISLs does not restrict
fabric topologies (such as the numbers of nodes and number of locations) beyond the standard
VCS Fabric scalability. LD-ISLs can be used over distances up to 10km if lossless services (DCB,
FCoE) are needed and over distances of 30km if only standard Ethernet is needed.
• Using standard ISLs over longer distances -- This only works for restricted topologies (a
maximum of 6 nodes and 3 locations) and for standard Ethernet (lossless Ethernet capabilities,
such as no FCoE or lossless iSCSI, cannot be used in this case). The standard 10G ISL can be
used over distances up to 30 km, and standard 40G and 100G ISLs can support distances up to 10
km.
Metro VCS using long-distance ISLs
Extending Ethernet Fabrics over distance is accomplished by using long-distance ISLs. The buffer
allocation within a single port group is optimized, which extends the supported ISL distance.
Metro VCS supports long-distance ISL ports up to 30 km on the Brocade VDX platforms listed in the
following table. Links up to 10 km are lossless.
122
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Configuring Metro VCS
TABLE 21 Limitations for long-distance Metro VCS
Supported hardware
Extended ISL up
to 2 km
Extended ISL up
to 5 km
Extended ISL up
to 10 km
Extended ISL up
to 30 km
Brocade VDX 6740
yes
yes
yes
yes
Brocade VDX 8770 LC48x10G linecard
yes
yes
yes
yes
The following table lists the conditions on extended ISLs for Network OS hardware.
TABLE 22 Conditions for long-distance Metro VCS
Condition
Extended ISL up
to 2 km
Extended ISL up
to 5 km
Extended ISL up
to 10 km
Extended ISL up
to 30 km
Support for lossless FCoE/ yes
iSCSI traffic on the Metro
VCS port group
yes
yes
no
Layer 2/IP lossy traffic
support
yes
yes
yes
yes
Number of Metro VCS
long-distance ports
supported per port group
1
1
1
1
Number of regular ISLs
supported on a port group
configured for long
distance
1
1
0
0
Trunking support between no
multiple long-distance ISLs
no
no
no
CEE map or FCoE port
no
allowed in same port group
no
no
no
eNS Sync (MAC address
table sync)
yes
yes
yes
yes
Zoning
yes
yes
yes
yes
HA failover
yes
yes
yes
yes
Node redundancy check
yes
yes
yes
yes
vMotion
yes
yes
yes
yes
Maximum PFCs supported 3 (2 on the Brocade 3(2 on the Brocade
VDX 6740)
VDX 6740)
3 (2 on the Brocade 3 (2 on the Brocade
VDX 6740)
VDX 6740)
Long-distance ISL on 40G
to 4x10G breakout
interfaces
no
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
no
no
no
123
Guidelines and restrictions for long-distance Metro VCS
TABLE 22 Conditions for long-distance Metro VCS (Continued)
Condition
Extended ISL up
to 2 km
Long-distance ISL on 1G
no
and 10G copper interfaces
Extended ISL up
to 5 km
Extended ISL up
to 10 km
Extended ISL up
to 30 km
no
no
no
The following table lists the port groups and number of port groups available on each platform for longdistance Metro VCS.
TABLE 23 Long-distance Metro VCS port-group schema
Platform
Port groups
Number of port groups on
platform
Brocade VDX 6740
1-32, 33-48 (49-52 are 40G ports and
do not support long distance)
2*
Brocade VDX 8770 (LC48x10G
linecard)
1-8, 9-16, 17-24, 25-32, 33-40, 41-48
6 per 10GbE blade
* Not a valid deployment scenario at distances longer than 5 km, as no normal ISLs are allowed if both
port groups are configured with long-distance ISLs for 10 km and 30 km.
Guidelines and restrictions for long-distance Metro VCS
Consider the following guidelines and restrictions when configuring long-distance Metro VCS:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
124
Long-distance-ISLs are only supported on 10G interface links.
Only one long-distance-ISL is supported within a single port group.
Long-distance-ISL is not supported on 10G copper RJ-45 interfaces
Long-distance-ISL is not supported on 40G-to-10G breakout interfaces
Brocade trunking is not supported with long-distance ISLs, but up to eight 8-link ECMP trunks can
be used.
Edge ports within the same port group where a long-distance ISL is configured cannot be
configured with DCB maps.
Edge ports within the same port group where a long-distance ISL is configured cannot be
configured by means of the fcoeport default command.
A maximum of three PFCs can be supported on a Metro VCS configured platform. By default, PFC
is enabled by class 3 and 7.
The Brocade VDX 6740 switches support only two PFCs.
All the ports in the port group are rebooted when a port is configured for long distance.
For 2-, 5-, 10-km long distance, use Brocade-supported long-range (LR) optics for direct
connectivity.
For 30-km long distance, use Brocade-supported extended-range (ER) optics for direct connectivity.
A port group containing a long-distance port cannot have a CEE map configuration on any edge
port.
For 2-km and 5-km long-distance ISLs, one additional standard ISL connection is supported on the
same long-distance port group.
Lossless FCoE traffic is supported up to 10 km with long-distance ISL configured.
Lossy Layer 2/Layer 3 traffic is supported up to 30 km with long-distance ISL configured.
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Metro VCS using standard-distance ISLs
Metro VCS using standard-distance ISLs
In order to deploy Metro VCS using standard-distance ISLs, no configuration is required on the ISL. The
default configuration on the 10-, 40-, and 100-Gbps interface by means of the fabric isl enable and
fabric trunk enable commands allows ISL formation with other Brocade VDX switches in the same
VCS cluster automatically. BLDP negotiation takes place to form ISLs for distances up to 30 km for 10G
and 10 km for 40G and 100G interfaces. (Refer to Configuring Brocade VCS Fabrics on page 109.)
Metro VCS using standard ISLs is supported on the following platforms:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Brocade VDX 2740
Brocade VDX 6740, VDX 6740T, and VDX 6740T-1G
Brocade VDX 8770 with the LC48X10G line card
Brocade VDX 8770 with the LC27X40G line card
Brocade VDX 8770 with the LC12X40G line card
Brocade VDX 8770 with the LC6X100G line card
Brocade VDX 6940-36Q
The following figure is an example deployment topology supported for interconnecting data centers by
extending Brocade VCS Ethernet fabrics using standard-distance ISLs. The local VCS clusters are
connected to the Metro VCS clusters by Brocade vLAGs. In this case, local data-center Ethernet fabrics
from both site are not merged while providing seamless Layer 2 extension. For Metro VCS, Brocade
standard-distance ISL trunking is supported, with up to a maximum of eight ISLs to form 80G trunks.
FIGURE 23 Typical deployment topology for Metro VCS using standard-distance ISLs
The following table lists the port groups and number of port groups available on each platform for Metro
VCS using standard-distance ISLs.
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
125
Guidelines and restrictions for standard-distance Metro VCS
TABLE 24 Standard Metro VCS port-group schema
Platform
Port groups
Number of port groups
on platform
Brocade VDX 6740
1-16, 17-32, 33-40, 41-48, 49-50, 51-52
6
Brocade VDX 6740T
49-50, 51-52 (40G interfaces only)
2
Brocade VDX 6740T-1G
49-50, 51-52 (40G interfaces only)
2
Brocade VDX 8770 (LC6X100G)
1-2, 3-4, 5-6
3
Brocade VDX 8770 (LC27X40G)
1-3, 4-6, 7-9, 10-12, 13-15, 16-18, 19-21,
22-24, 25-27
9
Brocade VDX 8770 (LC12X40G)
1-2, 3-4, 5-6, 7-8, 9-10, 11-12
6
Brocade VDX 8770 (LC48x10G line
card)
1–8, 9–16, 17–24, 25–32, 33–40, 41–48
6
Brocade VDX 6940-36Q
1-6, 7-12, 13-18, 19-24, 25-30, 31-36
6
Guidelines and restrictions for standard-distance Metro VCS
Consider the following guidelines and restrictions when configuring Metro VCS with standard-distance
ISLs:
• Only two data-center and three data-center topologies are supported.
• A maximum of two nodes are supported for each site, which provides node redundancy. If morecomplex local designs are required, a local VCS sub-fabric design must be used.
• Only standard Ethernet services are supported, lossless Ethernet capabilities, such as no FCoE or
lossless iSCSI, cannot be used in this case.
• Brocade trunking up to 80G (8x10G or 2x40G) or 120G (3x40G):
‐
‐
‐
‐
‐
VDX 8770: 8x10G
VDX 6740: 8x10G and 2x40G
VDX 6740T: 2x40G
VDX 6740T-1G: 2x40G
VDX 6940-36Q: 3x40G
Metro VCS combined with vLAGs
Outside of Metro distances, and whenever bit transparency may be a problem, edge-to-edge
interconnected fabrics using 10G, 40G, or 100G vLAG over multiple standard Ethernet links can be
used. This allows you to connect separate Ethernet fabrics that can be located in different data
centers, even if the distance between those locations up to 30 km for 10G interfaces and up to 10 km
for 40G and 100G interfaces.
Metro VCS over a long-distance fabric
Whenever standard VCS Fabrics are interconnected through LAG/vLAG, they are not limited beyond
LAG/vLAG protocol capabilities.
126
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Supported platforms for Distributed Ethernet Fabrics using vLAG
Metro VCS Fabrics (stretched fabrics) that are interconnected with standard fabrics are supported for
distances up to 100 km.
As shown in the following figure, one side can be a Metro VCS over a long-distance fabric.
FIGURE 24 Metro VCS and distributed Ethernet fabrics
In all deployment with interconnects using edge ports, lossless Ethernet traffic (DCB/FCoE ) is not
supported.
In order to connect two distinct VCS Ethernet fabrics between data centers, a third Metro VCS fabric
can be formed, and the distinct local VCS Ethernet fabrics can connect to the Metro VCS fabric by
means of Virtual Link Aggregation (vLAG).
Alternatively, the distinct VCS Ethernet fabrics in the respective data centers can be directly connected
to each other by means of vLAG over xWDM up to a distance of 10 or 30 km. Wherever bittransparency is not achievable in xWDM equipment, this solution can be successfully deployed for
edge-to-edge interconnectivity (using 10G, 40G, or 100G vLAGs over multiple standard Ethernet links).
This deployment is referred to as "Distributed Ethernet Fabrics using vLAG."
This implementation eliminates the need for the creation of a separate Metro VCS fabric to achieve
local VCS cluster isolation while providing Layer 2 connectivity. In such a deployment, DCB/FCoE
lossless Ethernet traffic is not supported.
NOTE
When a port-channel from a node in one VCS spans across multiple RBridges in other VCS cluster, a
vLAG is formed on the RBridges in the VCS cluster that are part of the same port-channel. For
Distributed Ethernet Fabrics using vLAG over long distances, only LACP-based standard port-channels
are supported. For details on how to create port-channels and vLAGs, refer to “Configuring Link
Aggregation” chapter of the Network OS Layer 2 Switching Configuration Guide.
Supported platforms for Distributed Ethernet Fabrics using vLAG
The following VDX platforms are supported for Distributed Ethernet Fabrics using vLAG:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Brocade VDX 6740, 6740T, and 6740T-1G
Brocade VDX 8770 with the LC48X10G line card
Brocade VDX 8770 with the LC27X40G line card
Brocade VDX 8770 with the LC12X40G line card
Brocade VDX 8770 with the LC6X100G line card
Brocade VDX 6940-36Q
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
127
Topology for Distributed Ethernet Fabrics using vLAG
Topology for Distributed Ethernet Fabrics using vLAG
When a port-channel from a node in one VCS spans across multiple RBridges in other VCS cluster, a
vLAG is formed on the RBridges in the VCS cluster that are part of the same port-channel. For
Distributed Ethernet Fabrics using vLAG over long distances, only LACP-based standard portchannels are supported. For details on how to create port-channels and vLAGs, refer to Configuring
Link Aggregation in the Layer 2 Switching Configuration Guide.
The following figure is a typical deployment topology that uses distributed Ethernet Fabrics using
vLAG to interconnect data centers. Nodes from the local VCS cluster are connected by means of
xWDM to the nodes in a distant VCS clusters to form a vLAG in between. The distant VCS cluster can
be a standard VCS cluster or could be spanned across two data centers over standard-distance or
long-distance ISLs, as shown in the figure below. In this case, the vLAG between the two data centers
provides VCS fabric isolation while providing seamless Layer 2 connectivity.
FIGURE 25 Connecting local VCS clusters over long distance using vLAG
Guidelines and restrictions for Distributed Ethernet Fabrics using vLAG
Note the following guidelines and restrictions for Distributed Ethernet Fabrics using vLAG.
• Only dynamic vLAG is supported.
• DCB/FCoE lossless Ethernet traffic is not supported.
• The maximum distance between standard VCS Fabrics is not limited beyond the capabilities of the
LAG/vLAG protocol.
• The maximum supported distance between a stretched Fabric (Metro VCS) and an additional
standard VCS Fabric connected through a vLAG is limited to 100 km.
128
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Configuring a long-distance ISL
Configuring a long-distance ISL
To configure a long-distance ISL, perform the following steps in privileged EXEC mode. Each longdistance ISL port of a VCS must be connected to a long-distance ISL port on the remote VCS.
1. Verify that the default standard-distance ISL configuration is correct by using the show runningconfig command.
switch# show running-config interface tengigabitethernet 51/0/1
interface TenGigabitEthernet 51/0/1
fabric isl enable
fabric trunk enable
no shutdown
2. Set the port to support Metro VCS up to 30 km by using the long-distance-isl command.
switch# interface tengigabit 51/0/1
switch(conf-if-te-51/0/1)# long-distance-isl 30000
3. Perform the same long-distance ISL configuration on the interface of the peer RBridge on the remote
sites of the Metro VCS.
4. Verify that the long-distance ISL is correctly formed by using the show fabric isl and show fabric
islports command.
switch(conf-if-te-51/0/1)# do show fabric isl
Rbridge-id: 51
#ISLs: 1
Src
Src
Nbr
Nbr
Index
Interface
Index
Interface
Nbr-WWN
BW
Trunk Nbr-Name
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4
Te 51/0/1
4
Te 53/0/1
10:00:00:05:33:65:3B:50
10G
Yes
"VCS3-53"
switch(conf-if-te-51/0/1)# do show fabric islports
Name:
VCS3-51
Type:
131.4
State:
Online
Role:
Fabric Principal
VCS Id:
3
Config Mode:Local-Only
Rbridge-id: 51
WWN:
10:00:00:05:33:e5:d0:4b
FCF MAC:
00:05:33:e5:d0:cf
Index
Interface
State
Operational State
===================================================================
0
Fo 51/0/49
Down
1
Fo 51/0/50
Down
2
Fo 51/0/51
Down
3
Fo 51/0/52
Down
4
Te 51/0/1
Up
ISL 10:00:00:05:33:65:3B:50 "VCS3-53" (Trunk Primary)
<Truncated>
5. Use the show ip interface brief command to confirm the configuration, making sure that Status is
"up" and Protocol is "LD ISL," as in the following example output.
switch# show ip interface brief
Interface
Protocol
=========================
=============
TenGigabitEthernet 51/0/1
ISL)
IP_Address
VRF
Status
===========
=============
===========
unassigned
default-vrf
up
up (LD
Configuring interconnected Ethernet Fabrics
To deploy interconnected Ethernet Fabrics using vLAG, create a port-channel interface on the RBridges
that are to be connected. Then add the member interfaces to the port-channel and bring them online.
Configure switchport and add the VLANs that are to be allowed over the port-channel. After the portchannels on all the RBridges are online, the vLAG forms automatically on the RBridge that connects to
multiple nodes on the other VCS cluster. In the deployment topology shown in Topology for Distributed
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
129
Configuring Metro VCS
Ethernet Fabrics using vLAG on page 128, the vLAG forms on the RBridges that are part of portchannel Po1 in Data-Centers 1 and 2 that forms VCS 1.
This configuration must be applied on RBridges that connect the two VCS instances. Perform the
following task in global configuration mode.
1. Create a port-channel interface on all RBridges that are directly connected to RBridges in other
VCS instances.
NOTE
In logical chassis cluster mode, the port-channel is created only from the principal node and is
applied globally.
switch(config)# interface port-channel 300
2. Verify that the port-channel is created correctly by using the show running-config command.
switch(config-Port-channel-300)# do show running-config interface port-channel 300
interface Port-channel 300
vlag ignore-split
shutdown
3. Configure the port-channel interface for the switchport trunk and add the VLANs to be allowed on
the trunk interface by using the switchport command.
switch(config-Port-channel-300)# switchport
switch(config-Port-channel-300)# switchport mode trunk
switch(config-Port-channel-300)# switchport trunk allowed vlan all
4. Verify the port-channel interface configuration by using the show running-config command.
switch(config-Port-channel-300)# do show running-config interface Port-channel 300
interface Port-channel 300
vlag ignore-split
switchport
switchport mode trunk
switchport trunk allowed vlan all
switchport trunk tag native-vlan
spanning-tree shutdown
shutdown
5. Add member interfaces to the port-channel interface by using the channel-group command. Do
this for all interfaces that must be part of the port-channel.
switch(conf-if-te-53/0/31)# channel-group 300 mode active type standard
switch(conf-if-te-53/0/31)# do show running-config interface
TenGigabitEthernet 53/0/31
interface TenGigabitEthernet 53/0/31
fabric isl enable
fabric trunk enable
channel-group 300 mode active type standard
lacp timeout long
no shutdown
6. Bring the port-channel online in both VCS instances by executing no shutdown on the port-channel
interface.
switch(config-Port-channel-300)# no shutdown
7. Verify the port-channel interface configuration by using the show running-config command.
switch(config-Port-channel-300)# do show running-config interface Port-channel 300
interface Port-channel 300
vlag ignore-split
switchport
switchport mode trunk
switchport trunk allowed vlan all
switchport trunk tag native-vlan
spanning-tree shutdown
no shutdown
8. Verify that console RASLogs indicate the formation of the vLAG by using the no shutdown
command.
switch(config-Port-channel-300)# no shutdown
130
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Configuring Metro VCS
2013/06/17-16:40:53, [NSM-1023], 224126, DCE, INFO, VCS1-51, RBridge ID 51 has
joined Port-channel 300. Port-channel is a vLAG with RBridge IDs 52 51.
9. Verify the formation of the port-channel vLAG by using the show port-channel command.
switch# show port-channel 300
LACP Aggregator: Po 300 (vLAG)
Aggregator type: Standard
Ignore-split is enabled
Member rbridges:
rbridge-id: 51 (2)
rbridge-id: 52 (2)
Admin Key: 0010 - Oper Key 0010
Partner System ID - 0x8000,01-e0-52-00-00-02
Partner Oper Key 0010
Member ports on rbridge-id 51:
Link: Te 51/0/31 (0x19180E801C) sync: 1
Link: Te 51/0/32 (0x19180F001D) sync: 1
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
131
Configuring interconnected Ethernet Fabrics
132
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Administering Zones
● Zoning overview............................................................................................................ 133
● Configuring and managing zones ................................................................................ 141
Zoning overview
Zoning is a fabric-based service that enables you to partition your network into logical groups of devices
that can access each other and prevent access from outside the group. Grouping devices into zones in
this manner not only provides security, but also relieves the network from Registered State Change
Notification (RSCN) storms that occur when too many native FCoE devices attempt to communicate
with one another.
You can use zoning to partition your network in many ways. For example, you can partition your
network into two zones, winzone and unixzone, so that your Windows servers and storage do not
interact with your UNIX servers and storage. You can use zones to logically consolidate equipment for
efficiency or to facilitate time-sensitive functions; for example, you can create a temporary zone to back
up nonmember devices.
A device in a zone can communicate only with other devices connected to the fabric within the same
zone. A device not included in the zone is not available to members of that zone. When zoning is
enabled, devices that are not included in any zone configuration are inaccessible to all other devices in
the fabric.
Zones can be configured dynamically. They can vary in size, depending on the number of fabricconnected devices, and devices can belong to more than one zone.
Example zoning topology
Consider the following figure, which shows three configured zones: Red, Green, and Blue. In this figure
the following is true:
•
•
•
•
Server 1 can communicate only with the Storage 1 device.
Server 2 can communicate only with the RAID and Storage 2 devices.
Server 3 can communicate with the RAID and Storage 1 devices.
The Storage 3 is not assigned to a zone; no other zoned fabric device can access it.
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
133
Administering Zones
FIGURE 26 Zoning
Connecting to another network through a Fibre Channel (FC) router, you can create a Logical SAN
(LSAN) zone to include zone objects on other fabrics, including Fabric OS networks. No merging takes
place across the FC router when you create an LSAN zone. The figure below shows an example in
which Server 1, which is connected to switch in a Brocade VCS Fabric cluster, has access to local
storage and to RAID storage on a Fabric OS fabric. (For a detailed discussion of LSAN zones, refer to
LSAN zones on page 135.)
134
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
LSAN zones
FIGURE 27 LSAN zoning
NOTE
Zoning in Network OS 4.0.0 and later has the following restrictions:
• Zone objects based on physical port number or port ID (D,I ports) are not supported.
• You cannot access a target on a Network OS fabric from a server on the Fabric OS fabric.
LSAN zones
LSAN zones are distinct from conventional zones. This section details how to define and manage LSAN
zones and provides recommendations about LSAN zone naming.
LSAN zones overview
A Logical SAN (LSAN) consists of zones in two or more edge or backbone fabrics that contain the same
devices. LSANs essentially provide selective device connectivity between fabrics without forcing you to
merge those fabrics. FC routers provide multiple mechanisms to manage inter-fabric device connectivity
through extensions to existing switch management interfaces. For details of this FC-FC routing service,
refer to the Fabric OS Administrator's Guide.
NOTE
A backbone fabric consists of one or more FC switches with configured EX_Ports. These EX_Ports in
the backbone connect to edge fabric switches through E_Ports. This type of EX_Port-to-E_Port
connectivity is called an "Inter-Fabric Link (IFL)".
The Brocade VCS Fabric connection to the FC router is an ISL that connects an FC port on a Brocade
VDX 6740 to an EX_Port on the FC router. Similarly, an FC port on the Fabric OS fabric connects to an
EX_Port on the FC router.
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
135
LSAN naming
You can define and manage LSANs using the same zone management tools as for regular zones. The
FC router makes LSAN zoning possible by importing devices in effective zones. For example, consider
two devices:
• 11:22:33:44:55:66:77:99 is connected to a switch in a Brocade VCS Fabric cluster.
• 11:22:33:44:55:66:77:88 is connected to a switch in a Fabric OS fabric.
The FC-FC routing service on the FC router that connects the two fabrics presents
11:22:33:44:55:66:77:88 as a phantom device to the Brocade VCS Fabric and also presents
11:22:33:44:55:66:77:99 as a phantom device to the Fabric OS fabric. You can then use the regular
zone management tools on the Brocade VCS Fabric cluster to incorporate 11:22:33:44:55:66:77:99
into an LSAN zone on the Brocade VCS Fabric. Similarly, you can use the regular zone management
tools in Fabric OS to incorporate 11:22:33:44:55:66:77:88 into an LSAN zone in the Fabric OS fabric.
Once both the Brocade VCS Fabric zone and the Fabric OS zone are enabled, the FC router imports
devices common to both zones and makes them available to the zones in each fabric.
LSAN naming
Zones that contain hosts and targets that are shared between the two fabrics need to be explicitly
coordinated. To share devices between any two fabrics, you must create an LSAN zone in both fabrics
containing the WWNs of the devices to be shared. Although you manage an LSAN zone by using the
same tools as any other zone on the edge fabric, two behaviors distinguish an LSAN zone from a
conventional zone:
• A required naming convention. The name of an LSAN zone begins with the prefix "LSAN_". The
LSAN name is case-insensitive; for example, lsan_ is equivalent to LSAN_, Lsan_, and so on.
• LSAN zone members in all fabrics must be identified by their WWN. You cannot use the port IDs
that are supported only in Fabric OS fabrics.
NOTE
The "LSAN_" prefix must appear at the beginning of the zone name.
To enable device sharing across multiple fabrics, you must create LSAN zones on the edge fabrics
(and optionally on the backbone fabric as well), using normal zoning operations to create zones with
names that begin with the special prefix "LSAN_", and adding host and target port WWNs from both
local and remote fabrics to each local zone as desired. Zones on the backbone and on multiple edge
fabrics that share a common set of devices will be recognized as constituting a single multi-fabric
LSAN zone, and the devices that they have in common will be able to communicate with each other
across fabric boundaries.
Managing domain IDs
FCoE connectivity across the Fibre Channel link between Brocade VCS Fabric clusters and FC
routers uses domain IDs to identify switches. Within a Brocade VCS Fabric cluster, a domain ID is the
same as a routing bridge ID. When you connect to a Fibre Channel router, the FC Fabric Fibre
Channel router service emulates virtual phantom FC domains in the FCoE fabric. Each FCR-enabled
switch emulates a single "front" phantom domain and each FC fabric is represented by a translate
phantom domain.
It is important to ensure that front domain IDs and translate domain IDs presented by the FC router do
not overlap routing bridge IDs in the FCoE fabric; otherwise, the connectivity will fail and the Network
OS switch with the overlapping routing bridge ID becomes isolated from the fabric. To prevent
potential overlap, use the portCfgExport -d Fabric OS command on the FC router to apply a unique
front domain ID — one that will not be used in the FCoE fabric. Similarly, use the fcrXlateConfig
importedFID exportedFID preferredDomainID Fabric OS command to set the translate domain ID to a
unique value that is also not used as a routing bridge ID.
136
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Approaches to zoning
Refer to the Fabric OS Command Reference Manual for details about the portCfgExport and
fcrXlateConfig commands.
Approaches to zoning
The following table lists the various approaches you can take when implementing zoning in a Network
OS fabric.
TABLE 25 Approaches to fabric-based zoning
Zoning approach
Description
Recommended approach
Single HBA
Zoning by single HBA most closely re-creates the original SCSI bus. Each zone
created has only one HBA (initiator) in the zone; each of the target devices is added to
the zone. Typically, a zone is created for the HBA and the disk storage ports are
added. If the HBA also accesses tape devices, a second zone is created with the HBA
and associated tape devices in it. In the case of clustered systems, it could be
appropriate to have an HBA from each of the cluster members included in the zone;
this zoning is equivalent to having a shared SCSI bus between the cluster members
and assumes that the clustering software can manage access to the shared devices.
In a large fabric, zoning by single HBA requires the creation of possibly hundreds of
zones; however, each zone contains only a few members. Zone changes affect the
smallest possible number of devices, minimizing the impact of an incorrect zone
change. This zoning philosophy is the preferred method.
Alternative approaches
Application
Zoning by application typically requires zoning multiple, perhaps incompatible,
operating systems into the same zones. This method of zoning creates the possibility
that a minor server in the application suite could disrupt a major server (such as a
Web server disrupting a data warehouse server). Zoning by application can also result
in a zone with a large number of members, meaning that more notifications, such as
RSCNs, or errors, go out to a larger group than necessary.
Operating system
Zoning by operating system has issues similar to zoning by application. In a large site,
this type of zone can become very large and complex. When zone changes are made,
they typically involve applications rather than a particular server type. If members of
different operating system clusters can detect storage assigned to another cluster,
they might attempt to own the other cluster’s storage and compromise the stability of
the clusters.
Port allocation
Avoid zoning by port allocation unless the administration team has very rigidly
enforced processes for port and device allocation in the fabric. It does, however,
provide some positive features. For instance, when a storage port, server HBA, or
tape drive is replaced, the change of WWN for the new device is of no consequence.
As long as the new device is connected to the original port, it continues to have the
same access rights. The ports on the edge switches can be pre-associated to storage
ports, and control of the fan-in ratio (the ratio of the input port to output port) can be
established. With this pre-assigning technique, the administrative team cannot
overload any one storage port by associating too many servers with it.
Not recommended
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
137
Zone objects
TABLE 25 Approaches to fabric-based zoning (Continued)
Zoning approach
Description
No zoning
Using no zoning is the least desirable zoning option because it allows devices to have
unrestricted access on the fabric and causes RSCN storms. Additionally, any device
attached to the fabric, intentionally or maliciously, likewise has unrestricted access to
the fabric. This form of zoning should be used only in a small and tightly controlled
environment, such as when host-based zoning or LUN masking is deployed.
Zone objects
A zone object can be one of the following types: a zone, a zone member, an alias for one or more
zone members, or a zoning configuration.
Zones
A zone is made up of one or more zone members. Each zone member can be a device, a port, or an
alias. If the zone member is a device, it must be identified by its Node World Wide Name (node
WWN). If it is a port, it must be identified by its Port World Wide Name (port WWN). Port WWNs and
node WWNs can be mixed in the same zone. For LSAN zones, only port WWNs can be used.
World Wide Names are specified as 8-byte (16-digit) hexadecimal numbers, separated by colons (:)
for example, 10:00:00:90:69:00:00:8a. When a zone object is the node WWN, only the specified
device is in the zone. When a zone object is the port WWN name, only the single port is in the zone.
NOTE
You are not restricted from configuring more than 255 zone members. However, that figure is
considered a best-practices limit, and exceeding it can lead to unpredictable results.
Zone aliases
A zone alias is a name assigned to a device or a group of devices. By creating an alias, you can
assign a familiar name to one or more devices and refer to these devices by that name. Aliases
simplify cumbersome data entry by allowing you to create an intuitive naming structure (such as using
"NT_Hosts" to define all NT hosts in the fabric).
As a shortcut for zone members, zone aliases simplify the entry and tracking of zone objects that are
defined by their WWNs. For example, you can use the name "Eng" as an alias for
"10:00:00:80:33:3f:aa:11".
Naming zones for the initiator they contain can also be useful. For example, if you use the alias
SRV_MAILSERVER_SLT5 to designate a mail server in PCI slot 5, then the alias for the associated
zone is ZNE_MAILSERVER_SLT5. This kind of naming strategy clearly identifies the server host bus
adapter (HBA associated with the zone).
Zone configurations
A zone configuration is a group of one or more zones. A zone can be included in more than one zone
configuration. When a zone configuration is enabled, all zones that are members of that configuration
are enabled.
138
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Naming conventions
Several zone configurations can reside on a switch at once, and you can quickly alternate between
them. For example, you might want to have one configuration enabled during the business hours and
another enabled overnight. However, only one zone configuration can be enabled at a time.
The different types of zone configurations are:
• Defined Configuration
The complete set of all zone objects defined in the fabric.
• Enabled Configuration
A single zone configuration that is currently in effect. The enabled configuration is built when you enable
a specified zone configuration.
If you disable the enabled configuration, zoning is disabled on the fabric, and default zoning takes
effect. When default zoning takes effect, either all devices within the fabric can communicate with all
other devices, or no device communicate with any other device, depending on how default zoning is
configured. Disabling the configuration does not mean that the zone database is deleted, however, only
that no configuration is active in the fabric.
On power-up, the switch automatically reloads the saved configuration. If a configuration was active
when it was saved, the same configuration is reinstated on the local switch.
Naming conventions
Naming zones and zone configurations is flexible. You can devise prefixes to differentiate between
zones used for production, backup, recovery, or testing. One configuration should be named
PROD_fabricname, where fabricname is the name that the fabric has been assigned. The purpose of
the PROD configuration is to easily identify the configuration that can be implemented and provide the
most generic services. If you want to use other configurations for specific purposes, you can use names
such as "BACKUP_A," "RECOVERY_2," and "TEST_18jun02".
Zoning enforcement
Zone enforcement is by name server. The name server filters queries and RSCNs based on the
enabled zoning configuration.
Considerations for zoning architecture
This table lists considerations for zoning architecture.
TABLE 26 Considerations for zoning architecture
Item
Description
Effect of changes in a
production fabric
Zone changes in a production fabric can result in a disruption of I/O under conditions
when an RSCN is issued because of the zone change and the HBA is unable to process
the RSCN fast enough. Although RSCNs are a normal part of a functioning SAN, the
pause in I/O might not be acceptable. For these reasons, you should perform zone
changes only when the resulting behavior is predictable and acceptable. Ensuring that the
HBA drivers are current can shorten the response time in relation to the RSCN.
Allowing time to
propagate changes
Zoning commands make changes that affect the entire fabric. When executing fabric-level
configuration tasks, allow time for the changes to propagate across the fabric before
executing any subsequent commands. For a large fabric, you should wait several minutes
between commands.
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
139
Operational considerations for zoning
TABLE 26 Considerations for zoning architecture (Continued)
Item
Description
Confirming operation
After changing or enabling a zone configuration, you should confirm that the nodes and
storage can identify and access one another. Depending on the platform, you might need
to reboot one or more nodes in the fabric with the new changes.
Use of aliases
The use of aliases is optional with zoning. Using aliases requires structure when defining
zones. Aliases aid administrators of zoned fabrics in understanding the structure and
context of zoning.
Operational considerations for zoning
Consider the following topics when configuring zoning.
Zoning configuration changes
When you save, enable, or disable a configuration, the changes are automatically distributed to all
switches in the VCS Fabric.
Supported firmware for zoning
Zoning is supported only if all RBridges in the fabric are running Network OS 2.1 or later.
Connecting an RBridge running Network OS 2.0 to an RBridge running Network OS 2.1 or later
merges the two networks only if the RBridge running Network OS 2.1 or later is in Brocade VCS Fabric
mode and no zone database elements are defined or enabled.
A switch running Network OS v3.0.0 will segment if it is attached to a switch running Network OS
v2.0.0 regardless of zoning configuration. A switch running Network OS v3.0.0 will join the fabric with a
2.1.x switch and zones will be merged, but the cluster will not form, so no further zoning commands
will be allowed until all switches are upgraded to the same firmware version and the cluster has
formed.
The Inter-Switch Links (ISLs) connecting the two RBridges will segment if the RBridge running
Network OS 2.1 or later has any zone defined or enabled, or the default zone is set to No Access. Any
such configuration requires automatic distribution of zoning configuration data, which is not compatible
with RBridges running Network OS 2.0.
Firmware downgrade and upgrade considerations for zoning
A firmware downgrade from Network OS 4.1.0 to Network OS 2.1.x is not permitted under the
following conditions:
1. One or more zone aliases are configured on the switch. You must remove all references to zone
aliases prior to a firmware downgrade. Use the no zoning defined-configuration alias command
to delete all zone alias objects. Then issue the zoning enabled-configuration cfg-action{cfg-save
| cfg-disable} command or the zoning enabled-configuration cfg-name cfg_name command to
commit the operation before re-attempting a firmware download.
2. An open zone transaction in progress. You must either commit or abort the current open transaction
before re-attempting a firmware download. Use the zoning enabled-configuration cfg-action
{cfg-save | cfg-disable} command or the zoning enabled-configuration cfg-name cfg_name
command to commit the current open transaction. Alternately, use the zoning enabledconfiguration cfg-action cfg-transaction-abort command to abort the open transaction.
140
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Configuring and managing zones
You cannot downgrade any switch in a Brocade VCS Fabric to Network OS 2.0 or earlier if any zone
definition exists in the defined configuration. Any attempt to do so will fail while attempting to
download the earlier firmware. For the downgrade to succeed, you must clear the defined
configuration, disable any active configuration, set the default zoning mode to All Access, and then
try again to download the firmware.
When you upgrade from Network OS 2.1.0 to versions 2.1.1 or later, the zone database is cleared.
CAUTION
Clearing the defined configuration clears the zoning database for the entire fabric. If you want
to downgrade just one switch without affecting the rest of the fabric, disconnect the switch
from the fabric before deleting the defined configuration.
Configuring and managing zones
Zone configuration management overview
You can perform zoning operations on any RBridge in the VCS Fabric, but they are always executed on
the principal RBridge. In Logical Chassis mode, any edits made to the zoning database are allowed only
from the principal RBridge, and you can issue show commands from non-principal switches in this
mode. In Fabric Cluster mode, you can make edits from any RBridge.
Automatic distribution of the zoning configuration ensures that the effects of these operations are
shared and instantly visible on all switches in the VCS Fabric. However, these operations are not
permanent until a transaction commit operation saves them to nonvolatile memory, which holds the
master copy of the zoning database. In fabric cluster mode, any user can commit the transaction on any
switch, and the commit operation saves the operations performed by all users. Once the zoning
configuration is saved in permanent memory, it persists across reboot operations.
A transaction commit occurs when you or another user initiates any of the following zoning operations:
• Saving the database to nonvolatile memory with the zoning enabled-configuration cfg-action cfgsave command.
• Enable a specific zone configuration with the zoning enabled-configuration cfg-name command.
• Disabling the currently enabled zone configuration with the no zoning enabled-configuration cfgname command.
Executing the zoning enabled-configuration cfg-action cfg-transaction-abort command cancels the
currently open transaction.
If the principal RBridge reboots or goes down, Network OS selects a new principal and any pending
zoning transaction is rolled back to the last committed transaction, which is the effective zoning
configuration saved in nonvolatile memory. Any changes made to the effective configuration prior to an
abort operation must be re-entered.
If an RBridge other than the principal reboots or goes down, the ongoing transaction is not backed out.
Any zoning operations initiated by the RBridge are still part of the global transaction maintained on the
principal RBridge.
If a fabric segments, the newly elected principal RBridge determines whether transaction data are
retained. If a segment retains the original principal, it also retains ongoing transaction data. If a segment
elects a new principal, the transaction is aborted.
The zone startup configuration is always equal to the running configuration. The running configuration
will always be overwritten by the information from the master copy of the zoning database in nonvolatile
memory at startup, so you always start up with the previous running configuration. It is not necessary to
copy the running configuration to the startup configuration explicitly.
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
141
Understanding and managing default zoning access modes
You can save a snapshot of the current running configuration using the copy running-config file
command. You can add configuration entries from a saved configuration using the copy file runningconfig command. When saving the snapshot you must ensure that the saved running configuration
contains no zoning transaction data, otherwise failures will occur when you attempt to restore
configuration entries from the saved file. Any transaction data would cause such a failure, including
empty configuration definitions or empty zones.
Notes
• When you re-enable the enabled-configuration (using the zoning enabled-configuration
command) on the principal switch in the cluster, the system propagates the enabled-configuration
across the cluster. There is a slight risk of doing this in that the defined-configuration may contain
configuration edits that you may not want to enable yet. This feature prevents switches in the cluster
from having mismatched enabled-configurations.
• When restoring the running configuration, Brocade recommends copying the file to the running
configuration in the absence of any other command line input.
• When you restore a configuration using the copy command, the contents of the file are added to
the defined configuration; they do not replace the defined configuration. The result is cumulative, is
as if the input came from the command line.
Understanding and managing default zoning access modes
The default zoning mode controls device access if zoning is not implemented or if there is no enabled
zone configuration. Default zoning has two access modes:
• All Access — All devices within the fabric can communicate with all other devices.
• No Access — Devices in the fabric cannot access any other device in the fabric.
The default setting is All Access. Changing the default access mode requires committing the ongoing
transaction for the change to take effect.
The default zoning mode takes effect when you disable the effective zone configuration. If your default
zone has a large number of devices, to prevent RSCN storms from overloading those devices, you
should set the default zoning mode to No Access before attempting to disable the zone configuration.
If your default zone includes more than 300 devices, the zoning software prevents you from disabling
the zoning configuration if the default zoning mode is All Access.
Setting the default zoning mode
1. In privileged EXEC mode, enter the configure terminal command to enter the global configuration
mode.
2. Enter one of the following commands, depending on the default access mode you want to
configure:
• To set the default access mode to All Access, enter zoning enabled-configuration defaultzone-access allaccess.
• To set the default access mode to No Access, enter zoning enabled-configuration defaultzone-access noaccess.
3. Enter the zoning enabled-configuration cfg-action cfg-save or zoning enabled-configuration
cfg-name command to commit the ongoing transaction and save the access mode change to
nonvolatile memory.
4. Enter the show running-config zoning enabled-configuration command to verify the access
mode change.
142
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Understanding and managing zone database size
Example of setting the default zoning mode to no access:
switch# configure terminal
Entering configuration mode terminal
switch(config)# zoning enabled-configuration default-zone-access noaccess
switch(config)# zoning enabled-configuration cfg-action cfg-save
switch(config)# do show running-config zoning enabled-configuration
zoning enabled-configuration cfg-name cfg1
zoning enabled-configuration default-zone-access noaccess
zoning enabled-configuration cfg-action cfg-save
Understanding and managing zone database size
The maximum size of a zone database is the upper limit for the defined configuration, and it is
determined by the amount of memory available for storing the master copy of the defined configuration
in flash memory.
Use the following information displayed by the show zoning operation-info command to determine
whether there is enough space to complete outstanding transactions:
•
•
•
•
db-max — Theoretical maximum size of the zoning database kept in nonvolatile memory
db-avail — Theoretical amount of free space available
db-committed — The size of the defined configuration currently stored in nonvolatile memory
db-transaction — The amount of memory required to commit the current transaction
The supported maximum zone database size is 100 KB. If the outstanding transaction data (dbtransaction field) is less than the remaining supported space (100 KB minus db-committed), enough
space exists to commit the transaction.
NOTE
The db-max field has a theoretical zone database limit of approximately 1 MB. However, performance
might become unacceptable if the zoning database exceeds 150 KB.
Viewing database size information
In privileged EXEC mode, enter the show zoning operation-info command.
Database and transaction size information is displayed in bytes.
switch# show zoning operation-info
db-max 1045274
db-avail 1043895
db-committed 367
db-transaction 373
transaction-token 1
last-zone-changed-timestamp 2011-11-16 16:54:31 GMT-7:00
last-zone-committed-timestamp 2011-11-16 16:23:44 GMT-7:00
Managing zone aliases
A zone alias is user-defined name for a logical group of ports or WWNs. You can simplify the process of
creating and managing zones by first specifying aliases for zone members. Aliases facilitate tracking
and eliminate the need for long lists of individual zone member names. An alias can be a member of a
zone, but it cannot be a member of a zoning configuration.
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
143
Creating an alias
Creating an alias
1. In privileged EXEC mode, enter the show name-server detail command to list the WWNs of
devices and targets available in the Brocade VCS Fabric.
2. Enter the configure terminal command to enter global configuration mode.
3. Enter the zoning defined-configuration alias command followed by a name for the alias.
A subconfiguration mode prompt appears.
4. Enter the subconfiguration mode member-entry command to specify at least one member entry.
The member entry must be specified as a port WWN or a node WWN.
You can add multiple members in one operation by separating each member entry with a semicolon
(;). No spaces are allowed after the semicolon.
5. Enter the exit command to return to global configuration mode.
6. Enter the zoning enabled-configuration cfg-action cfg-save command to save the configuration
to nonvolatile memory.
The following is an example of creating an alias with one member node WWN:
switch# show name-server detail
PID: 013100
Port Name: 20:00:00:00:00:00:00:01
Node Name: 10:00:00:00:00:00:00:01
(output truncated)
switch# configure terminal
Entering configuration mode terminal
switch(config)# zoning defined-configuration alias alias1
switch(config-alias-alias1)# member-entry 10:00:00:00:00:00:00:01
switch(config-alias-alias1)# exit
switch(config)# zoning enabled-configuration cfg-action cfg-save
Adding additional members to an existing alias
1. In privileged EXEC mode, enter the show name-server detail command to list the WWNs of
devices and targets available in the Brocade VCS Fabric.
2. Enter the configure terminal command to enter global configuration mode.
3. Enter the zoning defined-configuration alias command followed the name of an existing zone
alias.
A subconfiguration mode prompt appears.
4. Enter the subconfiguration mode member-entry command to specify at least one member entry.
The member entry must be specified as a port WWN or a node WWN.
You can add multiple members in one operation by separating each member entry with a semicolon
(;). No spaces are allowed after the semicolon.
5. Enter the exit command to return to global configuration mode.
6. Enter the zoning enabled-configuration cfg-action cfg-save command to save the configuration
to nonvolatile memory.
Example of adding two member node WWNs to an existing alias:
switch# show name-server detail
PID: 013200
Port Name: 20:00:00:00:00:00:00:02
Node Name: 10:00:00:00:00:00:00:02
(output truncated)
PID: 013300
Port Name: 20:00:00:00:00:00:00:03
Node Name: 10:00:00:00:00:00:00:03
(output truncated)
switch# configure terminal
Entering configuration mode terminal
144
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Removing a member from an alias
switch(config)# zoning defined-configuration alias alias1
switch(config-alias-alias1)# member-entry
10:00:00:00:00:00:00:02;10:00:00:00:00:00:00:03
switch(config-alias-alias1)# exit
switch(config)# zoning enabled-configuration cfg-action cfg-save
switch(config)#
Removing a member from an alias
1. In privileged EXEC mode, enter the show running-config zoning command to display the alias and
its member WWNs.
2. Enter the configure terminal command to enter global configuration mode.
3. Enter the zoning defined-configuration alias command followed the name of an existing zone
alias.
A subconfiguration mode prompt appears.
4. Enter the subconfiguration mode no member-entry command to specify the WWN to be removed
from the zone alias.
You can only remove one member at a time.
5. Enter the exit command to return to the global configuration mode.
6. Enter the zoning enabled-configuration cfg-action cfg-save command to save the configuration to
nonvolatile memory.
The following provides an example of removing two members from an alias:
switch# show running-config zoning
zoning defined-configuration alias alias1
member-entry 10:00:00:00:00:00:00:01
member-entry 10:00:00:00:00:00:00:02
member-entry 10:00:00:00:00:00:00:03
(output truncated)
switch# configure terminal
Entering configuration mode terminal
switch(config)# zoning defined-configuration
switch(config-alias-alias1)# no member-entry
switch(config-alias-alias1)# no member-entry
switch(config-alias-alias1)# exit
switch(config)# zoning enabled-configuration
alias alias1
10:00:00:00:00:00:00:02
10:00:00:00:00:00:00:03
cfg-action cfg-save
Deleting an alias
1. In privileged EXEC mode, enter the show running-config zoning command to display the alias and
its member WWNs.
2. Enter the configure terminal command to enter global configuration mode.
3. Enter the no zoning defined-configuration alias command followed by the name of the alias you
want to delete.
4. Enter the show running-config zoning command to verify the change in the defined configuration
(optional).
5. Enter the zoning enabled-configuration cfg-action cfg-save command to save the configuration to
nonvolatile memory.
Example of deleting an alias:
switch# show running-config zoning
zoning defined-configuration alias alias1
member-entry 10:00:00:00:00:00:00:01
!
zoning enabled-configuration cfg-name ""
zoning enabled-configuration default-zone-access allaccess
zoning enabled-configuration cfg-action cfg-none
switch#
switch# configure terminal
Entering configuration mode terminal
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
145
Creating zones
switch(config)# no zoning defined-configuration alias alias1
switch(config)# do show running-config zoning
zoning enabled-configuration cfg-name ""
zoning enabled-configuration default-zone-access allaccess
zoning enabled-configuration cfg-action cfg-none
switch(config)# zoning enabled-configuration cfg-action cfg-save
Creating zones
Consider the following topics when creating zones.
Creating a zone
A zone cannot persist without any zone members. When you create a new zone, the zoning definedconfiguration zone command places you in a command subconfiguration mode where you can add
the first zone member entry. You can specify multiple members by separating each member from the
next by a semicolon (;).
NOTE
Zones without any zone members cannot exist in volatile memory. They are deleted when the
transaction commits successfully.
The following procedure adds a new zone to the defined configuration.
1. In privileged EXEC mode, enter the show name-server detail command to obtain the WWNs of
servers and targets available in the Brocade VCS Fabric.
2. Enter the configure terminal command to enter global configuration mode.
3. Enter the zoning defined-configuration zone command and enter a new zone name to add a new
zone.
A subconfiguration mode prompt appears.
4. Enter the subconfiguration mode member-entry command to specify at least one member entry.
The member entry must be specified as a port WWN, a node WWN, or an alias. You can mix
WWNs and aliases.
Add multiple members in one operation by separating each member entry with a semicolon (;). No
spaces are allowed after the semicolon.
5. Enter the exit command to return to global configuration mode.
6. Enter the zoning enabled-configuration cfg-action cfg-save command to save the modified
configuration to nonvolatile memory.
Example of creating a zone with two members, a WWN and an alias:
switch# show name-server detail
PID: 012100
Port Name: 10:00:00:05:1E:ED:95:38
Node Name: 20:00:00:05:1E:ED:95:38
(output truncated)
switch# configure terminal
Entering configuration mode terminal
switch(config)# zoning defined-configuration zone zone1
switch(config-zone-zone1)# member-entry 20:00:00:05:1E:ED:95:38;alias2
switch(config-zone-zone1)# exit
switch(config)# zoning enabled-configuration cfg-action cfg-save
146
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Adding a member to a zone
Adding a member to a zone
1. In privileged EXEC mode, enter the show name-server detail command to list the WWNs of devices
and targets available on the Brocade VCS Fabric cluster.
2. Enter the configure terminal command to enter global configuration mode.
3. Enter the zoning defined-configuration zone command and enter the name of an existing zone.
A subconfiguration mode prompt appears.
4. Enter the subconfiguration mode member-entry command and specify the member you want to add.
The new member can be specified by a port WWN, a node WWN, or a zone alias.
Add multiple members in one operation by separating each member with a semicolon (;).
5. Enter the exit command to return to the global configuration mode.
6. Enter the zoning enabled-configuration cfg-action cfg-save command to save the modified
configuration to nonvolatile memory.
Example of adding three members to a zone, two node WWNs and an alias:
switch# show name-server detail
PID: 012100
Port Name: 50:05:07:61:00:1b:62:ed
Node Name: 50:05:07:61:00:1b:62:ed
(output truncated)
PID: 012200
Port Name: 50:05:07:61:00:09:20:b4
Node Name: 50:05:07:61:00:09:20:b4
(output truncated)
switch# configure terminal
Entering configuration mode terminal
switch(config)# zoning defined-configuration zone zone1
switch(config-zone-zone1)# member-entry 50:05:07:61:00:1b:62:ed;
50:05:07:61:00:09:20:b4;alias3
switch(config-zone-zone1)# exit
switch(config)# zoning enabled-configuration cfg-action cfg-save
Removing a member from a zone
1. In privileged EXEC mode, enter the configure terminal command to enter global configuration
mode.
2. Enter the zoning defined-configuration zone command and enter the name of the zone from which
you want to remove a member.
A subconfiguration mode prompt appears.
3. Enter the subconfiguration mode no member-entry parameter and specify the WWN or the alias of
the member you want to remove.
You can remove only one member at a time. To remove more than one member, you must issue the
no member-entry command for each member you want to remove.
4. Enter the exit command to return to global configuration mode.
5. Enter the zoning enabled-configuration cfg-action cfg-save command to save the modified
configuration to nonvolatile memory.
NOTE
The parent configuration is removed when the last child object is removed, irrespective of the save
operation.
Example of removing more than one member from a zone:
switch# configure terminal
Entering configuration mode terminal
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
147
Deleting a zone
switch(config)# zoning defined-configuration zone zone1
switch(config-zone-zone1)# no member-entry 50:05:07:61:00:09:20:b4
switch(config-zone-zone1)# no member-entry alias3
switch(config-zone-zone1)# exit
switch(config)# zoning enabled-configuration cfg-action cfg-save
Deleting a zone
Before deleting a zone, ensure that the zone is not a member of any enabled zone configuration.
Although the deletion will proceed in RAM, you will not be able to save the configuration to nonvolatile
memory if an enabled zone configuration has the deleted zone as a member.
1. In privileged EXEC mode, enter the show running-config zoning defined-configuration
command and verify that the zone you want to delete is not a member of an enabled zone
configuration. If the zone is a member of an enabled zone configuration, remove it.
2. Enter the configure terminal command to enter the global configuration mode.
3. Enter the no zoning defined-configuration zone command and enter the name of the zone you
want to delete.
4. Enter the zoning enabled-configuration cfg-action cfg-save command to save the modified
configuration to nonvolatile memory.
NOTE
The parent configuration is removed when the last child object is removed, irrespective of the save
operation.
Example of removing a zone from the defined configuration:
switch# show running-config zoning defined-configuration
zoning defined-configuration zone zone1
member-entry 10:00:00:00:00:00:00:01
!
zoning defined-configuration zone zone2
member-entry 10:00:00:00:00:00:00:02
!
switch# configure terminal
Entering configuration mode terminal
switch(config)# no zoning defined-configuration zone zone2
switch(config)# zoning enabled-configuration cfg-action cfg-save
Updating flash ...
switch(config)# exit
switch# show running-config zoning defined-configuration
zoning defined-configuration zone zone1
member-entry 10:00:00:00:00:00:00:01
Managing zones
Consider the following topics when managing zones.
Viewing the defined configuration
To view the defined configuration, in privileged EXEC mode enter the show running-config zoning
defined-configuration command.
For each configuration, the command lists each member zone. For each zone, the command lists the
WWN or alias name of each member. The following example illustrates this.
switch# show running-config zoning defined-configuration
zoning defined-configuration cfg cfg0
member-zone zone_0_1
member-zone zone_0_2
148
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Viewing the enabled configuration
member-zone zone_0_3
member-zone zone_0_4
member-zone zone_same
!
zoning defined-configuration cfg cfg1
member-zone zone_1_1
member-zone zone_1_2
member-zone zone_1_3
member-zone zone_1_4
member-zone zone_same
!
zoning defined-configuration cfg cfg2
member-zone zone_2_1
member-zone zone_2_2
member-zone zone_2_3
member-zone zone_2_4
member-zone zone_same
!
zoning defined-configuration cfg cfg4
member-zone zone2
member-zone zone3
!
zoning defined-configuration zone zone0
member-entry 11:22:33:44:55:66:77:80
member-entry 11:22:33:44:55:66:77:81
member-entry 11:22:33:44:55:66:77:82
member-entry 11:22:33:44:55:66:77:83
member-entry 11:22:33:44:55:66:77:84
!
zoning defined-configuration zone zone1
member-entry 11:22:33:44:55:66:77:80
member-entry 11:22:33:44:55:66:77:81
member-entry 11:22:33:44:55:66:77:82
member-entry 11:22:33:44:55:66:77:83
member-entry 11:22:33:44:55:66:77:84
!
zoning defined-configuration zone zone2
member-entry 11:22:33:44:55:66:77:80
member-entry 11:22:33:44:55:66:77:81
member-entry 11:22:33:44:55:66:77:82
member-entry 11:22:33:44:55:66:77:83
member-entry 11:22:33:44:55:66:77:84
!
(output truncated)
Viewing the enabled configuration
To view the enabled configuration, in privileged EXEC mode enter the show zoning enabledconfiguration command. The following information about the enabled configuration is displayed:
• The name of the configuration
• The configuration action
• The mode of the default zone — the mode that will be active if you disable the enabled configuration
NOTE
In Network OS 4.0.0 and later, the enabled-zone output is no longer available from the show runningconfig zoning enabled-configuration enabled-zone command. It is now available from the show
running-config zoning enabled-configuration command.
The configuration name has CFG_MARKER asterisk (*) appended to it if an outstanding transaction
exists; the asterisk is not present if no outstanding transaction exists. Similarly, the configuration action
is flagged as "cfg-save" if no outstanding transaction exists; "cfg-none" indicates that an outstanding
transaction exists. A CFG_MARKER flag is appended to the configuration if the enabled configuration
does not exactly match the defined configuration. This scenario occurs when you have an enabled
configuration and make changes to the defined-configuration, and then, instead of enabling the defined
configuration, you issue the cfg-save command.
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
149
Creating a zone configuration
CAUTION
When edits are made to the defined configuration, and those edits affect a currently enabled
zone configuration, issuing a "cfg-save" command makes the enabled configuration effectively
stale. Until the enabled configuration is reenabled, the merging of new RBridges into the
cluster is not recommended. This merging may cause unpredictable results, with the potential
for mismatched enabled-zoning configurations among the RBridges in the cluster.
Example of viewing the zoning enabled configuration:
switch# show zoning enabled-configuration
zoning enabled-configuration cfg-name cfg1
zoning enabled-configuration enabled-zone zone1 member-entry 10:00:00:00:00:00:00:01
zoning enabled-configuration enabled-zone zone2 member-entry 10:00:00:00:00:00:00:02
Creating a zone configuration
A zone configuration cannot persist without any member zones. When creating a new zone
configuration, the zoning defined-configuration cfg command places you in a command subconfiguration mode where you must add at least one member zone. While zone configurations without
any member zones can exist in volatile memory, they are deleted when the transaction commits
successfully.
The following procedure adds a new zone configuration to the defined configuration.
1. In privileged EXEC mode, enter the configure terminal command to enter global configuration
mode.
2. Enter the zoning defined-configuration cfg command and enter a new configuration name.
A subconfiguration mode prompt appears.
3. Enter the member-zone subconfiguration mode command and specify the name of at least one
zone.
Add multiple zones in one operation by separating each zone name with a semicolon (;).
4. Enter the exit command to return to global configuration mode.
5. Enter the zoning enabled-configuration cfg-action cfg-save command to save the modified
configuration to nonvolatile memory.
Example of creating a zone configuration with one member zone:
switch# configure terminal
Entering configuration mode terminal
switch(config)# zoning defined-configuration cfg config1
switch(config-cfg-config1)# member-zone zone1
switch(config-cfg-config1)# exit
switch(config)# zoning enabled-configuration cfg-action cfg-save
NOTE
Zone aliases are not valid zone configuration members. Adding an alias to an existing zone
configuration will not be blocked. However, the attempt to enable a zone configuration that contains
aliases will fail with an appropriate error message.
Adding a zone to a zone configuration
1. In privileged EXEC mode, enter the configure terminal command to enter global configuration
mode.
2. Enter the zoning defined-configuration cfg command and enter the name of the configuration to
which you want to add zones.
150
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Removing a zone from a zone configuration
The command prompt changes to indicate a subconfiguration mode.
3. Enter the member-zone subconfiguration mode command and specify the name of at least one
member zone.
Add multiple zones in one operation by separating each zone name with a semicolon (;).
4. Enter the exit command to return to global configuration mode.
5. Enter the zoning enabled-configuration cfg-action cfg-save command to save the modified
configuration to nonvolatile memory.
Example of adding two zones to config1:
switch# configure terminal
Entering configuration mode terminal
switch(config)# zoning defined-configuration cfg config1
switch(config-cfg-config1)# member-zone zone2;zone3
switch(config-cfg-config1)# exit
switch(config)# zoning enabled-configuration cfg-action cfg-save
Removing a zone from a zone configuration
1. In privileged EXEC mode, enter the configure terminal command to enter global configuration
mode.
2. Enter the zoning defined-configuration cfg command and enter the name of the configuration from
which you want to remove a zone.
The command prompt changes to indicate a subconfiguration mode.
3. Enter the no member-zone subconfiguration mode command and specify the name of the zone you
want to remove from the configuration.
You can remove only one member at a time. To remove more than one member, you must issue the
no member-zone command for each member you want to remove.
4. Enter the exit command to return to global configuration mode.
5. Enter the zoning enabled-configuration cfg-action cfg-save command to save the modified
configuration to nonvolatile memory.
NOTE
The parent configuration is removed when the last child object is removed, irrespective of the save
operation.
Example of removing two zones from config1:
switch# configure terminal
Entering configuration mode terminal
switch(config)# zoning defined-configuration cfg config1
switch(config-cfg-config1)# no member-zone zone2
switch(config-cfg-config1)# no member-zone zone3
switch(config-cfg-config1)# exit
switch(config)# zoning enabled-configuration cfg-action cfg-save
Enabling a zone configuration
Only one zone configuration can be enabled in a VCS Fabric. The following procedure selects a
configuration from the defined configuration and makes it the enabled configuration. If a zone
configuration is currently enabled, the newly enabled configuration replaces the previously enabled
configuration.
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
151
Disabling a zone configuration
1. In privileged EXEC mode, enter the configure terminal command to enter global configuration
mode.
2. Enter the zoning enabled-configuration cfg-name command with the name of the configuration
you want to enable.
In addition to enabling the specified configuration, this command also saves any changes made to
the zoning database in volatile memory to nonvolatile memory. The saved configuration is
persistent.
If the configuration refers to a nonexistent zone or a zone with no members assigned to it, the
operation fails and the command returns an error message. The following example enables config1.
Example of enabling a zone configuration:
switch# configure terminal
Entering configuration mode terminal
switch(config)# zoning enabled-configuration cfg-name config1
Example of a failed enable operation:
The enable operation fails because the configuration contains a zone without members.
switch(config)# do show running-config zoning
zoning defined-configuration cfg cfg1
member-zone-zone1
member-zone zone2
!
zoning defined-configuration zone zone1 <------------Zone with no member
!
zoning defined-configuration zone zone2
member-entry 20:03:00:11:0d:bc:76:09
!
zoning enabled-configuration cfg-name ""
zoning enabled-configuration default-zone-access allaccess
zoning enabled-configuration cfg-action cfg-none
switch(config)# zoning enabled-configuration cfg-name cfg1
% Error: Command Failed. Cfg contains empty zone object "zone1"
Disabling a zone configuration
Disabling the currently enabled configuration returns the fabric to no-zoning mode. All devices can
then access one another or not at all, depending on the default zone access mode setting.
NOTE
For fabrics with many devices, Brocade recommends setting the default zone access mode to No
Access before disabling a zone configuration to avoid RSCN storms.
1. In privileged EXEC mode, enter the configure terminal command to enter global configuration
mode.
2. Enter the no zoning enabled-configuration cfg-name command.
In addition to disabling the currently enabled configuration, this command also saves any changes
made to the zoning database in volatile memory to nonvolatile memory. The saved configuration is
persistent.
Example of disabling a zone configuration:
switch# configure terminal
Entering configuration mode terminal
switch(config)# no zoning enabled-configuration cfg-name
Deleting a zone configuration
The following procedure deletes a zone configuration from the defined configuration.
152
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Clearing changes to a zone configuration
1. In privileged EXEC mode, enter the configure terminal command to enter global configuration
mode.
2. Enter the no zoning defined-configuration cfg command and the name of the zone configuration
you want to delete.
3. Enter the zoning enabled-configuration cfg-action cfg-save command to save the modified
defined configuration to nonvolatile memory.
Example of deleting a zone configuration:
switch# configure terminal
Entering configuration mode terminal
switch(config)# no zoning defined-configuration cfg cfg2
switch(config)# zoning enabled-configuration cfg-action cfg-save
NOTE
If you try to delete the enabled configuration from the defined configuration, the zoning enabledconfiguration cfg-action cfg-save command returns an error. However, if you commit the
transaction with the zoning enabled-configuration cfg-action cfg-disable command, the operation
proceeds without error.
Clearing changes to a zone configuration
The following procedure aborts all pending transactions and removes all uncommitted operations from
the database. It returns the configuration in volatile memory to the state it was in when a zoning
enabled-configuration cfg-action cfg-save or zoning enabled-configuration cfg-name command
was last executed successfully.
1. In privileged EXEC mode, enter the configure terminal command to enter the global configuration
mode.
2. Enter the zoning enabled-configuration cfg-action cfg-transaction-abort command.
Example of aborting a transaction:
switch# configure terminal
Entering configuration mode terminal
switch(config)# zoning enabled-configuration cfg-action cfg-transaction-abort
Clearing all zone configurations
The following procedure clears all zone configurations from the defined configuration and enables the
default zone.
NOTE
For fabrics with many devices, Brocade recommends setting the default access mode to No Access
before clearing all zone configurations to avoid RSCN storms.
1. In privileged EXEC mode, enter the configure terminal command to enter global configuration
mode.
2. Enter the zoning enabled-configuration cfg-action cfg-clear command.
3. Enter one of the following commands, depending on whether an enabled zone configuration exists:
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
153
Backing up the zone configuration
• If no enabled zone configuration exists, enter the zoning enabled-configuration cfg-action
cfg-save command.
• If an enabled zone configuration exists, enter the no zoning enabled-configuration cfg-name
command to disable and clear the zone configuration in nonvolatile memory for all switches in
the fabric.
switch# configure terminal
Entering configuration mode terminal
switch(config)# zoning enabled-configuration cfg-action cfg-clear
switch(config)# no zoning enabled-configuration cfg-name
Backing up the zone configuration
To back up your zoning configuration you copy it to a file and store it on a server or on an attached
USB device. You can use the copy to restore the configuration if needed.
NOTE
Ensure that no transaction is pending before you perform the copy operation, otherwise failures will
occur when you attempt to restore configuration entries from the saved file. Any transaction data
would cause such a failure, including empty configuration definitions or empty zones.
1. In privileged EXEC mode, enter the configure terminal command to enter global configuration
mode.
2. Empty the transaction buffer by either committing the transaction to nonvolatile memory or aborting
the transaction.
• To commit the transaction, enter the zoning enabled-configuration cfg-action cfg-save
command, the zoning enabled configuration cfg-name command, or the zoning enabledconfiguration cfg-action cfg-disable command.
• To abort the transaction, enter the zoning enabled-configuration cfg-action cfg-transactionabort command.
3. Enter the exit command to return to privileged EXEC mode.
4. Enter the copy command. For the source file, use running-config . For the destination file, use the
file name you want the configuration copied to.
Example of making a backup copy on a USB device:
switch# configure terminal
Entering configuration mode terminal
switch(config)# zoning enabled-configuration cfg-action cfg-save
switch(config)# exit
switch# copy running-config usb://myconfig
Restoring a configuration from backup
When you restore a configuration from backup and add to the running configuration, the zone
configuration identified in the backup copy as the enabled configuration becomes the new enabled
configuration.
In privileged EXEC mode, enter the copy command. For the source file use the file where the saved
configuration is stored. For the destination file, use running-config.
This operation updates the defined configuration in RAM.
NOTE
The copy command adds to the defined configuration. It does not replace the defined configuration.
154
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Zone configuration scenario example
The following example adds the configuration in the file named myconfig on the attached USB device to
the defined configuration.
switch# copy usb://myconfig running-config
Zone configuration scenario example
This example creates the zone configuration shown below. The example assumes that two hosts need
access to the same storage device, while each host needs private storage of its own. You create two
zones: Zone A contains Host 1, its private storage device, and the shared storage device; Zone B
contains Host 2, its private storage device, and the shared storage device. In addition, you create two
zone configurations: cfg1 in which only Zone A is effective; cfg2, in which both zones are effective.
FIGURE 28 Zone configuration example
1. Log in to any switch in the Brocade VCS Fabric.
2. Enter the show name-server detail command to list the available WWNs,
3. Enter the configure terminal command to enter global configuration mode.
4. Enter the zoning defined-configuration zone command to create Zone A.
5. Enter the zoning defined-configuration zone command to create Zone B.
6. Enter the zoning defined-configuration cfg command to create the configuration cfg1 with Zone A
as its only member.
7. Enter the zoning defined-configuration cfg command to create the configuration cfg2 with Zone A
and Zone B as its members.
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
155
Merging zones
8. Enter the zoning running-config defined-configuration command to view the defined zone
configuration.
9. Enter the zoning enabled-configuration cfg-name command to enable cfg2.
10.Verify the enabled zoning configuration, by means of the show zoning enabled-configuration
command.
switch# show name-server detail
switch# configure terminal
Entering configuration mode terminal
switch(config)# zoning defined-configuration zone ZoneA
switch(config-zone-ZoneA)# member-entry 20:00:00:05:1e:ed:
95:38;50:05:07:61:00:09:20:b4;50:05:07:61:00:1b:62:ed
switch(config-zone-ZoneA)# exit
switch(config)# zoning defined-configuration zone ZoneB
switch(config-zone-ZoneB)# member-entry 20:00:00:05:1e:ed:
18:c3;50:05:07:61:00:22:18:9b;50:05:07:61:00:1b:62:ed
switch(config-zone-ZoneB)# exit
switch(config)# zoning defined-configuration cfg cfg1
switch(config-cfg-cfg1)# member-zone ZoneA
switch(config-cfg-cfg1)# exit
switch(config)# zoning defined-configuration cfg cfg2
switch(config-cfg-cfg2)# member-zone ZoneA;ZoneB
switch(config-cfg-cfg2)# exit
switch(config)# zoning enabled-configuration cfg-name cfg2
switch(config)# exit
switch# show zoning enabled-configuration
zoning enabled-configuration cfg cfg1
member-zone ZoneA
!
zoning enabled-configuration cfg cfg2
member-zone ZoneA
member-zone ZoneB
!
zoning enabled-configuration zone ZoneA
member-entry 20:00:00:05:1e:ed:95:38
member-entry 50:05:07:61:00:09:20:b4
member-entry 50:05:07:61:00:1b:62:ed
!
zoning enabled-configuration zone ZoneB
member-entry 20:00:00:05:1e:ed:18:c3
member-entry 50:05:07:61:00:22:18:9b
member-entry 50:05:07:61:00:1b:62:ed
Merging zones
This section provides the background needed to merge zones successfully. The tables at the end of
this section summarize scenarios involving Switch A and Switch B and the results to be expected
following a merge.
Preconditions for zone merging
When a new switch is added to a VCS fabric, it automatically inherits the zone configuration
information from the fabric. You can verify the zone configuration on any switch by using the
procedure described in Viewing the defined configuration on page 148. Take care to avoid
mismatched enabled-configuration scenarios.
CAUTION
When edits are made to the defined configuration, and those edits affect a currently enabled
zone configuration, issuing a "cfg-save" command makes the enabled configuration effectively
stale. Until the enabled configuration is reenabled, the merging of new RBridges into the
cluster is not recommended. This merging may cause unpredictable results, with the potential
for mismatched enabled-zoning configurations among the RBridges in the cluster.
156
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Administering Zones
If you are adding a switch that is already configured for zoning, you must clear the zone configuration
on that switch before connecting it to the zoned fabric. Refer to Clearing all zone configurations on page
153 for instructions.
Adding a new fabric that has no zone configuration information to an existing zoned fabric is very similar
to adding a new switch. All switches in the new fabric inherit the zone configuration data. If the existing
fabric has an effective zone configuration, then the same configuration becomes the effective
configuration for all switches in the added fabric.
NOTE
To prevent an unwanted zone merge, use the no fabric isl enable command on ISL interfaces instead
of the shutdown command on tengigabitethernet ports.
Before the new fabric can merge successfully, it must satisfy the following criteria:
• Before merging
‐
Ensure that all switches adhere to the default zone merge rules as described in Zone
merging scenarios on page 158.
‐
Ensure that the enabled and defined zone configurations match. If they do not match and
you merge with another switch, the merge might be successful, but unpredictable zoning
and routing behavior can occur. Refer to the Caution in this section and refer to Viewing the
defined configuration on page 148.
• Merging and segmentation
The system checks each port as it comes online to determine whether the ports should be segmented.
E_Ports come online on power up, enabling a switch, or adding a new switch, and the system checks
the zone database to detect if the two database that can be merged safely. Refer to Zone merging
scenarios on page 158.
Observe the following rules when merging zones:
• Merging rules
‐
Local and adjacent configurations: If the local and adjacent zone database configurations
are the same, they will remain unchanged after the merge.
‐
Enabled configurations: If there is an enabled configuration between two switches, the
enabled zone configurations must match.
‐
Zone membership: If a zoning object has the same name in both the local and adjacent
defined configurations, the content and order of the members are important.
‐
Objects in adjacent configurations: If a zoning object appears in an adjacent defined
configuration, but not in the local defined configuration, the zoning object is added to the
local defined configuration. The modified zone database must fit in the nonvolatile memory
area allotted for the zone database.
‐
Local configuration modification: If a local defined configuration is modified because of a
merge, the new zone database is propagated to the other switches within the merge
request.
• Merging two fabrics
For best practices, the default-zone access modes should match, although this is not a requirement.
Refer to Zone merging scenarios on page 158.
If the two fabrics have conflicting zone configurations, they will not merge. If the two fabrics cannot join,
the ISLs between the switches will segment.
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
157
Fabric segmentation and zoning
The transaction state after the merge depends on which switch is elected as the principal RBridge.
The newly elected principal RBridge retains the same transaction information it had before the merge.
Transaction data is discarded from any switch that lost its principal status during the merge.
• Merge conflicts
When a merge conflict is present, a merge does not take place and the ISLs will segment.
If the fabrics have different zone configuration data, the system attempts to merge the two sets of zone
configuration data. If the zones cannot merge, the ISLs will be segmented.
• A merge is not possible under any of the following conditions:
‐
‐
Configuration mismatch: Zoning is enabled in both fabrics and the zone configurations that
are enabled are different in each fabric.
Zone Database Size: The zone database size exceeds the maximum limit of another
switch.
NOTE
If the zone members on two switches are not listed in the same order, the configuration is considered
a mismatch, and the switches will segment from the fabric. For example: cfg1 = z1; z2 is different
from cfg1 = z2; z1 , even though the members of the configuration are the same. If zone
members on two switches have the same names defined in the configuration, make sure the zone
members are listed in the same order.
Fabric segmentation and zoning
If the connections between two fabrics are no longer available, the fabric segments into two separate
fabrics. Each new fabric retains the previous zone configuration.
If the connections between two fabrics are replaced and no changes have been made to the zone
configuration in either of the two fabrics, the two fabrics can merge back into one single fabric. If any
changes that cause a conflict have been made to either zone configuration, a fabric merge may fail.
Zone merging scenarios
The following tables provide information on merging zones and the expected results.
TABLE 27 Zone merging scenarios: Defined and enabled configurations
Description
Switch A
Switch B
Expected results
Switch A has a defined
configuration.
defined:cfg1 zone1:
10:00:00:90:69:00:00:8a;
10:00:00:90:69:00:00:8b
defined: none
Configuration from Switch A
propagates throughout the fabric in an
inactive state, because the
configuration is not enabled.
Switch B does not have a
defined configuration.
Switch A has a defined and
enabled configuration.
Switch B has a defined
configuration but no enabled
configuration.
158
enabled: none
enabled: none
defined: cfg1 zone1:
10:00:00:90:69:00:00:8a;
10:00:00:90:69:00:00:8b
defined: cfg1 zone1:
10:00:00:90:69:00:00:8a;
10:00:00:90:69:00:00:8b
enabled: cfg1
enabled: none
Configuration from Switch A
propagates throughout the fabric. The
configuration is enabled after the
merge in the fabric.
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Administering Zones
TABLE 27 Zone merging scenarios: Defined and enabled configurations (Continued)
Description
Switch A
Switch B
Expected results
Switch A and Switch B
have the same defined
configuration. Neither have
an enabled configuration.
defined: cfg1 zone1:
10:00:00:90:69:00:00:8a;
10:00:00:90:69:00:00:8b
defined: cfg1 zone1:
10:00:00:90:69:00:00:8a;
10:00:00:90:69:00:00:8b
No change (clean merge).
enabled: none
enabled: none
Switch A and Switch B
have the same defined and
enabled configuration.
defined: cfg1 zone1:
10:00:00:90:69:00:00:8a;
10:00:00:90:69:00:00:8b
defined: cfg1 zone1:
10:00:00:90:69:00:00:8a;
10:00:00:90:69:00:00:8b
enabled: cfg1:
enabled: cfg1:
defined: none
defined:cfg1 zone1:
10:00:00:90:69:00:00:8a;
10:00:00:90:69:00:00:8b
Switch A does not have a
defined configuration.
enabled: none
Switch B has a defined
configuration.
Switch A does not have a
defined configuration.
No change (clean merge).
Switch A absorbs the configuration
from the fabric.
enabled: none
defined: none
enabled: none
Switch B has a defined and
enabled configuration.
defined:cfg1 zone1:
10:00:00:90:69:00:00:8a;
10:00:00:90:69:00:00:8b
Switch A absorbs the configuration
from the fabric, with cfg1 as the
enabled configuration.
enabled: cfg1
Switch A and Switch B
have the same defined
configuration. Only Switch B
has an enabled
configuration.
defined: cfg1 zone1:
10:00:00:90:69:00:00:8a;
10:00:00:90:69:00:00:8b
defined: cfg1 zone1:
10:00:00:90:69:00:00:8a;
10:00:00:90:69:00:00:8b
enabled: none
enabled: cfg1
Switch A and Switch B
have different defined
configurations. Neither have
an enabled configuration.
defined: cfg2 zone2:
10:00:00:90:69:00:00:8c;
10:00:00:90:69:00:00:8d
defined: cfg1 zone1:
10:00:00:90:69:00:00:8a;
10:00:00:90:69:00:00:8b
enabled: none
enabled: none
Clean merge, with cfg1 as the enabled
configuration.
Clean merge. The new configuration
will be a composite of the two.
defined: cfg1 zone1:
10:00:00:90:69:00:00:8a;
10:00:00:90:69:00:00:8b
defined: cfg2 zone2:
10:00:00:90:69:00:00:8c;
10:00:00:90:69:00:00:8d
enabled: none
Switch A and Switch B
defined: cfg2 zone2:
have different defined
10:00:00:90:69:00:00:8c;
configurations. Switch B has 10:00:00:90:69:00:00:8d
an enabled configuration.
enabled: none
defined: cfg1 zone1:
10:00:00:90:69:00:00:8a;
10:00:00:90:69:00:00:8b
Switch A does not have a
defined configuration.
defined: cfg1 zone1:
10:00:00:90:69:00:00:8a;
10:00:00:90:69:00:00:8b
defined: none
enabled: none
Switch B has a defined
configuration and an enabled
configuration, but the
enabled configuration is
different from the defined
configuration.
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Clean merge. The new configuration is
a composite of both, with cfg1 as the
enabled configuration.
enabled: cfg1
Clean merge. Switch A absorbs the
defined configuration from the fabric,
with cfg1 as the effective configuration.
effective: cfg1
In this case, however, the effective
configurations for Switch A and
zone1: 10:00:00:90:69:00:00:8a; Switch B are different. You should
10:00:00:90:69:00:00:8b
issue a zoning enabled-configuration
zone2: 10:00:00:90:69:00:00:8c, cfg-name command from the switch
with the proper effective configuration.
10:00:00:90:69:00:00:8d
159
Administering Zones
TABLE 28 Zone merging scenarios: Different content
Description
Switch A
Switch B
Expected results
Enabled configuration
mismatch.
defined: cfg1 zone1:
10:00:00:90:69:00:00:8a;
10:00:00:90:69:00:00:8b
defined: cfg2 zone2:
10:00:00:90:69:00:00:8c;
10:00:00:90:69:00:00:8d
Fabric segments due to
mismatching zone
configurations
enabled: cfg1 zone1:
10:00:00:90:69:00:00:8a;
10:00:00:90:69:00:00:8b
enabled: cfg2 zone2:
10:00:00:90:69:00:00:8c;
10:00:00:90:69:00:00:8d
defined: cfg1 zone1:
10:00:00:90:69:00:00:8a;
10:00:00:90:69:00:00:8b
defined: cfg1 zone1:
10:00:00:90:69:00:00:8c;
10:00:00:90:69:00:00:8d
enabled: irrelevant
enabled: irrelevant
Configuration content
mismatch.
Fabric segments due to
mismatching zone content
TABLE 29 Zone merging scenarios: Different names
Description
Switch A
Switch B
Expected results
Same content, different
enabled configuration
name.
defined: cfg1 zone1:
10:00:00:90:69:00:00:8a;
10:00:00:90:69:00:00:8b
defined:cfg2 zone1:
10:00:00:90:69:00:00:8a;
10:00:00:90:69:00:00:8b
Fabric segments due to
mismatching zone
configurations
enabled: cfg1 zone1:
10:00:00:90:69:00:00:8a;
10:00:00:90:69:00:00:8b
enabled: cfg2 zone1:
10:00:00:90:69:00:00:8a;
10:00:00:90:69:00:00:8b
defined: cfg1 zone1:
10:00:00:90:69:00:00:8a;
10:00:00:90:69:00:00:8b
defined: cfg1 zone2:
10:00:00:90:69:00:00:8a;
10:00:00:90:69:00:00:8b
enabled: irrelevant
enabled: irrelevant
defined: cfg1zone1:
10:00:00:90:69:00:00:8a;
10:00:00:90:69:00:00:8b;
10:00:00:90:69:00:00:8c
defined: cfg1zone1:
10:00:00:90:69:00:00:8b;
10:00:00:90:69:00:00:8c;
10:00:00:90:69:00:00:8a
enabled: irrelevant
enabled: irrelevant
effective: zone1: MARKETING
enabled: cfg1: MARKETING
Same content, different
zone name.
Same name, same
content, different order.
Same name, different
types.
Fabric segments due to
mismatching zone content
Fabric segments due to
mismatching zone content
Fabric segments due to
mismatching types
TABLE 30 Zone merging scenarios: Default access mode
Description
Switch A
Switch B
Expected results
Different default zone
access mode settings.
default zone: All Access
default zone: No Access
Clean merge. No Access takes precedence and
default zone configuration from Switch B
propagates to fabric.
default zone: No Access
Same default zone access
mode settings.
default zone: All Access
default zone: All Access
Clean merge. Default zone configuration is All
Access in the fabric.
Same default zone access
mode settings.
default zone: No Access
default zone: No Access
Clean merge. Default zone configuration is No
Access in the fabric.
160
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Configuring LSAN zones: Device-sharing example
TABLE 30 Zone merging scenarios: Default access mode (Continued)
Description
Switch A
Switch B
Enabled zone
configuration.
No enabled configuration. enabled: cfg2
Enabled zone
configuration.
No enabled configuration. enabled: cfg2
Enable zone configuration.
enabled: cfg1
No enabled configuration.
default zone: No Access
default zone: No Access
enabled: cfg1
No enabled configuration.
default zone: All Access
default zone: No Access
default zone = All Access default zone: All Access or No
Access
default zone = No Access default zone: All Access
Enable zone configuration.
Expected results
Clean merge. Enabled zone configuration and
default zone mode from Switch B propagates to
fabric.
Fabric segments because Switch A has a
hidden zone configuration (No Access) activated
and Switch B has an explicit zone configuration
activated.
Clean merge. Enabled zone configuration from
Switch A propagates to fabric.
Fabric segments. You can resolve the zone
conflict by changing the default zone to No
Access on Switch A.
Configuring LSAN zones: Device-sharing example
The following example shows LSANs sharing devices in separate fabrics. The procedure illustrates the
creation of two LSAN zones (called lsan_zone_fabric_02 and lsan_zone_fabric_01), which involve the
following devices and connections:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
RBridge1 and the host in a Network OS fabric named fabric_01.
Switch2, Target A, and Target B in a Fabric OS fabric named fabric_02.
RBridge1 is connected by one of its FC_Ports to an EX_Port on the FC router.
Switch2 is connected to the FC router using another EX_Port or VEX_Port.
Host has WWN 10:00:00:00:c9:2b:c9:0c (connected to RBridge1).
Target A has WWN 50:05:07:61:00:5b:62:ed (connected to switch2).
Target B has WWN 50:05:07:61:00:49:20:b4 (connected to switch2).
The following illustration shows the connectivity.
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
161
Administering Zones
FIGURE 29 LSAN zones example
The following example steps create this set of LSAN zones.
1. Obtain the host WWN in fabric_01:
a)
b)
Log in to any switch in fabric_01.
On the fabric_01 switch, enter the show name-server detail command to list the WWN of
the host (10:00:00:00:c9:2b:c9:0c).
NOTE
The show name-server detail output displays both the port WWN and node WWN; the
port WWN must be used for LSANs.
switch# show name-server detail
PID: 012100
Port Name: 10:00:00:00:c9:2b:c9:0c
Node Name: 20:00:00:00:c9:2b:c9:0c
SCR: 3
FC4s: FCP
PortSymb: [27] "Brocade-1020|2.3.0.0|localhost.localdomain|Red Hat
Enterprise Linux Server release 5.5"
NodeSymb: NULL
Fabric Port Name: 20:21:00:05:1E:CD:79:7A
Permanent Port Name: 10:00:00:00:c9:2b:c9:0c
Device type: Physical Initiator
Interface: Fcoe 1/1/9
Physical Interface: Te 1/0/9
Share Area: No
Redirect: No
2. Obtain the target WWNS in fabric_02:
a)
b)
Log in as admin on switch2 in fabric_02.
On fabric_02, enter the nsShow command to list Target A (50:05:07:61:00:5b:62:ed) and
Target B (50:05:07:61:00:49:20:b4).
switch:admin> nsshow
{
Type Pid
COS PortName
NodeName
TTL(sec)
NL
0508e8; 3; 50:05:07:61:00:5b:62:ed; 50:05:07:61:00:1b:62:ed; na
FC4s: FCP [IBM
DNEF-309170
F90F]
162
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Administering Zones
Fabric Port Name: 20:08:00:05:1e:34:11:e5
Permanent Port Name: 50:05:07:61:00:5b:62:ed
NL
0508ef; 3; 50:05:07:61:00:49:20:b4; 50:05:07:61:00:09:20:b4; na
FC4s: FCP [IBM
DNEF-309170
F90F]
Fabric Port Name: 20:08:00:05:1e:34:11:e5
Permanent Port Name: 50:05:07:61:00:49:20:b4
The Local Name Server has 2 entries }
3. Create an LSAN zone in the Network OS fabric (fabric_01)
4. In fabric_01, enter the zoning defined-configuration zone command to create the LSAN
lsan_zone_fabric_01, and include the host.
switch# config terminal
switch(config)# zoning defined-configuration zone lsan_zone_fabric_01
switch(config-zone-lsan_zone_fabric_01)# member-entry 10:00:00:00:c9:2b:c9:0c
5. In fabric_01, add Target A to the LSAN.
switch(config-zone-lsan_zone_fabric_01)# member-entry 50:05:07:61:00:5b:62:ed
switch(config-zone-lsan_zone_fabric_01)# exit
6. In fabric_01, enter the zoning defined-configuration cfg and zoning enabled-configuration cfgname commands to add and enable the LSAN configuration.
switch(config)# zoning defined-configuration cfg zone_cfg
switch(config-cfg-zone_cfg)# member-zone lsan_zone_fabric_01
switch(config-cfg-zone_cfg)# exit
switch(config)# zoning enabled-configuration cfg_name zone_cfg
Create an LSAN zone in the Fabric OS fabric (fabric_02)
7. On switch2 (fabric_02), enter the zoneCreate command to create the LSAN lsan_zone_fabric2,
which includes the host (10:00:00:00:c9:2b:c9:0c), Target A (50:05:07:61:00:5b:62:ed) , and Target B
(50:05:07:61:00:49:20:b4).
switch:admin> zonecreate "lsan_zone_fabric_02", "10:00:00:00:c9:2b:c9:0c;
50:05:07:61:00:5b:62:ed;
50:05:07:61:00:49:20:b4"
8. On switch2 (fabric_02), enter the cfgShow command to verify that the zones are correct.
switch:admin> cfgshow
Defined configuration:
zone: lsan_zone_fabric_02
10:00:00:00:c9:2b:c9:0c;
50:05:07:61:00:5b:62:ed;
50:05:07:61:00:49:20:b4
Effective configuration:
no configuration in effect
9. On switch2 (fabric_02), enter the cfgAdd and cfgEnable commands to create and enable the LSAN
configuration.
switch:admin> cfgadd "zone_cfg", "lsan_zone_fabric_02"
switch:admin> cfgenable "zone_cfg"
You are about to enable a new zoning configuration.
This action will replace the old zoning configuration with the
current configuration selected.
Do you want to enable 'zone_cfg' configuration (yes, y, no, n): [no] y
zone config "zone_cfg" is in effect
Updating flash ...
Display the configuration on the FC router:
10.Log in as an admin and connect to the FC router.
11.On the FC router, enter the following commands to display information about the LSANs.
The lsanZoneShow -s command shows the LSAN.
switch:admin> lsanzoneshow -s
Fabric ID: 2 Zone Name: lsan_zone_fabric_02
10:00:00:00:c9:2b:c9:0c Imported
50:05:07:61:00:5b:62:ed EXIST
50:05:07:61:00:49:20:b4 EXIST
Fabric ID: 75 Zone Name: lsan_zone_fabric_01
10:00:00:00:c9:2b:c9:0c EXIST
50:05:07:61:00:5b:62:ed Imported
The fcrPhyDevShow command shows the physical devices in the LSAN.
switch:admin> fcrphydevshow
Device
WWN
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Physical
163
Administering Zones
Exists
PID
in Fabric
-------------------------------------------75
10:00:00:00:c9:2b:c9:0c
c70000
2
50:05:07:61:00:49:20:b4
0100ef
2
50:05:07:61:00:5b:62:ed
0100e8
Total devices displayed: 3
The fcrProxyDevShow command shows the proxy devices in the LSAN.
switch:admin> fcrproxydevshow
Proxy
WWN
Proxy Device Physical State
Created
PID Exists
PID
in Fabric
in Fabric
----------------------------------------------------------------------75
50:05:07:61:00:5b:62:ed 01f001
2
0100e8 Imported
2
10:00:00:00:c9:2b:c9:0c 02f000 75
c70000 Imported
Total devices displayed: 2
On the FC router, the host and Target A are imported, because both are defined by
lsan_zone_fabric_02 and lsan_zone_fabric_01. However, target B is defined by
lsan_zone_fabric_02 and is not imported because lsan_zone_fabric_01 does not allow it.
164
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Configuring Fibre Channel Ports
● Fibre Channel ports overview....................................................................................... 165
● Connecting to an FC Fabric through an FC Router...................................................... 166
● Fibre Channel port configuration...................................................................................167
Fibre Channel ports overview
Fibre Channel (FC) ports provide the ability to connect a Brocade VCS Fabric cluster to a Fibre Channel
switch in a Fabric OS network.
The FlexPort feature is the only method that a switch running Network OS 5.0.0 or later can connect FC
ports. For instructions on how to use FlexPort, refer to the "Configuring FlexPort" chapter of the Network
OS Layer 2 Switching Configuration Guide.
The following platforms are Flexport-capable:
•
•
•
•
Brocade VDX 2740
Brocade VDX 6740
Brocade VDX 6740T
Brocade VDX 6740T-1G
These connections can be regular but not long distance. The following Network OS Fibre Channel port
types are supported:
• E_Port: Can be used to connect only to an EX_Port on a FC SAN with Fibre Channel Routing
configured.
• F_Port:
‐
‐
Supports FC target connectivity (standards based F_Port).
Supports bidirectional traffic internally from VF_Port, or internal ISL port.
NOTE
You must enable fcoeport default for the interface for the Fibre Channel logins to be available to
connect to F_Ports.
• Auto (G_Port) — This is the default.
• N_port:
‐
Default port type in Access Gateway mode
‐
Available in Access Gateway mode only
‐
Supports bidirectional traffic internally from VF_Port.
‐
External connection to F_Port on a FC SAN
• VF_port:
‐
‐
For FCoE initiator or target connectivity.
Supports bidirectional traffic internally to E_Port, F_Port, VF_Port (all in FCF mode), and
N_Port (in AG mode).
FC ports can connect to a FC switch in a Fabric OS network through two methods:
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
165
Connecting to an FC Fabric through an FC Router
• Using an Inter-Switch Link (ISL) connection from an FC E_port on a Flexport-capable switch to a
FC router's EX_Port; this in turn connects to the FC switch in the Fabric OS network. The VDX FC
ports are configured as E_Ports for this connection. Refer to Connecting to an FC Fabric through an
FC Router on page 166.
• Using a direct connection from an FC port on a Flexport-capable switch to an F_Port on a FC router
in a Fabric OS network. The VDX FC ports are configured as N_Ports through the Access Gateway
feature. Refer to Using Access Gateway on page 173.
Connecting to an FC Fabric through an FC Router
FC ports on Flexport-capable switches can provide a connection to a FC switch in the FC SAN.
The FC ports on the Flexport-capable switch can be configured as FC E_Ports to connect with
EX_Ports on a FC router through Inter-Switch Links (ISL) links. In turn, EX_Ports on the FC router
connect to F_Ports on the FC Fabric switch. These connections provide support for zoning across
Network OS and Fabric OS fabric types, which can enable FCoE devices on the Brocade VCS Fabric
cluster to access SAN storage and services. Refer to Fibre Channel ports overview on page 165 for
information on how to create LSAN zones.
The following figure shows an FC connection between a Network OS fabric and Fibre Channel SAN.
NOTE
For details of Fibre Channel routing concepts, refer to the Fabric OS Administrator’s Guide
FIGURE 30 FC connection between a Network OS fabric and a Fibre Channel SAN
166
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Fibre Channel port configuration
Fibre Channel port configuration
Consider the topics discussed below when configuring Fibre Channel ports.
Using Fibre Channel commands
Network OS software provides the following high-level commands for managing Fibre Channel ports:
• interface FibreChannel - Global configuration mode command that allows you to enter the interface
Fibre Channel configuration submode where you can enter commands to activate and deactivate a
Fibre Channel port (no shutdown and shutdown commands) and to set port attributes (desiredistance, fill-word, isl-r_rdy, speed, trunk-enable, and vc-link-init commands).
• show running-config interface FibreChannel - A privileged EXEC mode command that displays
Fibre Channel port configuration information.
• show interface FibreChannel - A privileged EXEC mode command that displays hardware counters
that monitor activity and status of a Fibre Channel port.
Activating and deactivating Fibre Channel ports
When VCS mode is enabled and an FCoE license is installed, all FC ports are activated by default.
When enabling a switch for Access Gateway Mode, all FC ports are re-enabled as N_Ports.
Prerequisites for enabling Fibre Channel ports
Follow these steps before enabling a Fibre Channel port.
1. An FCoE license must be installed on the FlexPort-capable switch to allow Fibre Channel port
activation. Refer to the Network OS Software Licensing Guide for details about installing the FCoE
license. Once the FCoE license is installed, all Fibre Channel ports are activated by default.
2. The FlexPorts on the switch must be configured as fibre channel ports. For instructions on how to
use FlexPort, refer to the "Configuring FlexPort" chapter of the Network OS Layer 2 Switching
Configuration Guide and to the applicable hardware guides.
NOTE
Access Gateway is a feature available only on FlexPort-capable switches. When activated, all Fibre
Channel ports are re-enabled as N_Ports.
Enabling a Fibre Channel port
1. In privileged EXEC mode, enter the configure terminal command to enter global configuration
mode.
2. Enter the interface FibreChannel rbridge-id/slot/port command for the Fibre Channel port you want
to enable.
NOTE
You do not to be in RBridge ID configuration mode to disable or enable a Fibre Channel port. It is
recommended that you configure this on the principal switch.
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
167
Disabling a Fibre Channel port
A configuration submode prompt appears.
3. Enter the no shutdown command.
The following example enables port 1 in slot 0 of RBridge ID 8.
switch# configure terminal
Entering configuration mode terminal
switch(config)# interface FibreChannel 8/0/1
switch(config-if-fi-8/0/1)# no shutdown
Disabling a Fibre Channel port
1. In privileged EXEC mode, enter the configure terminal command to enter the global configuration
mode.
2. Enter the interface FibreChannel rbridge-id/slot/port command for the Fibre Channel port you want
to disable.
A configuration submode prompt appears.
3. Enter the shutdown command.
The following example disables port 1 in slot 0 of RBridge ID 8.
switch# configure terminal
Entering configuration mode terminal
switch(config)# interface FibreChannel 8/0/1
switch(conf-if-fi-8/0/1)# shutdown
Configuring and viewing Fibre Channel port attributes
This section introduces the options for configuring a variety of Fibre Channel port attributes and
confirming the status of those attributes.
Using Fibre Channel port commands
Network OS v2.1.1 and later allows you to configure and display the following attributes for a Fibre
Channel port by using the commands shown below:
• Port speed — Enter the interface Fibre Channel configuration submode speed command to set the
speed of a Fibre Channel port.
• Trunk port — Enter the interface Fibre Channel configuration submode trunk-enable command to
configure the port for trunking.
• Buffer credit control — Enter the interface Fibre Channel configuration submode isl-r_r-rdy
command to enable interswitch link receiver-ready (ISL R_RDY) mode on the port. Enter the
interface Fibre Channel configuration submode no isl-r_r-rdy command to disable ISL R_RDY
mode on the port. If ISL R_RDY is not set, then Inter-SwitchLink Virtual Channel ready (ISL
VC_RDY) mode is set by default.
• Forward error correction — fec-enable is set by default for 16G FC port speeds; use no fec-enable
to disable this capability.
• FC port type restriction — config-mode allows the following possible completions:
‐
auto — Configures the port as a G-Port (locked).
‐
eport — Configures the port as a E-Port (locked).
‐
fport — Configures the port as a F-Port (locked).
‐
nport — Configures the port as a N-Port (locked).
• Port group speed — The hardware connector group-speed configuration allows you to set the
allowed speed ranges and protocol type for groups of FlexPorts.
168
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Viewing Fibre Channel port attributes
ATTENTION
Setting ISL R_RDY is not recommended.
The following Fibre Channel port attributes are not supported by Network OS 5.0.0 or later:
AL_PA offset 13
F_Port buffers
NPIV capability
Compression
Fault Delay
NPIV PP Limit
Credit Recovery
Frame shooter port
Persistent Disable
CSCTL mode
Locked L_Port
Port Auto Disable
D-Port mode
LOS TOV enable
QoS E_Port
Disabled E_Port
Mirror Port
Rate limit
Encryption
RSCN suppressed
EX_Port
Viewing Fibre Channel port attributes
To view the Fibre Channel port attributes for a single port, in privileged EXEC mode, enter the show
running-config interface FibreChannel rbridge-id/slot/port command for the port you want to view. To
view the Fibre Channel port attributes for all Fibre Channel ports in the fabric, enter the show runningconfig interface FibreChannel command without any additional parameters.
Whether you view attributes for a single port or for all ports, the settings for the isl-r_rdy, trunk-enable,
and shutdown attributes are always displayed. The fec-enable and speed attributes are displayed only
if they are set to nondefault values.
The following example displays the Fibre Channel port attributes for a single port. In this case, the
speed and vc-link-init attributes appear because they have been set to values other than their default
values.
switch# show running-config interface FibreChannel 8/0/1
interface FibreChannel 8/0/1
speed 8gbps
no isl-r_rdy
trunk-enable
shutdown
The following example shows Fibre Channel attributes for all Fibre Channel ports. In this case, the
speed and fec-enable attributes are set to their default values for all of the interfaces shown.
switch# show running-config interface FibreChannel
interface FibreChannel 3/0/1
desire-distance 0
no isl-r_rdy
trunk-enable
no shutdown
!
interface FibreChannel 3/0/2
no isl-r_rdy
trunk-enable
no shutdown
!
interface FibreChannel 3/0/3
no isl-r_rdy
trunk-enable
no shutdown
!
(output truncated)
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
169
Setting Fibre Channel port speed
To view the setting of a single attribute on a specific port, regardless of whether the attribute is set to
its default value, enter the show running-config interface FibreChannel rbridge-id/slot/port
command.
The following example shows the setting of the speed attribute for port 66/0/1:
switch# show running-config interface FibreChannel 66/0/1 speed interface
FibreChannel 66/0/1
speed 16gbps
Setting Fibre Channel port speed
This procedure sets the ports speed to 4, 8, or 16 Gbps, or to autonegotiate (the default value).
1. In privileged EXEC mode, enter the configure terminal command to enter global configuration
mode.
2. Enter the interface FibreChannel rbridge-id/slot/port command for the port on which you want to
set the speed.
A configuration submode prompt appears.
3. Enter the speed command followed by the desired speed in Gbps.
The following example sets the port speed to 4 Gbps.
switch# configure terminal
Entering configuration mode terminal
switch(config)# interface FibreChannel 8/0/1
switch(config-FibreChannel-8/0/1)# speed 4
Configuring a Fibre Channel port for trunking
A link can be configured to be part of a trunk group. Two or more links in a port group form a trunk
group when they are configured for the same speed, the same distance level, and their link distances
are nearly equal.
1. In privileged EXEC mode, enter the configure terminal command to enter global configuration
mode.
2. Enter the interface FibreChannel rbridge-id/slot/port command for the desired port.
A configuration submode prompt appears.
3. Enter the trunk-enable command.
The following example configures the link attached to port 4 on RBridge 8 to be part of a trunk
group.
switch# configure terminal
Entering configuration mode terminal
switch(config)# rbridge-id 8
switch(config-rbridge-id-8)# interface FibreChannel 8/0/4
switch(config-FibreChannel-8/0/4)# trunk-enable
Monitoring Fibre Channel ports
To monitor a Fibre Channel port, in privileged EXEC mode, enter the show interface FibreChannel
rbridge-id/slot/port command for the Fibre Channel port you want to monitor. The command output
provides lots of information about the various hardware counters associated with the port.
170
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Configuring Fibre Channel Ports
This command has a basic version and a detail version. The basic version of the command provides
general port information such as status, identification, and configuration information, along with interrupt
statistics, link status counters, and so on, as shown in the following example:
switch# show interface FibreChannel 66/0/1
fibrechannel 66/0/1 is down (No_Light). Protocol state is down.
Pluggable media present
LineSpeed Actual:
PortSpeed:
N8Gbps
portDisableReason:
Persistently disabled port
PortId:
010000
PortIfId:
43010000
PortWwn:
20:00:00:27:f8:d4:79:be
Distance:
normal
FEC:
Inactive
Last clearing of show interface counters: 00:00:00
Interrupts:
0
Link_failure: 0
Unknown:
0
Loss_of_sync: 0
Lli:
0
Loss_of_sig: 0
Proc_rqrd:
0
Protocol_err: 0
Timed_out:
0
Invalid_word: 0
Rx_flushed:
0
Invalid_crc: 0
Tx_unavail:
0
Delim_err:
0
Free_buffer:
0
Address_err: 0
Overrun:
0
Lr_in:
0
Suspended:
0
Lr_out:
0
Parity_err:
0
Ols_in:
0
2_parity_err:
0
Ols_out:
0
CMI_bus_err:
0
Rate info:
Bandwidth:
Tx performance:
Rx performance:
Frjt:
Fbsy:
0
0
8.00G
0 B/sec
0 B/sec
The detailed version of the command, illustrated below, tells you how much traffic has been transmitted
or received, and how many times certain error conditions have occurred. Specifically, the tim_txcrd_z
counters tell you how many times the port was unable to transmit frames because the transmit BB credit
was zero. A number greater than zero indicates either that there is congestion on the port or that a
device is affected by latency. A larger number indicates a greater problem. A sample is taken every 2.5
microseconds.
switch# show interface FibreChannel 66/0/1 detail
fibrechannel 66/0/1 is down (No_Light). Protocol state is down.
Pluggable media present
LineSpeed Actual:
PortSpeed:
N8Gbps
portDisableReason:
Persistently disabled port
PortId:
010000
PortIfId:
43010000
PortWwn:
20:00:00:27:f8:d4:79:be
Distance:
normal
FEC:
Inactive
Last clearing of show interface
Rx Statistics:
stat_wrx
stat_frx
Tx Statistics:
stat_wtx
stat_ftx
Error Statistics:
er_enc_in
er_crc
er_trunc
er_toolong
er_bad_eof
er_enc_out
er_bad_os
er_crc_good_eof
Port Error Info:
loss_of_sync:
0
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
counters: 00:00:00
0
0
4-byte words received
Frames received
0
0
4-byte words transmitted
Frames transmitted
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Encoding errors inside of frames
Frames with CRC errors
Frames shorter than minimum
Frames longer than maximum
Frames with bad end-of-frame
Encoding error outside of frames
Invalid ordered set
Crc error with good eof
171
Configuring Fibre Channel Ports
lossofsig:
frjt:
fbsy:
0
0
0
Buffer Information:
Lx
Max/Resv
Buffer
Needed
Link
Remaining
Mode
Buffers
Usage
Buffers
Distance
Buffers
=================================================================
8
0
0
0
Rate info:
Bandwidth:
Tx performance:
Rx performance:
172
8.00G
0 B/sec
0 B/sec
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Using Access Gateway
● Access Gateway basic concepts...................................................................................173
● Enabling Access Gateway mode.................................................................................. 183
● Disabling Access Gateway mode..................................................................................184
● Displaying Access Gateway configuration data............................................................ 184
● VF_Port to N_Port mapping.......................................................................................... 186
● Port Grouping policy......................................................................................................190
● Trunking in Access Gateway mode...............................................................................196
● Access Gateway under FlexPort...................................................................................197
● N_Port monitoring for unreliable links........................................................................... 198
● Displaying Access Gateway N_Port utilization data .....................................................199
Access Gateway basic concepts
Access Gateway (AG) simplifies server and storage connectivity by enabling direct connection of
servers to any SAN fabric—enhancing scalability by eliminating the switch domain identity and
simplifying local switch device management.
On supported switches, the Access Gateway (AG) feature enables you to configure FC ports as
N_Ports and to map specific VF ports to these N_Ports. This allows direct connection of hosts attached
to the VF_Ports on the AG-supported switch with F_Ports on a Fibre Channel fabric edge switch instead
of through ISL connections to a Fibre Channel Router (FCR). These connections can be regular or long
distance.
Through the use of N_Ports for direct connection to FC switches and VF_Port to N_Port mapping,
Access Gateway provides the following benefits:
• As ISLs between switches and FCRs utilize possibly limited domain IDs to identify switches, direct
connection from AG-switch N_Ports to Fibre Channel switch F_Ports can resolve scalability issues,
as the number of Fibre Channel and VCS fabrics grow.
• Direct connection from AG-switch N_Ports to F_Ports allows greater interoperability with multivendor
Fibre Channel fabrics, as connection to these fabrics through an FCR is limited.
• The use of N_Ports instead of ISL connections to FCRs increases the number of device ports
available for FCoE hosts and devices behind LAG-supported FSBs connected to the AG-switch
VF_Ports. In addition, through use of N_Port ID Virtualization (NPIV), multiple FCoE initiators can
access the SAN through the same physical port.
After you configure a switch in AG mode, all FC Ports are enabled as N_Ports. These ports connect to
F_Ports on the FC fabric. If the AG switch is connected to a FC switch, the connected N_Ports should
come up automatically. Devices attached to VF_Ports come up when FCoE is enabled on Ethernet
ports.
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
173
Switches supported for Access Gateway
Switches supported for Access Gateway
For Network OS 6.0.0, the following Brocade switches support Access Gateway:
• VDX 6740, VDX 6740T, and VDX 6740T-1G
• VDX 2740
Network diagrams
The following diagrams illustrate various connection configurations among switches and network
elements, with and without Access Gateway.
The following figure illustrates the connection of eight hosts through an AG switch to a Fibre Channel
fabric edge switch.
FIGURE 31 Hosts connecting to FC fabric through switch in AG mode
NOTE
An AG switch can connect to only one Fibre Channel SAN. Ports on this switch connecting to a
second FC SAN are disabled. Multiple AG switches, each belonging to a different VCS cluster, can
connect to the same SAN fabric.
The following figure illustrates an alternate connection of hosts (servers) to an FC fabric through a
switch not in Access Gateway mode. A VDX FC port, configured as an E_Port, connects to the FC
SAN through an ISL connection to an FC router. For more information on configuring FC ports for an
ISL and FC router connection, refer to Configuring Fibre Channel Ports on page 165.
174
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Using Access Gateway
FIGURE 32 Connecting Network OS fabric to FC fabric without AG mode
Switches in AG mode are logically transparent to the host and the fabric. Therefore, you can increase
the number of hosts that have access to the fabric without increasing the number of switch domains.
This simplifies configuration and management in a large fabric by reducing the number of domain IDs
and ports.
VCS mode must be enabled to enable Access Gateway on the switch. By default, both VCS mode and
AG are enabled.
While in AG mode, the switch functions both as a VCS and AG switch as follows:
• It supports N_Ports, VF_Ports, and Layer 2 interfaces.
• It can connect devices to a VCS fabric through Ethernet ports. VCS fabric services run on Ethernet
ports which function under the "native" VCS switch configuration.
• It can connect hosts to a Fibre Channel switch through VF_Ports mapped to N_Ports.
NOTE
In this document, VCS native (or native) mode refers to a switch enabled in VCS mode. Access
Gateway mode (or AG switch) refers to a switch in VCS mode enabled for the Access Gateway feature.
The following figure illustrates the connection of FCoE hosts to two AG switches in a top-of-rack
configuration. N_Ports on these switches connect to F_Ports on Brocade DCX Backbones in the FC
SAN. In addition, Layer 2 interfaces on these switches connect to other VDX switches in the VCS fabric
cluster.
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
175
Access Gateway and native VCS modes
FIGURE 33 Using Access Gateway to connect FC and VCS fabrics
Access Gateway and native VCS modes
In native VCS mode, the switch can function as part of a VCS Fabric cluster, but cannot connect to a
FC fabric through N_Ports. When enabled in AG mode, the switch can still function as part of a VCS
Fabric cluster, but can now connect directly with a FC "edge" fabric switch through F_Port to N_Port
connections.
All VCS and Network OS features are available to a switch in AG mode, which is enabled by default. If
you need to enable AG mode (for example, if upgrading from a legacy version), use the ag enable
command.
For more information enabling and disabling AG mode, refer to Enabling Access Gateway mode on
page 183 and Disabling Access Gateway mode on page 184.
176
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Access Gateway in a logical chassis cluster
Access Gateway in a logical chassis cluster
Although operations of a VDX switch configured in Access Gateway mode are similar to a node
configured in native VCS mode while in Logical Chassis Cluster mode, there are some unique
considerations that you should be aware of.
Nodes in a logical chassis cluster are configured in Logical Chassis Cluster mode. In this mode, both
the data and configuration paths are distributed to other nodes in the cluster. The entire cluster is
configured from the principal node. For more information, refer to Logical chassis cluster mode on page
37.
Behavior and operations of an Access Gateway node configured in a logical chassis cluster, such as
removing the node from or adding the node to the cluster, are similar to operations in other nodes in the
cluster. Access Gateway does not have any global configuration, so the default configuration for the
node in Access Gateway mode is similar to a cluster node in native VCS mode. Failover in the cluster,
both controlled and uncontrolled, also occurs the same as for an AG switch.
There are two methods for adding an Access Gateway node to the cluster:
• You can enable Access Gateway on a standalone switch, then add the switch to the cluster. Before
adding the switch, enable it for Access Gateway mode and configure Access Gateway features and
policies through the Network OS AG commands. The node you add to the cluster must have same
VCS ID as the cluster; otherwise the configuration on the node will revert to default configuration.
• You can enable Access Gateway on a switch that is already a node in the cluster by just enabling AG
on the switch.
Access Gateway with FCoE logical SANs
Access Gateways play a central role in supporting the FCoE Logical SANs feature, and require special
configuration.
Logical SANs can be configured as either local or remote. A local SAN provides logical separation
within the VCS Fabric, while a remote SAN provides Fibre Channel SAN connectivity through an
Access Gateway in the fabric. The Access Gateway provides connectivity to only one logical SAN, while
other switches in the fabric can be configured to support multiple logical SANs.
For an overview of the role of Access Gateways in this feature and how to configure them, refer to the
chapter "Configuring FCoE Logical SANs" in the Network OS Layer 2 Switching Configuration Guide.
Access Gateway ports
Access Gateway supports VF_Ports that connect host systems to the switch, Layer 2 interface ports
that connect the switch to the VCS Fabric cluster, and FC N_Ports that connect the switch to a FC
fabric.
In order for hosts attached to VF_Ports on a VDX switch to connect with F_Ports on a FC switch, the
VF_Ports must be mapped to the VDX switch N_Ports. Enabling AG mode configures all FC ports as
N_Ports and maps VF_Ports to the N_Ports in a sequential, round-robin fashion. This allows for even
distribution of logins in a typical configuration, where VF_Ports are sequentially allocated as ENodes log
in. You can change this default mapping by mapping any VF_Port to an N_Port using Network OS
commands, as described in Configuring port mapping on page 189.
The following types of ports are supported on a VDX switch in AG mode:
• N_Ports (node ports)—Connects a switch in AG mode to the F_Port on the Fibre Channel switch. By
using FlexPort commands, you can enable the following numbers of N_Ports on supported switches:
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
177
Comparison of Access Gateway, ISL, and FC switch ports
‐
VDX 6740 — 32 N_Ports
‐
VDX 6740T — 16 N_Ports
‐
VDX 6740T-1G — 16 N_Ports
‐
VDX 2740 — 14 external ports and 8 (2 x 4) ports in breakout mode
• VF_Ports (Virtual Fabric ports)—Connect FCoE hosts and devices behind LAG-supported FSB
devices. You can map these ports to specific N_Ports for connection to a Fibre Channel switch.
Consider the following specifications:
‐
By default, each switch is assigned 64 VF_Ports.
‐
There is no limit to the number of VF_Ports that you can map to an N_Port.
‐
Up to 64 NPIV logins are allowed per VF_Port.
‐
Valid VF_Port numbers are 1 to 1000.
• L2 interface ports—Ethernet TRILL ports that connect with other VDX switches in the Brocade VCS
Fabric cluster. The number of available TRILL ports = (total number of physical ports) – (ports
converted to Fibre Channel ports).
Since all VDX switch FC ports are enabled as N_Ports in Access Gateway mode, FC hosts or targets
cannot directly attach to the AG switch. When Access Gateway mode is enabled, you can configure
additional FC port attributes for the N_Ports as you would on non-AG switches.
Transitioning from native VCS to AG mode
Be aware of the following interface and port functions after enabling AG mode:
• CEE interfaces will be in a no-shutdown state.
• If FC ports are connected to FC switch F_Ports, connected N_Ports should come up automatically.
Devices connected to mapped VF_Ports should come up after you enter the fcoeport command on
the interface port.
• VDX switch Ethernet ports are under the native VCS switch configuration.
• For default VF_Port to N_Port mapping, VF_Ports are mapped to N_Ports sequentially in a roundrobin fashion as ENodes log in. Mapping that you implement through the map fport interface fcoe
port command overrides the default mapping.
• VCS Fabric services run on VCS ports and not under the Access Gateway dæmon.
Comparison of Access Gateway, ISL, and FC switch ports
A switch in Access Gateway (AG) mode uses VF_Ports and N_Ports to connect devices to the Fibre
Channel (FC) switch. The connected FC switch connects to the AG switch N_Ports through F_Ports
and presents a variety of ports for connection to FC fabric devices.
Access Gateway (AG) multiplexes host connections to the fabric. AG presents a VF_Port to a FCoE
host and an N_Port to an edge Fibre Channel fabric switch. Multiple VF_Ports mapped to N_Ports
provide multiple device ports for connection to the FC fabric.
Using N_Port ID Virtualization (NPIV), AG allows multiple FCoE initiators to access the SAN on the
same physical port. This reduces the hardware requirements and management overhead of hosts to
the SAN connections.
In contrast to the AG switch, the connected FC switch presents F_Ports (or FL_Ports) to storage
devices hosts and presents E_Ports, VE_Ports, or EX_Ports to other switches in the fabric.
A native switch using an ISL connection between its FC E_Port and an EX_Port on an FCR consumes
domain ID resources that may impact scalability as VCS and FC fabrics grow. In addition, connection
through a FCR may limit connection to multivendor FC fabrics. Finally, connection through an ISL
provides limited device port connections to the FC fabric. For more information on configuring FC ports
for connection to an FCR and FC fabric, refer to Configuring Fibre Channel Ports on page 165.
178
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Using Access Gateway
The following figure illustrates ports used for connecting hosts attached to an Access Gateway Switch
to a Fibre Channel switch.
FIGURE 34 Access Gateway and FC switch ports
The following figure illustrates the ports used for connecting hosts attached to a non-AG (native) switch
to a Fibre Channel switch, using an ISL connection.
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
179
Access Gateway features and requirements
FIGURE 35 Connection of native VCS and FC ports
Access Gateway features and requirements
Although Access Gateway provides standard features for connection to Fibre Channel SANs, you can
configure a number of optional features as well. There are also requirements and limitations that you
should be aware of when using this feature in a VCS cluster and FC fabric environment.
Port grouping
The Port Grouping (PG) policy is enabled by default when AG is enabled. This allows you to group
N_Ports into a port group. By default, any VF_Ports mapped to these N_Ports are also members of
that port group. Port Grouping allows you to isolate specific hosts to specific FC fabric ports for
performance, security, or other reasons.
Automatic Login Balancing (LB) and Modified Managed Fabric Name Monitoring (M-MFNM) modes
are enabled by default when the PG policy is enabled.
• When LB mode is enabled and an N_Port goes offline, existing logins from VF_Ports that are
mapped to the offline N_Port are distributed to available N_Ports in the port group. If a new N_Port
180
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Using Access Gateway
comes online, existing logins are not disturbed. LB mode can be disabled using Network OS
commands.
• When LB mode is disabled, VF_Ports are not shared among N_Ports in the port group, as VF_Ports
can only connect to N_Ports to which they are mapped. As a best practice to ensure device login,
bind the ENode to a VF_Port and ensure that its mapped N_Port is online.
• M-MFNM mode ensures that all N_Ports connect to the same FC fabric, preventing connections to
multiple SANs. M-MFNM cannot be disabled as long as LB mode is enabled.
For more information on Port Grouping policy modes, refer to Port Grouping policy modes on page
194.
N_Port monitoring for unreliable links
The N_Port monitoring for unreliable links feature monitors links from all N_Ports on the VDX switch to
F_Ports on the FC fabric. If online and offline static change notifications (SCNs) exceed a set threshold
during a specific time period, the link is considered unreliable, and the N_Port is taken offline. The
VF_Ports mapped to the N_Port also go offline. If the N_Port is in a port group and Automatic Login
Balancing is enabled, the VF_Ports mapped to the N_Port are distributed among available N_Ports in
the same port group.
Additional features and functions
Following are additional features and functions of Access Gateway:
• Access Gateway enables VDX FC ports as N_Ports. Hosts attached to VDX VF_Ports can connect
directly with F_Ports on a Fibre Channel fabric edge switch through these N_Ports.
• Instead of using ISL connections and possibly limited domain resources, the use of N_Ports
increases the number of available device ports on the switch. As the number of Fibre Channel and
VCS Fabrics grow, scalability is less of an issue.
• Through the use of N_Port ID Virtualization (NPIV), multiple FCoE initiators can access the SAN
through the same physical port.
• When enabling AG mode, VF_Ports are mapped to available N_Ports in a round-robin fashion as
ENodes log in. However, you can re-map any VF_Port to switch N_Ports.
• Access Gateway can operate in both fabric cluster and logical chassis cluster modes.
• You can configure additional FC port attributes for the AG switch N_Ports as you would on non-AG
switches. Refer to Configuring Fibre Channel Ports on page 165
Limitations
Following are limitations you should be aware of when using Access Gateway mode:
• Hosts connected to an Access Gateway switch cannot communicate with targets on the VCS Fabric.
• A VDX switch configured for Access Gateway can connect with only one FC Fabric. Ports connected
to a second FC fabric are disabled.
• Access Gateway can operate in both fabric cluster mode and logical chassis cluster modes. The AG
configuration is not distributed in fabric cluster mode and is distributed in logical chassis cluster
mode.
• You can only configure VF_Port to N_Port mapping for devices directly attached to VF_Ports and
F_Ports on the connected FC switch. These mappings control device logins through appropriate
N_Ports.
• Since all switch FC ports are configured as N_Ports when AG mode is enabled:
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
181
Using Access Gateway
‐
‐
FC hosts or targets cannot be directly attached to the AG switch.
The AG switch cannot be connected to a Fabric OS Access Gateway in a Cascaded
configuration.
• Access Gateway does not "bridge" the VCS and FC fabrics:
‐
‐
‐
‐
‐
Hosts connected to VF_Ports mapped to Access Gateway N_Ports appear on the FC
fabric only.
Device FC IDs are assigned by the FC fabric F_Ports connected to the Access Gateway
N_Ports.
VF_Ports and N_Ports are under the Access Gateway dæmeon's configuration.
Fibre Channel OS components, such as management server, name server, and zoning are
restricted on Network OS Access Gateways just as they are on Fabric OS Access
Gateways. Refer to the Fabric OS Access Gateway Administrator's Guide for a complete
list.
Although the show fcoe login command displays FCoE devices connected to the Access
Gateway switch VF_Ports, these devices are in the FC fabric and cannot be detected by
the VCS Fabric name server. Therefore, these devices cannot be zoned in a VCS Fabric.
FCoE and Layer 2 support and limitations
The following functions are supported:
• The following functionality is supported for a configuration consisting of a vLAG from a host CNA to
two Access Gateway switches or to an AG switch and a VCS Switch (L2 vLAG for top of rack split):
‐
The vLAG links can carry Layer 2 and Layer 3 traffic.
‐
VLAG support is identical to support in native VCS mode.
‐
A separate FCoE device login is supported through each AG switch.
• The following functionality is supported for a configuration with a LAG from an FSB to an AG switch:
‐
LAG specifics, such as number of links and contiguous vs. discontinuous, is identical to
native VCS support.
‐
Multiple LAGs can connect to the AG switch (one per FSB).
‐
LAG carries Layer 2 and Layer 3 traffic.
‐
Devices connected via an FSB LAG cannot talk to a Cisco SAN.
‐
LAGs and direct attached devices are supported on the same AG switch.
• The following functionality is supported for VF_Ports and CEE interfaces:
‐
‐
‐
‐
‐
‐
‐
‐
‐
182
VF_Ports are dynamically bound to Ethernet interfaces as in native VCS mode.
As in native VCS mode, all CEE interfaces with connected devices must be configured for
FCoE.
The CEE interface will come up as an ISL ET port if it is connected to a peer ET port on
another switch in the VCS Fabric.
As in native VCS mode, 64 VF_Ports are allocated by default.
A VF_Port can accept up to 64 NPIV logins.
As in native VCS mode, VF_Ports are dynamically allocated as devices come up.
As in native VCS mode, VF_Ports can be statically bound to ENodes.
VCS Fabric services run on VCS ports and not under Access Gateway.
As in native VCS mode, the number of VF_Ports allocated can be changed dynamically:
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Enabling Access Gateway mode
‐
‐
‐
You can configure the maximum number of FCoE devices that can be logged into
a switch by using the fcoe_enodes command.
Newly allocated VF_Ports are mapped to existing N_Ports sequentially in a roundrobin fashion, which assigns all VF_Ports sequentially and evenly to the N_Ports.
Newly deallocated VF_Ports are removed from existing VF_Port to N_Port
mappings.
Following are support limitations:
• If an interface is only handling L2 traffic, the corresponding VF_Port appears as disabled to AG.
• For vLAGs:
‐
‐
As in native VCS mode, a vLAG with FSB cannot support FCoE traffic. It can support L2
traffic only.
A vLAG from a host Converged Network Adapter (CNA) supports L2 and FCoE traffic.
• A single LAG/link is supported between one FSB and one AG switch. Subsequent LAG/links are
treated as a TRILL loop and disabled.
• LAG member VF_Ports cannot be mapped to individual N_Ports or N_Port groups.
• The ag enable command is not allowed if the RBridge is part of an FCoE forwarder (FCF)-group as
an FCF-RBridge ID (rbid) in an FCoE fabric-map configuration.
• The no ag enable command is not allowed if the RBridge contains a port provisioned for FCoE.
Enabling Access Gateway mode
Enabling Access Gateway (AG) mode on a VDX switch allows FCoE hosts and devices behind LAGsupported FSBs connected to VF_Ports to connect to a FC fabric.
NOTE
On supported devices, Access Gateway mode is enabled by default.
Enabling AG mode enables FC ports on the switch, configuring them as N_Ports. The N_Ports can
connect directly to F_Ports on an edge FC switch. VF_Ports are mapped to N_Ports in a sequential,
round-robin fashion as Enodes log in. You can change this default mapping using Network OS
commands.
NOTE
Before enabling or disabling AG mode, ensure that the following conditions are fulfilled:
• All Fibrechannel interfaces are in shut state.
• There are no ports provisioned for FCoE.
• The RBridge ID of the switch is not specified in the FCoE forwarder (FCF) configuration.
Use the following procedure to enable Access Gateway mode.
1. Enter the the ag enable command.
switch# ag enable
AG mode is enabled. Switch FC ports are automatically enabled as N_Ports and mapped to
VF_Ports.
2. You can configure additional FC port attributes for the N_Ports as you would on switches in native
mode. Refer to Configuring Fibre Channel Ports on page 165.
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
183
Disabling Access Gateway mode
Disabling Access Gateway mode
Disabling Access Gateway (AG) mode returns the switch to native VCS mode. Disabling AG mode
also removes all AG configuration, including port mapping and N_Port configuration.
NOTE
Before enabling or disabling AG mode, ensure that the following conditions are fulfilled:
• All Fibrechannel interfaces are in shut state.
• There are no ports provisioned for FCoE.
• The RBridge ID of the switch is not specified in the FCoE forwarder (FCF) configuration.
Use the following procedure to disable AG mode on the switch.
1. Display the current AG state and configuration by entering the show ag rbridge-id rbridge-id
command in privileged EXEC mode.
switch# show ag rbridge-id 1
If Access Gateway configuration data displays, as shown in Displaying Access Gateway
configuration data on page 184, AG is enabled.
If "AG mode not set" displays as shown in the following example, AG is not enabled.
switch# show ag rbridge-id 2
AG mode not set.
For more information on displaying the current AG configuration on a switch or all AG switches in a
VCS cluster using this command, refer to Displaying Access Gateway configuration data on page
184.
2. Disable AG mode by entering the no ag enable command while in privileged EXEC mode:
switch# no ag enable
Displaying Access Gateway configuration data
Use the show running-config rbridge-id rbridge id ag and show ag rbridge-id rbridge-id commands
to display Access Gateway configuration data.
To display AG configuration data, use the following methods:
• Use the show running-config rbridge-id rbridge-id ag command to display the configured N_Port
to VF_Port mappings, port grouping information, and other parameters. This shows the factorydefault configuration, unless parameters have been modified by the user.
• Use the show ag rbridge-id rbridge-id command to display the current and active status of AG
configuration, such as the switch identification, number and type of ports, enabled policies, port
grouping, and attached fabric details. This displays only ports that are currently online and current
mappings. For example, this will show VF_Ports that have failed over to an N_Port if an N_Port that
has gone offline.
NOTE
Display of current, active mapping, or configured mapping for a port group using the show ag rbridgeid rbridge-id and show running-config rbridge-id rbridge-id ag commands depends on the enabled
184
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Using Access Gateway
or disabled state of Login Balancing mode. For more information, refer to Automatic Login Balancing
mode on page 194.
1. Make sure you are in Privileged EXEC mode and have a switch prompt such as the following.
switch#
2. Perform one of the following steps:
• Enter the show running-config rbridge-id rbridge-id ag command as in the following example for
RBridge 1.
switch# show running-config rbridge-id 1 ag
• Enter the show ag rbridge-id rbridge-id command as shown in the following example for RBridge
5.
switch# show ag rbridge-id 5
If Access Gateway is enabled, data such as the following displays for show running-config rbridgeid rbridge-id ag, as shown in the following example for RBridge 1:
switch# show running-config rbridge-id 1 ag
rbridge-id 1
ag
nport 1/0/1
map fport interface Fcoe 1/1/1 1/1/9 1/1/17 1/1/25 1/1/33 1/1/41 1/1/49 1/1/57
!
nport 1/0/2
map fport interface Fcoe 1/1/2 1/1/10 1/1/18 1/1/26 1/1/34 1/1/42 1/1/50 1/1/58
!
nport 1/0/3
map fport interface Fcoe 1/1/3 1/1/11 1/1/19 1/1/27 1/1/35 1/1/43 1/1/51 1/1/59
!
nport 1/0/4
map fport interface Fcoe 1/1/4 1/1/12 1/1/20 1/1/28 1/1/36 1/1/44 1/1/52 1/1/60
!
nport 1/0/5
map fport interface Fcoe 1/1/5 1/1/13 1/1/21 1/1/29 1/1/37 1/1/45 1/1/53 1/1/61
!
nport 1/0/6
map fport interface Fcoe 1/1/6 1/1/14 1/1/22 1/1/30 1/1/38 1/1/46 1/1/54 1/1/62
!
nport 1/0/7
map fport interface Fcoe 1/1/7 1/1/15 1/1/23 1/1/31 1/1/39 1/1/47 1/1/55 1/1/63
!
nport 1/0/8
map fport interface Fcoe 1/1/8 1/1/16 1/1/24 1/1/32 1/1/40 1/1/48 1/1/56 1/1/64
!
pg 0
nport interface FibreChannel 1/0/1 1/0/2 1/0/3 1/0/4 1/0/5 1/0/6 1/0/7 1/0/8
modes lb
rename pg0
!
timeout fnm 120
counter reliability 25
If Access Gateway is enabled, data such as the following displays for show ag rbridge-id rbridge-id,
as shown in the following example for RBridge 5:
switch# show ag rbridge-id 5
RBridge-ID 5:
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------Name
: sw0
NodeName
: 10:00:00:05:33:f4:78:04
Number of Ports
: 32
IP Address(es)
: 10.37.209.80
Firmware Version
: v4.1.0pgoel_pit02_nos4_1_10_10
Number of N_Ports(Fi) : 2
Number of VF_Ports
: 0
Policies Enabled
: pg
Persistent ALPA
: Disabled
Port Group information :
PG_ID
PG_Name PG_Mode PG_Members
---------------------------------------------------------0
pg0
lb
5/0/1, 5/0/2, 5/0/3, 5/0/4,
5/0/5, 5/0/6, 5/0/7, 5/0/8
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
185
VF_Port to N_Port mapping
---------------------------------------------------------Fabric Information :
Attached Fabric Name
N_Ports(Fi)
---------------------------------------------------------10:00:00:05:33:72:f5:5a
5/0/1, 5/0/2
N_Port(Fi) information :
Port
PortID
Attached PWWN
IP_Addr
VF_Ports
--------------------------------------------------------------------------Fi 5/0/1
0x020200 20:02:00:05:33:72:f5:5a
10.37.209.86
None
Fi 5/0/2
0x020300 20:03:00:05:33:72:f5:5a
10.37.209.86
None
--------------------------------------------------------------------------VF_Port information :
VF_Port
Eth_Port
PortID
Attached PWWN
N_Port(Fi)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------None
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
If AG is not enabled, "AG mode not set" displays, as shown in the following example for RBridge 2:
switch# show ag rbridge-id 2
AG mode not set.
NOTE
You can also enter show ag rbridge-id all to display AG configuration data for all switches in the
VCS cluster.
VF_Port to N_Port mapping
To connect hosts attached to VDX Switch VF_Ports to Fibre Channel switch F_Ports, the appropriate
VF_Ports must be mapped to VDX Switch N_Ports. Although ports have a factory-default mapping
based on the VDX platform, you can change mapping using Network OS commands.
Consider the following when mapping ports:
• You can map multiple VF_Ports to an N_Port. There is no limit to the number of VF_Ports that you
can map to an N_Port.
• You can only configure VF_Port to N_Port mapping for devices directly attached to VF_Ports on the
VDX switch and F_Ports on the connected FC switch. These mappings control device logins
through appropriate N_Ports.
• Consider the N_Port and VF_Port ranges allowed for a VDX platform. Refer to Access Gateway
ports on page 177.
• If an N_Port is removed from a port group enabled for Automatic Login Balancing mode and moved
to another port group, the VF_Ports mapped to that N_Port remain with the N_Port. If an N_Port is
moved from a port group not enabled for Automatic Login Balancing mode, the VF_Ports that are
mapped to the N_Port move to the default Port Group 0.
Displaying port mapping
You can display current and configured VF_Port to N_Port mapping on a specific switch or on all
switches enabled for Access Gateway in the VCS cluster.
Display current, active VF_Port to N_Port mapping on a specific switch or on all switches enabled for
Access Gateway in the VCS cluster using the show ag map rbridge-id rbridge-id command while in
Privileged EXEC mode.
186
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Using Access Gateway
Display configured VF_Port to N_Port mapping on a switch using the show running-config rbridge-id
rbridge id ag command.
Perform one of the following steps while in privileged EXEC mode:
• To display current, active, VF_Port mapping for a specific N_Port, enter show ag map nport
rbridge-id rbridge-id.
switch# show ag map nport interface fiberChannel 200/0/1 rbridge-id 200
• To display current, active VF_Port mapping to all N_Ports on a switch, enter show ag map
rbridge-id rbridge-id.
switch# show ag map rbridge-id 200
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
187
Using Access Gateway
• To display VF_Port mapping to a N_Ports on all switches in the VCS cluster, enter show ag map
rbridge-id all.
switch# show ag map rbridge-id all
• To display configured mapping on a switch, enter show running-config rbridge-id rbridge id
ag.
switch# show running-config rbridge-id 1 ag
Current and configured mapping display
Display of current, active mapping, or configured mapping for a port group using
the show ag map and show running-config rbridge-id rbridge id ag
commands depend on the enabled or disabled state of Login Balancing mode.
For more information, refer to Automatic Login Balancing mode on page 194.
The following example is sample output from the show ag map rbridge-id
rbridge-id command, which shows current, active port mapping. The
"Current_VF_Ports" column shows that there are no VF_Ports online.
switch# show ag map rbridge 5
RBridge-ID 5:
--------------------------------------------------N_Port(Fi)
PG_ID PG_Name Current_VF_Ports
--------------------------------------------------5/0/1
0
pg0
None
5/0/2
0
pg0
None
5/0/3
0
pg0
None
5/0/4
0
pg0
None
5/0/5
0
pg0
None
5/0/6
0
pg0
None
5/0/7
0
pg0
None
5/0/8
0
pg0
None
---------------------------------------------------
The following example is sample output from the show running-config
rbridge-id rbridge id ag command to show configured port mapping. The output
lists N_Port numbers on the switch, and then mapped VF_Ports following "map
fport interface fcoe."
switch# show running-config rbridge-id 1 ag
rbridge-id 1
ag
nport 1/0/1
map fport interface Fcoe 1/1/1 1/1/9 1/1/17 1/1/25 1/1/33 1/1/41 1/1/49 1/1/57
!
nport 1/0/2
map fport interface Fcoe 1/1/2 1/1/10 1/1/18 1/1/26 1/1/34 1/1/42 1/1/50 1/1/58
!
nport 1/0/3
map fport interface Fcoe 1/1/3 1/1/11 1/1/19 1/1/27 1/1/35 1/1/43 1/1/51 1/1/59
!
nport 1/0/4
map fport interface Fcoe 1/1/4 1/1/12 1/1/20 1/1/28 1/1/36 1/1/44 1/1/52 1/1/60
!
nport 1/0/5
map fport interface Fcoe 1/1/5 1/1/13 1/1/21 1/1/29 1/1/37 1/1/45 1/1/53 1/1/61
!
nport 1/0/6
map fport interface Fcoe 1/1/6 1/1/14 1/1/22 1/1/30 1/1/38 1/1/46 1/1/54 1/1/62
!
nport 1/0/7
map fport interface Fcoe 1/1/7 1/1/15 1/1/23 1/1/31 1/1/39 1/1/47 1/1/55 1/1/63
!
nport 1/0/8
map fport interface Fcoe 1/1/8 1/1/16 1/1/24 1/1/32 1/1/40 1/1/48 1/1/56 1/1/64
!
pg 0
nport interface FibreChannel 1/0/1 1/0/2 1/0/3 1/0/4 1/0/5 1/0/6 1/0/7 1/0/8
modes lb
rename pg0
!
timeout fnm 120
counter reliability 25
188
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Configuring port mapping
Configuring port mapping
When operating in Access Gateway mode, you can specify routes that AG will use to direct traffic from
the devices (hosts or targets) on its VF_Ports to the ports connected to the fabric using its N_Ports. The
process of specifying routes is called "mapping." When AG is enabled on a switch, VF_Ports are
assigned to available N_Ports in a round-robin fashion as ENodes log in. You can change this mapping
using the following instructions.
Use the map fport interface fcoe port command to map specific VF_Ports to a an N_Port to ensure
that all traffic from these VF_Ports always goes through the same N_Port. You must enter this
command while in N_Port configuration mode for a specific N_Port. All VF_Ports mapped to an N_Port
in an N_Port group will be part of that port group.
Remember the following points when mapping ports:
• The range of valid VF_Ports and N_Ports is specific to the VDX platform. Refer to Access Gateway
ports on page 177 for valid port numbers.
• Newly allocated VF_Ports are mapped to existing N_Ports in a round-robin fashion.
• Newly deallocated VF_Ports are removed from existing mappings.
• If the AG switch is connected to a FC switch, the connected N_Port and devices on the mapped
VF_Ports should come online automatically.
Use the following steps to configure VF_Port to N_Port mapping:
1. Perform steps under Displaying port mapping on page 186 to display current and configured port
mapping.
2. Enter the configure command to access global configuration mode.
switch# configure
3. Enter the rbridge-id id command to enter RBridge ID mode for the specific switch.
switch(config)# rbridge-id 2
4. Enter the ag command to enter Access Gateway configuration mode.
switch(config-rbridge-id-2)# ag
5. Enter the nport interface fiberchannel port command for the N_Port where you want to change or
set mapping to a VF_Port, where port is the N_Port number in rbridge-id/slot/port format. This
accesses the configuration mode for the N_Port.
switch(config-rbridge-id-2-ag)# nport interface fiberchannel 2/0/4
6. Perform one of the following steps:
• To map a VF_Port to the N_Port, enter map fport interface fcoe port, where port is the VF_Port
in domain/rbridge-id/port format.
switch(config-rbridge-id-2-ag-nport-if-fi-2/0/4)# map fport interface fcoe 1/2/26
• To remove a VF_Port mapped to the N_Port, enter the no map fport interface fcoe port
command, where port is the VF_Port number in domain/rbridge-id/port format.
switch(config-rbridge-id-2-ag-nport-if-fi-2/0/4)# no map fport interface fcoe
1/2/26
7. Return to privileged EXEC mode and enter the show running-config rbridge-id rbridge id ag
command to verify configured VF_Port to N_Port mapping. Refer to Displaying port mapping on page
186 for more information.
switch# show running-config rbridge-id 2 ag
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
189
Port Grouping policy
Port Grouping policy
The Port Grouping (PG) policy partitions the VF_Ports, host, target ports within an Access Gatewayenabled switch into independently operated groups. Port Grouping allows you to dedicate specific
hosts to specific fabric ports for performance, security, or other reasons.
Port Grouping policy is enabled by default when you enable Access Gateway mode and cannot be
disabled.
To create port groups, you group N_Ports under a specific port group ID. By default, any VF_Ports
mapped to the N_Ports belonging to a port group are members of that port group. All N_Ports in the
group are shared by all VF_Ports mapped to those N_Ports. ENodes can log in as long as an online
N_Port exists in the group.
NOTE
In Network OS commands, N_Ports are designated by the format rbridge-id/port group/N_Port. For
example, 5/0/1 designates RBridge 5/port group 1/N_Port 1.
When Access Gateway mode is enabled, a default port group 0 (pg 0) is created that contains all
N_Ports on the switch. The maximum number of port groups supported is 16, including pg 0.
The following figure illustrates two port groups connecting VF_Ports to an FC fabric. Ports in PG 1 are
connecting to one storage array, while ports in PG2 are connecting to a different storage array.
FIGURE 36 Port groups connecting to FC fabric
Following are considerations and limitations for the Port Grouping policy.
• An ENode can log in.
• A port cannot be a member of more than one port group.
• The PG policy is enabled by default in when you enable AG mode. A default port group “0” (PG0) is
created, which contains all N_Ports and mapped VF_Ports on the switch.
• If an N_Port is added to a port group or deleted from a port group, it maintains its original mapping
configuration. If an N_Port is deleted from a port group, it is automatically added to port group 0.
190
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Displaying port grouping information
Displaying port grouping information
Display information for N_Port groups configured on the switch or all switches in the VCS cluster
enabled for Access Gateway mode.
Access Gateway must be enabled for this command to succeed.
Use the show ag pg rbridge-id rbridge id command while in while in Privileged EXEC mode to display
information on N_Port groups configured on a switch. This information includes N_Ports and VF_Ports
in the group and enabled PG modes.
1. Configure port groups using steps under Creating and removing port groups on page 192.
2. Perform one of the following steps while in Privileged EXEC mode:
• To display the current information for port groups on a specific switch, enter show ag pg rbridgeid rbridge-id.
switch# show ag pg rbridge-id 5
• To display port grouping information for port groups on all Access Gateway switches in the VCS
cluster, enter show ag pg rbridge-id all.
switch# show ag pg rbridge-id all
• To display current information on a specific port group (such as pg 11), enter show ag pg pgid
rbridge-id rbridge-id.
switch# show ag pg pgid 11 rbridge-id 200
The following is an example of command output for RBridge 5:
switch# show ag pg rbridge-id 5
Rbridge-ID 5:
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------PG_ID PG_Name PG_Mode N_Ports(Fi)
VF_Ports
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------0 pg0
lb
5/0/1, 5/0/2, 5/0/3, 5/0/4,
1/5/1, 1/5/2, 1/5/3, 1/5/4,
5/0/5, 5/0/6, 5/0/7, 5/0/8
1/5/5, 1/5/6, 1/5/7, 1/5/8,
1/5/9, 1/5/10, 1/5/11,
1/5/12,
1/5/13, 1/5/14, 1/5/15,
1/5/16,
1/5/17, 1/5/18, 1/5/19,
1/5/20,
1/5/21, 1/5/22, 1/5/23,
1/5/24,
1/5/25, 1/5/26, 1/5/27,
1/5/28,
1/5/29, 1/5/30, 1/5/31,
1/5/32,
1/5/33, 1/5/34, 1/5/35,
1/5/36,
1/5/37, 1/5/38, 1/5/39,
1/5/40,
1/5/41, 1/5/42, 1/5/43,
1/5/44,
1/5/45, 1/5/46, 1/5/47,
1/5/48,
1/5/49, 1/5/50, 1/5/51,
1/5/52,
1/5/53, 1/5/54, 1/5/55,
1/5/56,
1/5/57, 1/5/58, 1/5/59,
1/5/60,
1/5/61, 1/5/62, 1/5/63, 1/5/64
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
191
Creating and removing port groups
Creating and removing port groups
You must create a port group with a unique ID before adding N_Ports to the group or enabling Port
Grouping (PG) policy modes. Removing a port group removes all N_Ports, mapped VF_Ports, and
associated PG modes.
Access Gateway must be enabled for the pg command to succeed.
When you enable Access Gateway mode, all ports belong to port group 0 (pg0). You can move ports
to a separate port group by first creating a port group with a unique ID, and then adding N_Ports to
that group. All VF_Ports mapped to added N_Ports also become members of the new group.
Removing a port group removes all N_Ports, mapped VF_Ports, and associated PG modes.
Use the pg pgid command to configure a port group with a unique ID (pgid). The pgid is a number that
cannot exceed the number of N_Ports allocated for the switch model, minus 1 for default pg 0.
Therefore, for a VDX with 16 N_Ports, a valid pgid would be from 1 through 15. Once configured, you
can access the port group for configuration tasks, such as adding and removing N_Ports, enabling
port group modes, and renaming the group. Use the no pg pgid command to remove a port group.
You enter these commands while in Access Gateway (ag) configuration mode.
NOTE
Port Grouping policy is enabled by default when you enable Access Gateway mode.
1. Enter the configure command to enter global configuration mode.
switch# configure
2. Enter the rbridge-id id command to enter RBridge ID mode for the specific switch.
switch(config)# rbridge-id 3
3. Enter the ag command to enter Access Gateway configuration mode.
switch(config-rbridge-id-3)# ag
4. Perform one of the following steps:
• To create a port group, enter the pg pgid command.
switch(config-rbridge-id-3-ag)# pg 1
• To remove a port group, enter the no pg pgid command.
switch(config-rbridge-id-3-ag)# no pg 1
Creating a port group with the pg pgid command enters the PG configuration mode for the port
group ID (pgid) so that you can add N_Ports and perform other PG policy configuration.
switch(config-rbridge-id-3-ag-pg-1)#
5. Verify that the port group was created using the show ag pg pgid rbridge-id rbridge-id command
from privileged EXEC configuration mode. Refer to Displaying port grouping information on page
191 for details.
Naming a port group
You can name or rename a port group and use this name in place of the port group ID.
Access Gateway and the PG policy must be enabled for the rename command to succeed.
Use the rename pgid command while in the configuration mode for a port group to change the port
group name. The name cannot exceed 64 characters.
1. Enter the configurecommand to enter global configuration mode.
switch# configure
2. Enter the rbridge-id rbridge-id command to enter RBridge ID configuration mode for the specific
switch.
switch(config)# rbridge-id 3
192
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Adding and removing N_Ports in a port group
3. Enter the ag command to enter Access Gateway configuration mode.
switch(config-rbridge-id-3)# ag
4. Enter the port group ID, such as pg 1, to enter configuration mode for the port group.
switch(config-rbridge-id-3-ag)# pg 1
5. Change the name of the port group using the rename pgid command. In the following example, port
group is named pg-array24.
switch(config-rbridge-id-3-ag-pg-1)# rename pg-array24
The port group name must not exceed 64 characters.
Adding and removing N_Ports in a port group
After creating a port group, you must add N_Ports to the group. You must delete N_Ports from a group
if you want to move them to another port group or not include them in a port group.
Access Gateway and the PG policy must be enabled for the nport interface fibrechannel command to
succeed.
Use the nport interface fibrechannel port command while in command mode for a specific port group
to add an N_Port to the group. Use the no nport interface fibrechannel port command to remove an
N_Port. Before you can add a port to a port group, you must remove it from the port group where it
currently exists, unless the port is in port group 0 (pg 0). If you remove a port from a port group, it will
default to port group 0. You cannot delete a port from port group 0.
NOTE
Under FlexPort, after you move a VF_Port from one port group to another, it is possible that an N_Port
may not be available in the target port group.
1. Determine the port group on the switch where the port is currently a member by entering the show
ag pg rbridge-id rbridge-id while in the privileged EXEC command mode.
switch# show ag pg rbridge-id 3
2. Enter the configure terminal command to enter global configuration mode.
switch# configure terminal
3. Enter the rbridge-id command to enter rbridge ID configuration mode.
switch(config)# rbridge-id 3
4. Enter the ag command to enter Access Gateway command mode.
switch(config-rbridge-id-3)# ag
5. Enter the port group ID, such as pg 1, to enter configuration mode for the port group where the
N_Port currently resides.
switch(config-rbridge-id-3-ag)# pg 1
6. To delete the N_Port from the group, use the no nport interface fibrechannel port command. In the
following example, N_Port 3 is removed from port group 1.
Before deleting the N_Port, all VF_Ports mapped to the N_Port should be remapped. If the port
resides in port group 0 (pg 0), you do not need to remove it from the port group before adding it to a
different port group and can skip to the next step.
switch(config-rbridge-id-3-ag-pg-1)# no nport interface fibrechannel 3/0/3
You can delete multiple N_Ports by listing the ports separated by spaces as in the following example.
no nport interface fibrechannel 3/0/3 3/0/5
7. Enter the configuration mode for port group ID where you want to add the port, for example pg 2.
switch(config-rbridge-id-3-ag)# pg 2
8. Add the N_Port to the group using the nport interface fibrechannel port command, where port is a
supported N_Port number for the switch in rbridge-id/slot/port format.
switch(config-rbridge-id-3-ag-pg-2)# nport interface fibrechannel 3/0/3
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
193
Port Grouping policy modes
You can add multiple N_Ports by listing the ports separated by spaces. For example:
nport interface fibrechannel 3/0/3 3/0/5
9. Verify that the ports were added or removed from the port groups using the show ag pg rbridge-id
rbridge-id while in the privileged EXEC command mode.
show ag pg rbridge-id 3
Refer to Displaying port grouping information on page 191 for details on this command.
Port Grouping policy modes
Port Grouping policy modes help manage VF_Port and N_Port operation when ports go offline or
when all N_Ports in a group are not connected to the same FC fabric.
There are two Port Grouping policy modes that you can enable using Network OS commands:
• Login Balancing (LB) is enabled by default when you create a port group.
• Modified Managed Fabric Name Monitoring (M-MFNM) mode is enabled with LB mode. You cannot
disable MFNM mode for a port group unless you disable LB mode.
Automatic Login Balancing mode
Automatic Login Balancing (LB) mode works to distribute logins across all available N_Ports in a port
group. It is enabled by default when a port group is created.
Consider the following for LB mode:
• When LB mode is disabled for a port group, the same configured VF_Port to N_Port mapping
displays for the show running-config ag or show ag commands. This is because configured and
active mapping are the same.
• When LB mode is enabled for a port group, the show ag command displays the current, active
mapping because VF_Port to N_Port mapping is based on the current distributed load across all
N_Ports. The show running-config ag command displays the configured mapping only.
• If LB mode is enabled for a port group and a new N_Port comes online, existing logins are
undisturbed. If an N_Port is disabled, its existing logins are distributed to available ports to maintain
a balanced N_Port-to-VF_Port ratio.
• LB can be disabled using Network OS commands. When LB mode is disabled, VF_Ports are not
shared among N_Ports in the port group, but can only connect to N_Ports to which they are
mapped. If an N_Port is disabled, ENodes logged into mapped VF_Ports log out. As a best practice
to ensure device login, bind the ENode to a VF_Port and ensure that its mapped N_Port is online.
• LB mode is disruptive.
• If an N_Port is removed from a port group enabled for LB mode and moved to another port group,
the VF_Ports mapped to that N_Port remain with the N_Port.
This is not the case for port groups not enabled for LB mode. When you remove an N_Port from
one of these port groups, the VF_Ports mapped to the N_Port move to the default Port Group 0
along with the N_Port. You can then move the N_Port to another group, but would need to re-map
any VF_Ports to the N_Port.
• If an N_Port is in a port group and then Automatic Login Balancing is enabled, the VF_Ports
mapped to the N_Port are distributed among online N_Ports in the same port group.
• You can disable or enable LB mode using the no modes lb or modes lb commands while in the
port group configuration mode. Refer to Enabling and disabling Login Balancing mode on page
195.
194
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Enabling and disabling Login Balancing mode
Enabling and disabling Login Balancing mode
Although Login Balancing (LB) mode is enabled by default when you create a port group, you can
disable and enable it using Network OS CLI commands.
Access Gateway and the PG policy must be enabled for the no modes LB or modes lb commands to
succeed.
Enable or disable LB mode using the no modes LB or modes lb commands while in the port group's
configuration mode.
1. Enter the configure terminal command to enter global configuration mode.
switch# configure terminal
2. Enter the rbridge-id id command to enter RBridge ID configuration mode for the specific switch.
switch(config)# rbridge-id 3
3. Enter the ag command to enter Access Gateway configuration mode.
switch(config-rbridge-id-3)# ag
4. Enter the port group ID, such as pg 8, to enter configuration mode for the port group.
switch(config-rbridge-id-3-ag)# pg 8
5. Perform one of the following steps:
• To enable LB mode, enter modes mode_name.
switch(config-rbridge-id-3-ag-pg-8)# modes lb
• To disable LB mode, enter no modes mode_name.
switch(config-rbridge-id-3-ag-pg-8)# no modes lb
Modified Managed Fabric Name Monitoring mode
Modified Managed Fabric Name Monitoring (M-MFNM) mode prevents connections from the AG VDX
switch to multiple SANs to ensure that all N_Ports in a port group connect to the same FC fabric.
Modified Managed Fabric Name Monitoring (M-MFNM) mode is enabled with LB mode. It queries the
FC fabric name for a default time out value of 120 seconds. If it detects an inconsistency, for example
all the N_Ports within a port group are not physically connected to the same physical or virtual FC
fabric, the following occurs:
• N_Ports are disabled to the fabric with the lower number of connected N_Ports.
• If more than one fabric has the same or the maximum number of ports connected, N_Ports are
disabled to the fabric with the higher "fabric names" (WWN of the Principal Switch). Ports connected
to the lowest "fabric name" stay online.
Consider the following about M-MFNM mode:
• M-MFNM mode is enabled by default when you enable LB mode. You cannot disable it unless you
disable LB mode.
• You can change the default time out value (tov) for fabric name queries using the timeout fnm value
when in ag configuration mode. Refer to Setting and displaying the fabric name monitoring TOV on
page 195.
Setting and displaying the fabric name monitoring TOV
You can set the time out value (TOV) for M-MFNM queries of the fabric name to detect whether all
N_Ports in a port group are physically connected to the same physical or virtual fabric.
Access Gateway and the PG policy must be enabled for the timeout fnm command to succeed.
Use the timeout fnm value command while in ag configuration mode to set time-out value (TOV) for MMFNM queries of the fabric name. The valid range is 30 to 3600 seconds. The default value is 120
seconds.
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
195
Trunking in Access Gateway mode
1. Enter the configure command to access global configuration mode.
switch# configure
2. Enter the rbridge-id id command to enter RBridge ID configuration mode for the specific switch.
switch(config)# rbridge-id 3
3. Enter the ag command to enter Access Gateway configuration mode.
switch(config-rbridge-id-3)# ag
4. Enter the timeout fnm value command to change the time out value for fabric name queries.
switch(config-rbridge-id-3-ag)# timeout fnm 60
5. Enter timeout timeout fnm without a value to display the current M-MFNM timeout value.
switch(config-rbridge-id-3-ag)# timeout fnm
() (60)
Trunking in Access Gateway mode
The hardware-based Port Trunking feature enhances management, performance, and reliability of
Access Gateway N_Ports connected to Brocade fabrics.
Trunking in Access Gateway (AG) mode creates trunk groups between N_Ports on the AG module
and F_Ports on the Edge-switch module. AG trunking configuration is mostly on the Edge switch. Note
the following for trunking under Access Gateway:
•
•
•
•
•
•
On Access Gateway ports, trunking is enabled by default.
You can create trunk groups of up to eight ports.
All of the N_Ports in a trunk group should belong to the same AG-module port group.
All of the F_Ports in a trunk group should belong to the same Edge-switch port group.
The maximum number of trunks supported within a port group is four.
On the AG module, ensure consistent speed settings and connector-group settings on all of the
ports within each trunk.
• On the End-switch, ensure consistent speed settings and connector-group settings on all of the
ports within each trunk.
• Round-robin assignment of VF_Ports to N_Ports affects the actual number of N_Ports in a trunk.
Setting up trunking for Access Gateway
Use the following steps to set up trunking under Access Gateway.
Make sure that all of the conditions specified under "Trunking in Access Gateway mode" are fulfilled.
For Edge-switch implementation details, refer to the "Trunking in Access Gateway mode" chapter in
the Fabric OS Access Gateway Administrator's Guide.
1. On the AG-mode switch, in privileged EXEC mode, enter the configure command to change to
global configuration mode.
2. Enter the interface FibreChannel rbridge-id/slot/port command for each port that you are adding to
the trunk.
A configuration submode prompt appears.
3. Enter the trunk-enable command.
The following example configures the link attached to port 4 on RBridge 8 to be part of a trunk
group.
switch# configure
Entering configuration mode terminal
switch(config)# rbridge-id 8
switch(config-rbridge-id-8)# interface FibreChannel 8/0/4
switch(config-FibreChannel-8/0/4)# trunk-enable
196
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Access Gateway under FlexPort
4. Toggle the AG-mode port.
switch(config-FibreChannel-8/0/4)# shutdown
switch(config-FibreChannel-8/0/4)# no shutdown
5. Toggle the Edge-switch port.
Port trunking is now in effect between the specified ports.
NOTE
If you move trunk-group ports out of their common port group, the trunk slave ports will be disabled. If
this happens, recover by entering shutdown and then no shutdown for each disabled port.
Access Gateway under FlexPort
FlexPort functionality enables specific ports to be dynamically reconfigured as either Fibre Channel (FC)
or Ethernet ports, in several modes and speeds. This section deals with Access Gateway (AG) under
FlexPort.
NOTE
For details of FlexPort implementation, refer to "Configuring FlexPort," in the Network OS Layer 2
Switching Configuration Guide.
NOTE
Forward Error Correction (FEC) is not supported in Access Gateway under FlexPort.
Configuring Access Gateway under FlexPort
To use Access Gateway under FlexPort, the best practice is to convert needed Ethernet ports to Fiber
Channel ports before enabling Access Gateway.
For ports that you plan to configure as Fibre Channel (FC) ports under Access Gateway (AG) mode,
note the following default settings:
• All N_Ports are in Port Group 0.
• All ports are configured as Ethernet ports, and none are configured as Fibre Channel (FC) ports.
Do not make the mistake of first configuring Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) and then using
FlexPort to reconfigure Ethernet ports as FC ports. This mistaken order may lead to suboptimal login
balance.
NOTE
If login balance among online N_Ports becomes uneven, refer to "Restoring_Port login balance." You
can also turn off login balancing for a Port Group (as described in "Enabling and disabling Login
Balancing mode") and manually map VF_Ports to N_Ports.
1. Disable Access Gateway.
switch# no ag enable
2. Using FlexPort commands, convert needed Ethernet ports to FC ports.
For details, refer to "Configuring FlexPort," in the Network OS Layer 2 Switching Configuration Guide.
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
197
Restoring N_Port login balance
3. Configure FCoE.
For details, refer to the "FCoE interface configuration" section of the Network OS Layer 2 Switching
Configuration Guide.
4. Enable Access Gateway.
switch# ag enable
The VF_Ports are distributed evenly across all available N_Ports.
Restoring N_Port login balance
If login distribution among online N_Ports becomes uneven, use the clear fcoe login command to
redistribute the logins.
NOTE
The following configurations may cause uneven login distribution:
• Access Gateway under FlexPort (following the initial setup)—Conversion of additional Ethernet
ports to FC ports
• Toggle of N_Ports—If associated VF_Ports log in to another N_Port and remain there
1. To view the list of logged-in devices, enter the show fcoe login command.
switch# show fcoe login
2. To log out the current device and log in to the least-loaded N_Port, enter the clear fcoe login
device command.
switch# clear fcoe login device 10:00:00:05:1e:8e:be:40
3. To log out of all devices in the Port Group, redistribute the VF_Ports to the available N_Ports, and
automatically log back in to all the devices, enter the clear fcoe login rbridge-id command.
N_Port monitoring for unreliable links
N_Port monitoring monitors links between N_Ports on the switch configured in Access Gateway mode
and F_Ports on the connected FC fabric. When links are considered unreliable, the N_Port is disabled.
Links from all N_Ports are monitored for the number of online and offline static change notifications
(SCNs) that occur during a five-minute period. If the number of SCNs on a link exceeds a set
threshold, the link is considered unreliable, and the port is taken offline. VF_Ports mapped to the
N_Port also go offline. Once the number of SCNs drops below the set threshold, the port is deemed
reliable again and the N_Port and the mapped VF_Ports go back online.
The default threshold is 25 SCNs per 5 minutes. You can set from 10 to 100 SCNs per 5 minutes.
While in ag command mode, you can use the counter reliability value command to modify the default
threshold.
Setting and displaying the reliability counter for N_Port monitoring
You can set the reliability count of static change notifications (SCNs) counted during a five-minute
period before the link between a N_Port on a Switch in Access Gateway mode and an F_Port on a FC
fabric is considered unreliable.
Access Gateway mode must be enabled for this procedure to succeed.
198
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Displaying Access Gateway N_Port utilization data
To set the reliability count, use the counter reliability value command while in ag configuration mode
for the switch. The default value is 25 SCNs per 5 minutes. You can set from 10 to 100 SCNs per 5
minutes.
1. Enter the configure terminal command to enter global configuration mode.
switch# configure terminal
2. Enter the rbridge-id id command to enter RBridge ID mode for the specific switch.
switch(config)# rbridge-id 2
3. Enter the ag command to enter Access Gateway configuration mode.
switch(config-rbridge-id-2)# ag
4. Enter the counter reliability value command to change the counter value.
switch(config-rbridge-id-2-ag)# counter reliability 50
5. Enter the counter reliability command without a value to display the current reliability counter. In the
following example, a counter value of 50 is returned.
switch(config-rbridge-id-2-ag)# counter reliability
() (50)
Displaying Access Gateway N_Port utilization data
Under Access Gateway, the show ag nport-utilization command displays N_Port utilization
information. You can display this information either for a specific RBridge or for all the RBridges.
The information displayed indicates the highest bandwidth utililzation and associated time stamp. Two
actions clear such data:
• Enabling the port
• Running clear ag nport-utilization
NOTE
For trunk slave ports, no utilization information is printed. Instead, the bandwidth of such ports is
included in the bandwidth of the trunk master port.
In Privileged EXEC mode, enter show ag nport-utilization.
switch# show ag nport-utilization
Data such as the following displays:
N_Port(Fi) information :
Port
PortID
Attached PWWN
IP_Addr
VF_Ports
------------------------------------------------------------------------------Fi 1/0/7
0xa90900 2f:00:00:05:1e:80:31:4f
10.17.31.169
1/1/1, 1/1/2
highest bandwidth utilization of 11 % recorded at Wed Apr 30 14:07:42 2014
Fi 1/0/8
0xa90900 2f:00:00:05:1e:80:31:4f
10.17.31.169
trunk slave. bandwidth/traffic added to trunk master
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
None
199
Displaying Access Gateway N_Port utilization data
200
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Using System Monitor and Threshold Monitor
● System Monitor overview.............................................................................................. 201
● Configuring System Monitor..........................................................................................202
● Threshold Monitor overview.......................................................................................... 204
● Configuring Threshold Monitor......................................................................................209
System Monitor overview
System Monitor provides customizable monitoring thresholds, which allow you to monitor the health of
each component of a switch. Whenever a switch component exceeds a configured threshold, System
Monitor automatically provides notification by means of e-mail or RASLog messages, depending on the
configuration.
Because of platform-specific values that vary from platform to platform, it was previously not possible to
configure platform-specific thresholds through a global CLI command. In Network OS 4.0.0 and later, it
is possible to monitor individual switches in a logical chassis cluster or fabric cluster. This is done in
RBridge ID configuration mode, by addressing the RBridge ID of the selected switch.
Threshold and notification configuration procedures are described in the following sections.
Monitored components
The following FRUs and temperature sensors are monitored on supported switches:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
LineCard —Displays the threshold for the line card.
MM —Displays the threshold for the management module.
SFM —Displays the threshold for the switch fabric module device.
cid-card —Displays the threshold for the chassis ID card component.
compact-flash —Displays the threshold for the compact flash device.
fan —Configures fan settings.
power —Configures power supply settings.
sfp —Displays the threshold for the small form-factor pluggable (SFP) device.
temp—Displays the threshold for the temperature sensor component.
NOTE
CID cards can be faulted and removed. The system continues to operate normally as long as one CID
card is installed. If both CID cards are missing or faulted, the switch will not operate.
Monitored FRUs
System Monitor monitors the absolute state of the following FRUs:
• Fan
• Power supply
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
201
Configuring System Monitor
• CID card
• SFP
• Line card
Possible states for all monitored FRUs are removed, inserted, on, off, and faulty. A state of none
indicates the switch is not configured. If the FRU is removed, inserted, or goes into a faulty state,
System Monitor sends a RASLog message or an e-mail alert, depending on the configuration.
Based on the configured threshold, each component can be in a marginal state or a down state. If a
component is in a marginal state or a down state, System Monitor generates a RASLog message to
alert the user. It also generates a separate RASLog message for the overall health of the switch.
NOTE
For details about each RASLog message, refer to the "RAS System Messages" chapter of the
Network OS Message Reference.
The following table lists the marginal and down thresholds for components monitored by System
Monitor on supported switches.
TABLE 31 Hardware platform marginal and threshold settings for supported switches
Platform
Hardware component
Marginal threshold
Down threshold
Brocade VDX 6740
Power supply
1
2
Temperature sensor
1
2
Compact flash
1
0
Fan
1
2
Power supply
1
2
Temperature sensor
1
2
Compact flash
1
0
Fan
1
2
Power supply
6
7
Temperature sensor
1
2
Compact flash
1
0
Fan
1
2
Brocade VDX 8770-4
Brocade VDX 8770-8
Configuring System Monitor
This section contains example basic configurations that illustrate various functions of the systemmonitor command and related commands.
NOTE
For command details, refer to the Network OS Command Reference.
202
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Setting system thresholds
Setting system thresholds
Each component can be in one of two states, down or marginal, based on factory-defined or userconfigured thresholds. (The default thresholds are listed in Configuring System Monitor on page 202.)
1. Issue the configure terminal command to enter global configuration mode.
2. Enter RBridge ID configuration mode, as in the following example.
switch(config)# rbridge-id 154
3. Change down-threshold and marginal-threshold values for the SFM.
switch(config-rbridge-id-154)# system-monitor sfm threshold down-threshold 3
marginal-threshold 2
NOTE
You can disable the monitoring of each component by setting down-threshold and marginalthreshold values to 0 (zero).
Setting state alerts and actions
System Monitor generates an alert when there is a change in the state from the default or defined
threshold.
1. Issue the configure terminal command to enter global configuration mode.
2. Enter RBridge ID configuration mode (for RBridge ID 154 in this case).
switch(config)# rbridge-id 154
To enable a RASLog alert when the power supply is removed, enter the following
command:
switch(config-rbridge-id-154)# system-monitor power alert state removed action raslog
NOTE
There are no alerts for MM, compact-flash, or temp. There are no alert actions for
SFPs.
Configuring e-mail alerts
Use the system-monitor-mail fru command to configure e-mail threshold alerts for FRU, SFP,
interface, and security monitoring. For an e-mail alert to function correctly, you must add the IP
addresses and host names to the domain name server (DNS) in addition to configuring the domain
name and name servers. A single email configuration is applicable for all switches in a logical chassis
cluster. For complete information on the system-monitor-mail relay host command, refer to the
Network OS Command Reference.
1. Issue the configure terminal command to enter global configuration mode.
2. Enter the following command to enable e-mail alerts and to configure the e-mail address.
switch(config)# system-monitor-mail fru enable email-id
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
203
Viewing system SFP optical monitoring defaults
Sendmail agent configuration
The following system-monitor-mail relay host commands allow the sendmail
agent on the switch to resolve the domain name and forward all e-mail
messages to a relay server.
• To create a mapping:
switch(config)# system-monitor-mail relay ip-address 1.2.3.4 domain-name
domain_name1.brocade.com
• To delete the mapping:
switch(config)# no system-monitor-mail relay ip-address 1.2.3.4 domain-name
domain_name1.brocade.com
• To change the domain name:
switch(config)# system-monitor-mail relay ip-address 1.2.3.4 domain-name
domain_name2.brocade.com
NOTE
You must delete the first domain name before you can change it to a new
domain name.
• To delete the domain name and return to the default:
switch(config)# no system-monitor-mail relay ip-address 1.2.3.4 domain-name
domain_name2.brocade.com
Viewing system SFP optical monitoring defaults
You can view the optical monitoring default values by entering show defaults threshold followed by
the SFP type.
The following example command will display the defaults for type 1GLR SFPs:
switch# show defaults threshold sfp type 1GLR
Displaying the switch health status
To display the health status of a switch, enter show system monitor.
switch# show system monitor
** System Monitor Switch Health Report **
RBridge 154
switch status
: MARGINAL
Time of Report
: 2013-03-24 20:51:53
Power supplies monitor
: MARGINAL
Temperatures monitor
: HEALTHY
Fans monitor
: HEALTHY
Flash monitor
: HEALTHY
Threshold Monitor overview
The threshold-monitor commands allow you to monitor CPU and memory usage of the system,
interface and SFP environmental status, and security status and be alerted when configured
thresholds are exceeded. These commands are configured in RBridge ID configuration mode to
support fabric cluster and logical chassis cluster topologies.
In addition to the policy keywords (available for interface, SFP, and security monitoring), you can
use thecustom keyword create your own custom policies that have non-default thresholds, and apply
them by means of the apply operand. This allows you to toggle between default settings and saved
204
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
CPU and memory monitoring
custom configuration settings and to apply actions and thresholds separately. For example, you can
choose to use default threshold settings together with a customized subset of available actions, or you
can modify some of the threshold settings and use the default action settings. You can also pause
monitoring and actions by means of the pause keyword.
For detailed information on the variables and keywords (operands) of the threshold-monitor series of
commands, refer to the Network OS Command Reference.
CPU and memory monitoring
When configuring CPU monitoring, specify a value in the 1-100 range. When the CPU usage exceeds
the limit, a threshold monitor alert is triggered. The default CPU limit is 75 percent. With respect to
memory, the limit specifies a usage limit as a percentage of available resources.
When used to configure memory or CPU threshold monitoring, the limit value must be greater than the
low limit and smaller than the high limit. The alert provided is a RASLog message, with the following
options configurable under the raslog option of the threshold-monitor cpu or the threshold-monitor
memory commands:
highlimit
Specifies an upper limit for memory usage as a percentage of available memory.
This value must be greater than the value set by limit. When memory usage
exceeds this limit, a RASLog CRITICAL message is sent. Valid values range from
range from 0 through 80 percent.
limit
Specifies the baseline memory usage limit as a percentage of available resources.
When this value is exceeded, a RASLog WARNING message is sent. When the
usage returns below the value set by limit, a RASLog INFO message is sent.
Valid values range from 0 through 80 percent.
lowlimit
Specifies a lower limit for memory usage as percentage of available memory. This
value must be smaller than the value set by limit. When memory usage exceeds
or falls below this limit, a RASLog INFO message is sent.
poll
Specifies the polling interval in seconds. Valid values range from 0 through 3600.
retry
Specifies the number of polling retries before desired action is taken. Valid values
range from 1 through 100.
NOTE
For CPU and memory thresholds, the low limit must be the lowest value and the high limit must be the
highest value.
The table below lists the factory defaults for CPU and memory thresholds.
TABLE 32 Default values for CPU and memory threshold monitoring
Operand
Memory
CPU
low-limit
40%
N/A
limit
60%
75%
high-limit
70%
N/A
poll
120 seconds
120 seconds
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
205
SFP monitoring
TABLE 32 Default values for CPU and memory threshold monitoring (Continued)
Operand
Memory
CPU
retry
3
3
SFP monitoring
The SFP parameters that can be monitored are listed and described below.
TABLE 33 SFP parameter descriptions
SFP parameter
Description
Suggested SFP impact
Temperature
Measures the temperature of the SFP, in High temperature suggests the SFP might be
degrees Celsius.
damaged.
Receive power (RXP) Measures the amount of incoming laser,
in µWatts.
Describes the condition of the SFP. If this
parameter exceeds the threshold, the SFP is
deteriorating.
Transmit power (TXP) Measures the amount of outgoing laser
power, in µWatts.
Describes the condition of the SFP. If this
parameter exceeds the threshold, the SFP is
deteriorating.
Current
Measures the amount of current
supplied to the SFP transceiver.
Indicates hardware failures.
Voltage
Measures the amount of voltage
supplied to the SFP.
A value higher than the threshold indicates the
SFP is deteriorating.
SFP thresholds
You can customize SFP thresholds or actions by using the threshold-monitor sfp command, which
enables you to perform the following tasks.
• Customize SFP configurations or accept SFP defaults.
• Manage the actions and thresholds for the Current, Voltage, RXP, TXP, and Temperature areas of
the SFP.
• Suspend SFP monitoring.
If you do not provide the SFP type parameters, the default thresholds and actions are used. SFP
types, monitoring areas, and default threshold values for the 16-Gbps and QSFP SFPs are detailed
below.
TABLE 34 Factory thresholds for SFP types and monitoring areas
206
SfpType
Area
Default Value
1 GSR
Temperature (C)
100
-40
Voltage (mV)
3600
3000
RXP (µW)
1122
8
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Using System Monitor and Threshold Monitor
TABLE 34 Factory thresholds for SFP types and monitoring areas (Continued)
SfpType
1 GLR
10 GSR
10 GLR
10 GUSR
QSFP
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Area
Default Value
TXP (µW)
1000
60
Current (mA)
12
2
Temperature (C)
90
-45
Voltage (mV)
3700
2900
RXP (µW)
501
6
TXP (µW)
794
71
Current (m)
45
1
Temperature (C)
90
-5
Voltage (mVolt)
3600
3000
RXP (µW)
1000
32
TXP (µW)
794
251
Current (mA)
11
4
Temperature (C)
88
-5
Voltage (mV)
3600
2970
RXP (µW)
1995
16
TXP (µW)
1585
158
Current (mA)
85
15
Temperature (C)
100
-5
Voltage (mV)
3600
2970
RXP (µW)
2000
32
TXP (µW)
2000
126
Current (mA)
11
3
Temperature (C)
75
-5
Voltage (mV)
3600
2970
RXP (µW)
1995
40
TXP (µW)
0
0
207
Threshold values
TABLE 34 Factory thresholds for SFP types and monitoring areas (Continued)
SfpType
Area
Default Value
Current (mA)
10
1
Threshold values
High and low threshold values are the values at which potential problems might occur. For example, in
configuring a temperature threshold for SFPs, you can select the temperatures at which a potential
problem can occur because of overheating or overcooling.
A combination of high and low threshold settings can cause the following actions to occur:
• Above high threshold — A default or user-configurable action is taken when the current value is
above the high threshold.
• Below high threshold — A default or user-configurable action is taken when the current value is
between the high and low threshold.
• Below low threshold — A default or user-configurable action is taken when the current value is
below the low threshold.
• Above low threshold — monitoring is not supported for this value.
Security monitoring
You can monitor all attempts to breach your SAN security, helping you fine-tune your security
measures. If there is a security breach, you can configure an email or RASLog alert to be sent. The
following security areas are monitored:
• Telnet Violation, which occurs when a Telnet connection request reaches a secure switch from an
unauthorized IP address.
• Login Violation, which occurs when a secure fabric detects a login failure.
The following table lists the factory defaults for security area settings.
TABLE 35 Security area default settings
Area
High threshold
Low threshold
Buffer
Timebase
Telnet Violation
2
1
0
Minute
Login Violation
2
1
0
Minute
Interface monitoring
You can set thresholds for error statistics on all external Gigabit Ethernet interfaces. When any
monitored error crosses the configured high or low threshold, an alert can be generated or a problem
interface can be isolated (refer to Port Fencing on page 209).
Interface error types
The following table describes the interface counters that can be monitored on external interfaces.
208
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Port Fencing
TABLE 36 Interface errors that can be monitored on external interfaces
Interface area
Description
MissingTerminationCharacter Number of frames terminated by anything
other than the Terminate character; this
includes termination due to the Error
character.
CRCAlignErrors
IFG
Port Fencing
support
Threshold defaults
No
Low 12
Buffer 0
High 300
Total number of frames received that had a
No
length (excluding framing bits but including
Frame Check Sequence (FCS) octets) of
between 64 and 1518 octets. The error
indicates either a bad FCS with an integral
number of octets (an FCS error) or a bad
FCS with a non-integral number of octets (an
alignment error).
Low 12
Minimum-length interframe gap (IFG)
between successive frames is violated. A
typical IFG is 12 bytes.
Low 5
Yes
Buffer 0
High 300
Buffer 0
High 100
SymbolErrors
An undefined (invalid) symbol received on
the interface. Large symbol errors indicate a
bad device, cable, or hardware.
No
Low 0
Buffer 0
High 5
NOTE
The default setting for above high threshold, above low threshold, below high threshold, and below low
threshold actions is "[none]."
Port Fencing
A port that is consistently unstable can harm the responsiveness and stability of the entire fabric and
diminish the ability of the management platform to control and monitor the switches within the fabric.
Port Fencing is not enabled by default; it disables the interface if a user-defined high threshold is
exceeded. When a port that has exceeded its user-defined high threshold is fenced by software, the
port is placed in the "Disabled" state and held offline. After a port is disabled, user intervention is
required for frame traffic to resume on the port.
NOTE
Port Fencing is supported for the "RX IFG Violated" error only.
Configuring Threshold Monitor
The following basic configurations illustrate various functions of the threshold-monitor commands.
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
209
Viewing threshold status
NOTE
For CLI details, refer to the Network OS Command Reference
Viewing threshold status
To view the status of currently configured thresholds, enter the show running-config thresholdmonitor command with the RBridge ID, as follows:
switch# show running-config rbridge-id rbridge_id threshold-monitor
NOTE
Default values are not displayed under the show running-config threshold-monitor command. Only
custom values are displayed when a user applies a policy.
To display the default values of thresholds and alert options, enter the show defaults threshold
command, as in the following example for interfaces.
switch# show defaults threshold interface type Ethernet
Type: GigE-Port
+--------+-----------------------+----------------------+------+-------+
|
|
High Threshold
|
Low Threshold
|Buffer|Time
|
|Area
|Value | Above | Below |Value | Above | Below |Value |Base
|
|
|
| Action | Action|
| Action| Action|
|
|
+--------+------+--------+-------+------+-------+-------+------+-------+
|MTC
| 300 | none
| none |
12| none | none |
0|minute |
+--------+------+--------+-------+------+-------+-------+------+-------+
|CRCAlign| 300 | none
| none |
12| none | none |
0|minute |
+--------+------+--------+-------+------+-------+-------+------+-------+
|Symbol |
5 | none
| none |
0| none | none |
0|minute |
+--------+------+--------+-------+------+-------+-------+------+-------+
|IFG
| 100 | none
| none |
5| none | none |
0|minute |
+--------+------+--------+-------+------+-------+-------+------+-------+
MTC - Missing Termination Character
CPU and memory threshold monitoring
NOTE
Support for the custom policy operand is not provided for CPU and memory threshold monitoring.
Configuring CPU monitoring thresholds and alerts
CPU monitoring allows you to set alerts for CPU usage.
1. Enter configure terminal to enter global configuration mode.
switch# configure terminal
switch(config)#
2. Enter rbridge-id rbridge-id# to change to RBridge ID configuration mode.
switch(config)# rbridge-id 154
switch(config-rbridge-id-154)#
3. Enter threshold-monitor cpu ? to view the available options:
switch(config-rbridge-id-154)# threshold-monitor cpu ?
210
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Configuring memory monitoring thresholds and alerts
The following example changes the thresholds from the default, adjusts polling
and retry attempts, and causes a RASLog message to be sent when thresholds
are exceeded.
switch(config-rbridge-id-154)# threshold-monitor cpu actions raslog limit 65 poll 60
retry 10
NOTE
This command does not support low-limit or high-limit under the raslog alert
option.
Configuring memory monitoring thresholds and alerts
CPU monitoring allows you to set alerts for memory usage.
1. Enter configure terminal to enter global configuration mode.
switch# configure terminal
switch(config)#
2. Enter rbridge-id rbridge-id# to change to RBridge ID configuration mode.
switch(config)# rbridge-id 154
switch(config-rbridge-id-154)#
3. Enter threshold-monitor memory ? to view the available options.
switch(config-rbridge-id-154)# threshold-monitor memory ?
The following example changes the thresholds from the default and causes no
message to be sent when thresholds are exceeded.
switch(config-rbridge-id-1)# threshold-monitor memory actions none high-limit 60 lowlimit 40
Configuring SFP monitoring thresholds and alerts
The following is an example of configuring SFP monitoring.
1. Enter configure terminal to enter global configuration mode.
switch# configure terminal
switch(config)#
2. Enter rbridge-id rbridge-id# to change to RBridge ID configuration mode.
switch(config)# rbridge-id 154
switch(config-rbridge-id-154)#
3. Enter threshold-monitor sfp and create a custom policy.
switch(config-rbridge-id-154)# threshold-monitor sfp policy mypolicy type 1glr
area temperature alert above highthresh-action raslog email
NOTE
Refer also to Security monitoring on page 208 for more information.
4. Apply the policy.
switch(config-rbridge-id-154)# threshold-monitor sfp apply mypolicy
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
211
Security monitoring
Security monitoring
Security monitoring allows you to set security threshold and alert options, including login-violation or
telnet-violation alerts.
Viewing security defaults
To display the default values of security threshold and alert options, enter the show defaults security
area command with the login-violation or telnet-violation options.
switch# show defaults security area login-violation
Configuring security monitoring
1. Issue the configure terminal command to enter global configuration mode.
2. Enter RBridge ID configuration mode, as in the following example.
switch(config)# rbridge-id 154
3. Enter the threshold-monitor security command to configure custom login-violation monitoring, as
in the following example.
switch(config-rbridge-id-154)# threshold-monitor security
policy mypolicy area login-violation alert above highthresh-action
raslog below highthresh-action email lowthresh-action none
4. Apply the policy.
switch(config-rbridge-id-154)# threshold-monitor security apply mypolicy
Configuring Interface monitoring
The following sections discuss how to view interface threshold defaults and configure interface
monitoring.
Viewing interface threshold defaults
Use the following command to view interface threshold defaults.
switch# show defaults threshold interface type Ethernet
Refer to Viewing threshold status on page 210 for the results of this command.
Configuring interface monitoring
1. Issue the configure terminal command to enter global configuration mode.
2. Enter RBridge ID configuration mode (in this case, for RBridge ID 154).
switch(config)# rbridge-id 154
3. Enter the threshold-monitor interface command to configure custom interface monitoring, as in
the following example.
switch(config-rbridge-id-154)# threshold-monitor interface policy mypolicy type
ethernet area missingterminationcharacter alert above lowthresh-action email
4. Apply the policy.
switch(config-rbridge-id-154)# threshold-monitor interface apply mypolicy
Pausing and continuing threshold monitoring
By default, threshold monitoring is enabled.
212
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Using System Monitor and Threshold Monitor
To disable monitoring of a particular type, enter the threshold-monitor [cpu |interface | memory |
security | sfp] pause command.
To re-enable monitoring, enter the no of the threshold-monitor command.
NOTE
Not all functions of the threshold-monitor command can be disabled. Continue to enter ? at each level
of the command synopsis to confirm which functions can be disabled.
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
213
Pausing and continuing threshold monitoring
214
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Using VMware vCenter
● vCenter and Network OS integration overview............................................................. 215
● vCenter discovery......................................................................................................... 216
● vCenter configuration.................................................................................................... 216
vCenter and Network OS integration overview
The VMware vCenter Server allows for the management of multiple ESX /ESXi servers and virtual
machines (VMs) from different ESX servers through a single graphical user interface (GUI). It provides
unified management of all the hosts and VMs in the data center, from a single console with an
aggregate performance monitoring of clusters, hosts and VMs.
The VMware vCenter and Brocade Network OS integration supported in Brocade VCS Fabric mode
enables you to discover VMware ESX servers managed by a vCenter server. VMware’s server hosts
(ESX servers) are connected directly to the physical switches through the switch ports (edge ports in
Brocade VCS Fabric mode). The server hosts implement a virtual switch (vSwitch), which is used to
provide connections to the VMs. The fundamental requirement for the vCenter and Network OS
integration is the IP-level management connectivity of the vCenter Server 4.0 version and later with the
Brocade VDX switches.
NOTE
The Network OS integration with vCenter requires vCenter versions 4.0, 4.1, 5.1 or 5.5.
You can view virtual switches and virtual machines, their associated MAC addresses, and network
policies using the Network OS command line interface (CLI). Refer to the Network OS Command
Reference for details about the vcenter and vnetwork commands.
vCenter properties
The vCenter manages the VMware ESX/ESXi hosts. The vCenter user interface is provided through a
vSphere client on the same management network as the vCenter, and virtual machines (VMs) are
created using the vSphere client user interface. In addition to creating the VMs, the server administrator
associates the VMs with distributed virtual switches, distributed virtual port groups, standard virtual
switches (vSwitches) and standard port groups.
The vCenter automatically generates some of the VM properties (such as the MAC address), and some
properties must be configured (such as the VLAN properties). Most of the VM configuration, including
network policies, is done using the vCenter’s vSphere user interface and is beyond the scope of this
document.
For VMWare configuration information, visit the VMware documentation site.
vCenter guidelines and restrictions
Follow these guidelines and restrictions when configuring vCenter:
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
215
vCenter discovery
• Special characters in the port group names are replaced with the URL-encoded values.
• Standard port groups with the same name that reside in different ESX/ESXi hosts must have
identical VLAN settings across all hosts.
• For all vCenter port groups, Network OS automatically creates a port profile with the following
format: auto-vcenter_name-datacenter_ID-port-group-name. User editing of these auto port groups
is not supported.
• Network OS supports vCenter discovery that is based on events.
• Network OS supports LLDP and QoS (IEEE 8021.p) for distributed virtual switches (dvSwitches).
• Using port-profile names fewer than 63 characters has been shown to conserve CPU resources.
• CDP/LLDP-receiving interface ports must not have any conflicting configurations on the interface
that prevent them from being in a port-profiled mode.
• An interface is prevented from becoming a port-profile-port only when conflicting switchport, QoS,
and security configurations reside on the interface. An FCoE configuration on the interface does not
prevent a port-profile-port configuration.
• Before configuring a vCenter in the fabric, remove all the manually created port profiles that have
vCenter inventory MAC associations.
• Up to four vCenter configurations are supported per fabric, with support for multiple data centers.
• Duplicate vCenter asset values are not supported, such as duplicate MAC addresses and duplicate
Host names.
NOTE
Refer to the Release Notes for the number of port groups supported per platform, as well as other
related information.
vCenter discovery
A Brocade VDX switch connected to VMware ESX/ESXi hosts and virtual machines must be aware of
network policies in order to allow or disallow traffic; this requires a discovery process by the VDX
switch. During VDX switch configuration, relevant vCenters that exist in its environment and the
discovery of virtual assets from the vCenter occurs in the following circumstances:
• When a switch boots up
• When a new vCenter is configured on the VDX switch and activated (activation turns on the timer
processing, set to 30-minute intervals)
• When the discovery is explicitly initiated with the CLI
The following assets are discovered from the vCenter:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Hosts and data centers associated with the vCenter
Virtual machines (VMs) that have been created on the hosts
VMware distributed virtual port groups (dvPortGroups)
Standard port groups, with QoS priority associated with a dvPortGroup
Standard virtual switches
Distributed virtual switches
vCenter configuration
Configuring vCenter consists of three basic steps performed in this order:
216
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Step 1: Enabling QoS
1. Enabling VMware vSphere QoS.
2. Enabling CDP/LLDP on switches.
3. Adding and activating the vCenter.
These steps and postconfiguration steps are discussed in this section.
Step 1: Enabling QoS
You must edit the network resource pool settings and set QoS priorities. Refer to the latest VMware
vSphere Networking documentation.
Step 2: Enabling CDP/LLDP
In order for an Ethernet Fabric to detect the ESX/ESXi hosts, you must first enable Cisco Discovery
Protocol (CDP) and Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) on all the virtual switches (vSwitches) and
distributed vSwitches (dvSwitches) in the vCenter Inventory.
For more information, refer to the VMware KB article 1003885.
Enabling CDP/LLDP on vSwitches
Complete the following steps to enable CDP/LLDP on virtual switches (vSwitches).
1. Login as root to the ESX/ESXi Host.
2. Use the following command to verify the current CDP/LLDP settings.
[[email protected] root]# esxcfg-vswitch -b vSwitch1
3. Use the following command to enable CDP/LLDP for a given virtual switch. Possible values here are
advertise or both.
[[email protected] root]# esxcfg-vswitch -B both vSwitch1
Enabling CDP/LLDP on dvSwitches
Complete the following steps to enable CDP on distributed virtual switches (dvSwitches).
1. Connect to the vCenter server by using the vSphere Client.
2. On the vCenter Server home page, click Networking.
3. Right-click the distributed virtual switches (dvSwitches) and click Edit Settings.
4. Select Advanced under Properties.
5. Use the check box and the drop-down list to change the CDP/LLDP settings.
Step 3: Adding and activating the vCenter
After CDP is enabled on all the vSwitches and dvSwitches in the vCenter, configuration on the Network
OS side is a two-step process, consisting of adding the vCenter and activating the vCenter.
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
217
Adding the vCenter
Adding the vCenter
You must add the vCenter before initiating any discovery transactions. To authenticate with a specific
vCenter, you must first configure the URL, login, and password properties on the VDX switch.
NOTE
By default, the vCenter server accepts only HTTPS connection requests.
1. Enter the vcenter command with the name, URL, user name, and password of the vCenter.
switch(config)# vcenter myvcenter url https://10.2.2.2 username user password pass
2. An invalid state or condition of a vCenter can cause the deletion of all auto-port-profiles in a system.
To prevent this from happening, configure the ignore-delete-all-response operand of the vcenter
command to ignore the “delete-all” responses from the vCenter.
switch# vcenter MYVC discover ignore-delete-all-response 5
Activating the vCenter
After adding the vCenter, you must activate the configured vCenter instance.
NOTE
In VCS mode, you can configure the vCenter by using any node. Discovery is initiated by the primary
node.
1. Enter the configure terminal command.
2. Enter the vcenter command to activate the vCenter.
switch(config)# vcenter myvcenter activate
Immediately following first-time vCenter activation, the Network OS starts the virtual asset discovery
process. Use the show vnetwork vcenter status command to display the vnetwork status, as in
the following example.
switch# show vnetwork vcenter status
vCenter
Start
Elapsed (sec)
Status
================ ==================== ================ =============
myvcenter
2011-09-07 14:08:42 10
In progress
When the discovery process completes, the status displays as "Success." Network OS has
performed all the necessary configurations needed for the vCenter Server, and is now ready for
CDP transmissions from the virtual switches to identify which ESX/ESXi host is connected to which
physical interface in the Ethernet Fabric.
Discovery timer interval
By default, Network OS queries the vCenter updates every thirty minutes. If any virtual assets are
modified (for example, adding or deleting virtual machines (VMs), or changing VLANs), Network OS
detects those changes and automatically reconfigures the Ethernet Fabric during the next periodic
rediscovery attempt.
Use the vcenter interval command to manually change the default timer interval value to suit the
individual environment needs.
switch(config)# vcenter myvcenter interval ?
Possible completions:
<NUMBER:0-1440> Timer Interval in Minutes (default = 30)
218
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
User-triggered vCenter discovery
NOTE
Best practice is to keep the discovery timer interval value at the default (30). A value of 0 disables the
periodic vCenter discovery.
User-triggered vCenter discovery
The discovery of virtual assets from the vCenter occurs during one of the following circumstances:
• When a switch boots up.
• When a new vCenter is configured on the VDX switch and activated (activation turns on the timer
processing, set to 180-second intervals.)
• When the discovery is explicitly initiated with the CLI.
To explicitly initate vCenter discovery, perform the following task in global configuration mode.
1. An invalid state or condition of a vCenter can cause the deletion of all auto-port-profiles in a system.
To prevent this from happening, configure the ignore-delete-all-response operand of the vcenter
command to ignore the “delete-all” responses from the vCenter.
switch(config)# vcenter MYVC discover ignore-delete-all-response 5
2. Return to privileged EXEC mode with the exit command.
switch(config)# exit
switch#
3. Use the vnetwork vcenter command to trigger a vCenter discovery manually.
switch# vnetwork vcenter myvcenter discover
Viewing the discovered virtual assets
Enter one of the following show vnetwork asset commands:
• show vnetwork datacenter vcenter vcenter_name
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
NOTE
The datacenter keyword is optional in the following commands and need not be used unless
required.
show vnetwork dvpgs datacenter datacenter_id vcenter vcenter_name
show vnetwork dvs datacenter datacenter_id vcenter vcenter_name
show vnetwork hosts datacenter datacenter_id vcenter vcenter_name
show vnetwork pgs datacenter datacenter_id vcenter vcenter_name
show vnetwork vcenter status
show vnetwork vmpolicy macaddr datacenterdatacenter_id vcenter vcenter_name
show vnetwork vms datacenter datacenter_id vcenter vcenter_name
show vnetwork vss datacenter datacenter_id vcenter vcenter_name
where:
•
•
•
•
•
•
dvpgs — Displays discovered distributed virtual port groups.
dvs — Displays discovered distributed virtual switches.
hosts — Displays discovered hosts.
pgs — Displays discovered standard port groups.
vcenter status — Displays configured vCenter status.
vmpolicy — Displays the following network policies on the Brocade VDX switch: associated media
access control (MAC) address, virtual machine, (dv) port group, and the associated port profile.
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
219
Using VMware vCenter
• vms — Displays discovered virtual machines (VMs).
• vss — Displays discovered standard virtual switches.
Refer to the Network OS Command Reference for detailed information about the show vnetwork
commands.
220
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Configuring Remote Monitoring
● RMON overview............................................................................................................ 221
● Configuring and managing RMON................................................................................ 221
RMON overview
Remote monitoring (RMON) is an Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF) standard monitoring
specification that allows various network agents and console systems to exchange network monitoring
data. The RMON specification defines a set of statistics and functions that can be exchanged between
RMON-compliant console managers and network probes. As such, RMON provides you with
comprehensive network-fault diagnosis, planning, and performance-tuning information.
Configuring and managing RMON
Both alarms and events are configurable RMON parameters.
• Alarms allow you to monitor a specific management information base (MIB) object for a specified
interval, triggers an alarm at a specified value (rising threshold), and resets the alarm at another
value (falling threshold). Alarms are paired with events; the alarm triggers an event, which can
generate a log entry or an SNMP trap.
• Events determine the action to take when an event is triggered by an alarm. The action can be to
generate a log entry, an SNMP trap, or both. You must define the events before an alarm can be
configured. If you do not configure the RMON event first, you will receive an error when you configure
the alarm settings.
By default, no RMON alarms and events are configured and RMON collection statistics are not enabled.
Configuring RMON events
You can add or remove an event in the RMON event table that is associated with an RMON alarm
number.
To configure RMON events, perform the following steps from privileged EXEC mode.
1. Enter the configure terminal command to access global configuration mode.
switch# configure terminal
2. Configure the RMON event.
switch(config)# rmon event 27 description Rising_Threshold log owner
trap syslog
john_smith
3. Return to privileged EXEC mode.
switch(config)# end
4. Save the running-config file to the startup-config file.
switch# copy running-config startup-config
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
221
Configuring RMON Ethernet group statistics collection
Configuring RMON Ethernet group statistics collection
You can collect RMON Ethernet group statistics on an interface. RMON alarms and events must be
configured for you to display collection statistics. By default, RMON Ethernet group statistics are not
enabled.
Ethernet group statistics collection is not supported on ISL links.
To collect RMON Ethernet group statistics on an interface, perform the following steps from privileged
EXEC mode.
1. Enter the configure terminal command to access global configuration mode.
switch# configure terminal
2. Enter the interface command to specify the interface type and RBridge-id/slot/port number.
switch(config)# interface tengigabitethernet 1/0/1
3. Enable the DCB interface.
switch(conf-if-te-1/0/1)# no shutdown
4. Configure RMON Ethernet group statistics on the interface.
switch(conf-if-te-1/0/1)# rmon collection stats 200 owner john_smith
5. Return to privileged EXEC mode.
switch(conf-if-te-1/0/1)# end
6. Enter the copy command to save the running-config file to the startup-config file.
switch# copy running-config startup-config
Configuring RMON alarm settings
To configure RMON alarms and events, perform the following steps from privileged EXEC mode.
1. Enter the configure terminal command to access global configuration mode.
switch# configure terminal
2. Configure the RMON alarms.
Example of an alarm that tests every sample for a rising threshold
switch(config)# rmon alarm 5 1.3.6.1.2.1.16.1.1.1.5.65535 interval 30
absolute rising-threshold 95 event 27 owner john_smith
Example of an alarm that tests the delta between samples for a falling threshold
switch(config)# rmon alarm 5 1.3.6.1.2.1.16.1.1.1.5.65535 interval 10 delta
falling-threshold 65 event 42 owner john_smith
3. Return to privileged EXEC mode.
switch(config)# end
4. Save the running-config file to the startup-config file.
switch# copy running-config startup-config
5. To view configured alarms, use the show running-config rmon alarm command.
Monitoring CRC errors
Certain interface counters, such as those for CRC errors, may not be available by means of SNMP
OIDs. In this case it is recommended that either RMON or CLI be used to monitor those statistics.
The following synchronizes the statistics maintained for the interface and RMON, as well as ensures
proper reporting from an operational standpoint.
1. First use the clear counters all command in global configuration mode.
device# clear counters all
2. Then use the clear counters rmon command.
device# clear counters rmon
222
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Configuring Remote Monitoring
3. Finally, execute the rmon collection stats command on each interface, as in the following example.
device(config)# interface tengigabitethernet 170/0/1
device(conf-if-te-170/0/1)# rmon collection stats 2 owner admin
4. Use an appropriate RMON MIB for additional monitoring.
For example, to obtain CRC statistics on a Brocade VDX platform, the following RMON MIB could be
used: Object-etherStatsCRCAlignErrors, OID- .1.3.6.1.2.1.16.1.1.1.8
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
223
Monitoring CRC errors
224
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
Index
A
Access Gateway
creating port groups 192
display AG configuration and state 184
displaying port grouping information 191
displaying port mapping 186
features, requirements, and limitations 180
Login Balancing mode 194, 195
M-MFNM mode 195
N_Port monitoring 198
naming a port group 192
operation in logical chassis cluster 177
Port Grouping policy 190
port group policy modes 194
port mapping 177
port types 177
Setting fabric name monitoring TOV 195
supported ports 177
transitioning from native VCS mode 177
VF_Port to N_Port mapping 186
Access Gateway mode
basic concepts 173
comparing to ISL and FCR connection
port comparison 178
comparison to ISLs 173
configuring port mapping 189
connecting to FC fabric 173
connecting to hosts 173
disabling 184
enabling 183
FC switch F_Ports 173
requirements to enable 173
trunking 196
under FlexPort
configuring 197
overview 197
restoring login balance 198
VF_Ports and N_Ports 173
adding
zone member 147
alias
adding members 144
creating 144
deleting 145
removing members 145
Automatic Login Balancing mode for AG 194
automatic uploading of supportSave data 69
autoupload configuration, displaying 69
B
Brocade MIB files 98
C
capturing supportSave data 68
chassis
disable 67
enable 67
chassis name
displaying 52
setting 52
command line interface 29
configuration
backup 86
default 84
in Brocade VCS Fabric mode 90
in fabrics 89
restore default 88
restoring 87
running 83
startup 83
startupconfiguration
displayconfiguration
save 84
configuration commands 62
configuration file
display settings 83
save to a host 83
configuring
SNMP 95, 106
connection, serial 29
console 29
copy support 68
creating
zone configurations 150
creating an alias 144
creating a zone 146
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
225
D
adding a node 59
characteristics 37
configuration 38
creating 53
description 36
mode conversions 58, 59
mode transitions 54, 57
principal node setting 53, 58
removing a node 59
replacing a node 60
default account 43
deleting an alias 145
displaying configuration settings 83
E
Ethernet
management interface, configuring 47
management interfaces 34
ethernet management interface 34
Ethernet port 43
F
fabric cluster 77
fastboot 67
file management 92
flash
deleting a file 92
listing contents 92
renaming a file 92
FlexPort
Access Gateway 197
Login Balancing mode
enabling and disabling 195
LSAN zone
example of 161
naming 136
M
management module
high availability 41
management modules 40
management port 29
managing supportSave data 68
mapping Access Gateway ports 186
MIB loading order 100
MIB variables
access 97
described 97
mixed-version 77
H
HA failover 41
high availability
management module 41
host name
displaying 52
setting 52
M-MFNM mode
Setting fabric name monitoring TOV 195
Modified Managed Fabric Name Monitoring mode 194,
195
modular chassis
rebooting 68
N
I
In-service software upgrades 41
IPv6
autoconfiguration 50
L
lights out management 34, 35
loading Brocade MIBs 98
logical chassis cluster
N_Port login balance
restoring 198
N_Port monitoring
setting reliability counter 198
N_Ports for AG mode 177
network interface
displaying 50
O
operational modes 36
out of band management 34, 35
226
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
P
physical connection 43
port grouping display 191
port grouping modes 194
Port Grouping policy
M-MFNM mode 195
Port Grouping Policy
Login Balancing mode 194
port groups for Access Gateway 192
port mapping display 186
port mapping for Access Gateway mode 189
accessing securely 45
attributes 35
chassis name 35
connecting to 43
fastbooting 67
host name 35
identification 35
rebooting 67
reloading 67
switch function in Access Gateway mode 173
switchType 36
switch type
identifying 53
system configuration file
R
deleting 92
renaming 92
reboot 67
reliability counter for N_Port monitoring 198
reload 67
remote lights out management 34, 35
restoring configuration 87
S
securely accessing a switch 45
secure shell 29
serial connection 29
Simple Network Management Protocol. , See SNMP
SNMP, configuring 95, 106
SNMP v3 106
SSH
deleting public key 46
establishing connection 45
importing public key 45
re-enabling service 47
shutting down service 46
supportSave
automatic uploading of data 69
capturing and managing data 68
erasing data 70
uploading data 68
switch
T
telnet 29
Telnet
connecting 44
re-enabling service 44
shutting down service 44
Top-of-Rack 67
ToR 67
trunking
Access Gateway 196
U
understanding MIBs 96
understanding SNMP basics 96
USB 87
USB device 68
W
warm recovery. , See HA failover
Z
zone
alias, adding membersadding alias members 144
alias, deleting 145
alias, removing members
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01
227
removing alias members 145
aliases, creating and managing 143
configuration, definition 138
creating 146
creating configurations 150
deleting 148
member, adding 144, 145, 147
member, deleting 145, 147
merging 156
resources, optimizing 133
splitting a fabric 158
WWN
adding 144
WWN, adding 144, 145, 147
WWN, deleting 145, 147
zone configuration, adding to 150
zone configuration
creating 150
deleting 152
deleting all 153
disabling 152
enabling 151
zone, adding 150
zone, removing from 151
zoning
database size for 143
default mode, setting 142
default modes, All Access 142
default modes, No Access 142
default modes, overview 142
defined configuration 138
defined configuration, viewing 148
downgrade 140
enabled configuration 138
enabled configuration, viewing 149
example of 155
LSAN, example of 161
LSAN, overview 133
LSAN configuration 135
management of 141
objects for 138
overview 133
supported firmware 140
transaction abort 153
transaction commit 141
228
Network OS Administrator’s Guide
53-1003656-01